01ass_:: — I LATIN GRAMMAR, CONTAINING ; PART I. THE ETON GRAMMAR, REVISED AND CORRECTED ; PART II. A SECOND OR LARGER GRAMMAR, IN ENGLISH, FOR THE HIGHER CLASSES IN SCHOOLS, ETC. BY THE REV. J. T. WHITE, A.M. OF C. C. C. OXFORD, JUNIOR UPPER MASTER OF CHRIST'S HOSPITAL, LONDON; EDITOR OF XENOPHON'S ANABASIS, ETC. LONDON: LONGMAN, BROWN, GREEN, AND LONGMANS. 1852. London : Spottiswoodes and Shwy, New-street- Sqmare. PREFACE. Those who are acquainted with the respective values of the various elementary works employed in this country for imparting a knowledge of the rudiments of Latin will not be backward in awarding a very high place to that form of Edward the Sixth's Grammar, i known as the Eton Latin Grammar. So great, ; indeed, are its merits in many respects, that not a few of those engaged in tuition have long looked for such a revision of it as would render it more extensively serviceable. Their hopes, however, not having been hitherto realized, the Editor has betaken himself to the task, and has brought to its execution the results of the observations and convictions of a long course of teach- ing in a very large school. The object, then, proposed to himself by the Editor has been, so to remodel and extend the Eton Grammar as to produce a work adapted to the use of beginners, and, at the same time, calculated to meet the require- ments of boys who, having mastered the first principles of the language, need additional information for the guidance of their studies. It seemed to him that this would be best obtained by dividing it into two parts, each having reference to the especial case of those for whom it is designed, — yet so blended together, both in method and arrangement, as to form but one Grammar, Part I. is the Old Eton Grammar, revised and cor- A 2 IV PREFACE. reeled throughout. In the Accidence clearer definitions have been given, and in many places a more lucid ar- rangement adopted. The Propria quce maiibus, Qua genus, As inprcesenti, and Prosody have also been altered, where it appeared either needful or desirable, in such a way that the main plan of the work remains un- changed, while it is hoped that here also a greater amount of perspicuity has been obtained. It is, however, in the Syntax that the principal altera- tions will be found. The Editor has, in past years, often observed the perplexity of beginners in entering upon this part of their studies. In many instances the rules were too long ; in some, the principle under state- ment was by no means clearly enunciated; while in the deviations from the main rules there was much utterly incomprehensible to a child, and which, if it had to be committed to the memory at the outset of his career, incumbered his mind with what he did not need at the time, and what, after all, was quite inadequate for his wants when he had made any progress. In order, therefore, to simplify this portion of the work, and to make it what it professes to be — an Introduction to the Latin Tongue — he has thrown out all that was net needed for direct parsing: from the remainder he has taken away what appeared to obscure rather than elucidate the matters treated of : while, further still, he has here and there introduced some new rule that was required, and occasionally corrected what were mani- festly wrong views of the structure of the language. Moreover, bearing in mind the wants of beginners he has added, at the close of the First Part, Directions for Construing and Parsing, and thrown together some PREFACE. V few of the principal points to be observed in writing Hexameters and Pentameters. Into Part IL, beyond a developement of the funda- mental rules given in Part L, many wholly new subjects have been introduced. What these are will be seen by a reference to the Table of Contents. Yet the Editor would invite attention to the information supplied re- specting the powers of the Moods, and the succession of Tenses ; and, also, to the very great enlargement of the Prosody. In the latter, the various metres in use among the Latin Poets have been so fully explained, that writing according to their correct prosodial struc- ture is rendered a matter not difficult of attainment. There is neither an attempt nor a desire to assert that, in what has thus been done, an explanation will be found for every individual idiomatic expression and every isolated peculiarity of the language. The very size of the book would alone refute the claim to a universal solution of difficulties, if it were put forth. Yet it is both hoped and believed, that sufficient ma- terials have been collected for enabling the student to read the works of the Latin writers with much critical accuracy, and with corresponding profit. Christ's Hospital, June, 1852. CONTENTS, PART I. Page Letters 1 Parts of Speech 2 Of a Noun, &c. - - -2 Declensions of Nouns Substan- tive 3 Declension of Nouns Adjective 1 Comparison of Adjectives - 14 Of a Pronoun - - - 1 7 Of a Verb - 21 Of the Moods - 22 Of the Tenses - - . 23 Of Gerunds and Supines - 23 Of Participles - - - 24 Of Numbers and Persons - 24 The Verb Sum - 24 Conjugation of Verbs Active - 27 " Passive 41 Deponent Verbs - - - 53 Irregular do. - - - 54 Defective do. - - - 73 Impersonal do. - - 79 Of an Adverb - - - 79 Of a Conjunction - - - 79 Of a Preposition - - - 79 Of an Interjection - - 80 Propria quje Mambus - 81 Qu^e Genus - - - 87 As in Prmsenti - - - 90 Syntax - 101 Nominative Case and Verb - 101 Substantive and Adjective - 102 Relative and Antecedent - 102 Page Substantives - - - 103 Adjectives — Genitive after - 104 " Dative do. - 105 " Accusative do. - 105 " Ablative do. - 106 Pronouns - - - - 107 Verbs — Nominative after - 107 " Genitive do. - - 108 " Dative do. - - 109 " Accusative do. - 1 1 1 " Ablative do. - - 112 Infinitive Mood - - - 1 14 Gerunds and Supines - - 114 Gerunds - - - - 115 Supines - - - - 116 Participles - - - - 116 Impersonal Verbs - - 117 Time 117 Space of Place - - - 118 Names of Places - - - 118 Adverbs - - - - 119 Conjunctions - 120 Prepositions - - - 120 Interjections - - - 121 Prosody - - - - 123 Propria quje Maribus con- strued - - - - 132 Quje Genus do. - - - 141 As in Prjesenti do. - - 146 Syntax do. - - - - 161 Prosody do. - - - 185 PART II. Letters Syllables - Pronunciation Inflection Derivation - - 206 - 206 - 207 - 207 208 Declension of Nouns Substan- tive - 208 Irregular Nouns - - - 218 Nouns with different meanings in singular and plural - 220 Adjectives - - - - 221 Numeral Adjectives - - 223 Roman Numeral Figures - 224 Fractions - - - - 225 Pronouns - - - - 225 Explanation of Terms used in Syntax - - - - 226 Syntax - - - - 227 Nominative Case and Verb - 227 The Substantive and Adjective 229 Relative and Demonstrative Pronouns - 233 Vlll CONTENTS. Page Substantive, Genitive after the 236 Apposition - - - - 238 Genitive and Ablative of the Quality - 239 Adjective — Genitive after the 239 " Dative do. - - 241 " Accusative do. - 243 " Ablative do. - 243 Pronouns - - - 246 Verb — Genitive after the - 249 " Dative do. - - 251 " Accusative do. - - 254 " Ablative do. - - 258 Tenses - - - - 262 Paraphrastic Conjugation - 264 Tenses of Subjunctive Mood - 265 Succession of Tenses in Depen- dent Clauses - - - 265 Indicative Mood - - - 267 Imperative Mood - - - 267 " ne used with 269 " Paraphrased 269 Subjunctive Mood - - - 270 Hypothetical and Conditional Clauses, and those contain- ing an Inference or Conclu- sion - 270 Independent Clauses - - 271 Dependent do. - - - 273 Indirect Questions - - 276 Relative Clauses - - - 276 Infinitive Mood - - - 280 " as subject - - - 280 " without subject expressed 280 " with subject expressed - 283 " Historical - - - 287 " in indirect Questions - 287 " Verbs with Inf. and Subj. 288 " Various Uses of Infinitive 290 " Fore or futurum esse, ut - 292 Gerunds and Gerundives - 293 Supines - - . 295 Participles - - - - 296 Impersonal Verbs - - 298 Time 300 Space of Place - - - 301 Names of Places - 302 Adverbs - 303 Particles of Time - 305 " Interrogative - - 307 /-. . . Pa s e Conjunctions - 309 Prepositions - - - - 312 Interjections - - ~ 313 Explanation of Grammatical and Rhetorical Figures - 314 Prosody, Divisions of - - 322 Tone or Accent - - - 323 Breathing - 323 Time 323 Feet 324 " explained - 324 Arsis and Thesis - - - 325 Metre 325 Prosodial Figures - - - 326 Hexameter Verse - - - 327 Pentameter do. - - - 330 Other Dactylic Metres - - 330 Anapaestic Verse - - - 331 Cretic Verse - 332 Bacchiac Verse - 333 Iambic Verse - 333 Choliambus or Scazon - - 336 Trochaic Verse - - - 337 Ionic a Majori - - - 337 " a Minori - - - 337 Choriambic Verse - - 338 Compound Verses - - 338 Versus Aristophanicus - - 339 " Alcaicus decasyllabus - 339 " Elegiambus - - 339 " Archilochius Major - 339 " Pherecrateus - - 340 " PhcelcEcius - - 340 " Glyconicus - - 340 " Asclepiadeus Minor - 340 " " Major - 340 " Alcaicus hendecasyllabus 341 " Iambelegus - - 341 " Sapphicus hendecasyl- labus - - - 341 " Sapphicus Major - 342 " Galliambicus - - 342 Horatian Metres - - 343 Table of Reference to 345 Roman Calendar - 346 Mode of reckoning Days of Month - - - - 347 Computation of Money - - 347 Abbreviations in more common use - 348 AN INTRODUCTION TO THE LATIN TONGUE. PART I. The Latin Letters are twenty-five in number, and are thus written : — Capitals. ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVXYZ. Small, or Common. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvxyz. Of these Letters, six are named Vowels ; a, e, i, o, u, and y in words derived from the Greek. The rest are called Consonants. A vowel makes a full and perfect sound of itself, as e. A consonant has no sound, unless joined with a vowel, as b-e, be. Consonants are divided into liquids, double consonants, and mutes. The liquids are I, m, n, r. The double consonants are x and z : x is formed of cs or gs ; and z of ds or ts. The remaining letters are called mutes. H, strictly speaking, is not a letter, but the mark of the asnirated or hard breathing. Y, Z, are found only in words originally Greek. A syllable is a distinct sound of one or more letters pronounced in a breath. A diphthong is the sound of two vowels in one syllable. Diphthongs are five in number ; au, eu, ei, ae, oe. The last two are commonly pronounced as the vowel e, and are often joined and written thus, JE a, CE os. B LATIN GRAMMAK. THE PAETS OF SPEECH. The Parts of Speech are Seven : 1. Noun, Pronoun, Verb ; declined. 2. Adverb, Conjunction, Preposition, Interjection; undeclined. OF A NOUN. A Noun is the name of a Being, a Place, a Thing, or a Quality. Nouns are of two kinds, Substantives and Adjectives. A noun substantive declares its own meaning, and re- quires not another word to be joined with it, to show its signification ; and has commonly in English, a, an, or the, before it : as, homo, a man ; angelus, an angel ; liber, the book. Nouns substantive are divided into Proper Nouns, and Appellative or Common Nouns. A proper noun, or proper name, points out some par- ticular person or thing to whom or which alone it be- longs : as, Augustus, Augustus ; Roma, Rome. An appellative, or common noun, points out one of a class or kind : as, rex, a king ; arbor, a tree. A noun adjective always requires to be joined with a substantive, of which it shows the nature or quality : as, bonus puer, a good boy ; malus puer, a naughty boy. NUMBERS OF NOUNS. Nouns have two numbers ; the Singular, and the Plural. The singular speaks of one only ; as, Pater, a Father. The plural speaks of more than one; as, Patres, Fathers. NOUNS. N.B. — Proper names are not declined in the plural number, if they speak of one person only. But when two or more persons have the same proper name in common, the plural number is used. CASES OF NOUNS. Nouns have six cases in each number : The Nominative, the Genitive, the Dative, the Accusa- tive, the Vocative, and the Ablative. The nominative case comes before the verb, and answers to the question, who ? or what ? as, who teaches ? Magister docet, the master teaches. The genitive case is known by the sign of*, and answers to the question, whose ? or, whereof? as, whose learning ? doctrina magistri, the learning of the master, or, the master's learning. The dative case is known by the signs to or for, and answers to the question to or for whom ? or to or for what ? as, To whom do I give the book ? Do librum magistro, I give the book to the master. The accusative case follows the verb, and answ T ers to the question, whom ? or what ? as, Whom do you love ? Amo magistrum, I love the master. The vocative case is known by calling, or speaking to ; as, 6 magister, o master. The ablative case is known by prepositions, expressed or understood, governing the ablative case : as, de ma- gistro, of the master ; coram magistro, before the master. * The Genitive Case in English is frequently expressed by the Letter s, with an Apostrophe, in this manner 's : as, my Father's Son ; that is, the Son of my Father. Also observe, that when of, signifies concerning, it is the sign of the Ablative case. B 2 LATIN GRAMMAR. Also the prepositions in, with, from, by, and the word than after the comparative degree, are signs of the ab- lative case. THE GENDERS OF NOUNS SUBSTANTIVE. The Genders of nouns substantive are three : the masculine, the feminine, and the neuter. The masculine belongs to males : the feminine, to females : and the neuter (i. e. neither masculine nor feminine), to things without life. A noun substantive belonging to both the masculine and feminine genders, is called a noun of the common gender : as, parens, a parent ; which is masculine, when it speaks of a father ; feminine, when it speaks of a mother. A noun substantive which is found sometimes in the masculine, sometimes in the feminine gender, is called a noun of the doubtful gender : as, anguis, a snake ; dies, a day. A noun substantive, which under one gender denotes both sexes, is called a noun of the epicene gender: as, (feminine") aquila, an eagle ; and (masculine) passer, a sparrow; are used of both the male and female of those birds. A straight line (-) placed over a vowel, shows that it is to be made long in pronunciation : as, amare. A curved line ( u ) placed over a vowel shows that it is to be made short in pronunciation : as, regere. Two points ( . . ) placed over a vowel show that it is not to be joined to another vowel going before it, so as to form a diphthong with it, but is to be pronounced separately : as, aer (a-er), diet (di-e-i). DECLENSION OF NOUNS SUBSTANTIVE. DECLENSION OF NOUNS SUBSTANTIVE There are five declensions of substantives, distin- guished by the ending of the genitive case singular. THE FIRST DECLENSION. The first declension makes the genitive case singular to end in 02. Musa — feminine. Plural. Singular. N. Mus-a, a song, G. Mus-ae, of a song, D. Mus-ae, to a song, A. Mus-ani, a song, V. Mus-a, o song, A. Mus-£i, from a song. N. Mus-ae, songs, G. Mus-arum, of songs, D. Mus-is, to songs, A. Mus-as, songs, V. Mus-ae, o songs, A. Mus-is, from songs. N.B. — For those nouns which form the dative and ablative plural in abus, and also for Greek nouns be- longing to this declension, see Part II. THE SECOND DECLENSION. The second declension gular to end in L makes the genitive case sin- fuer — masculine. Singular. Plural. N. Pu-er, a boy, N. Pu-eri, boys, G. Pu-eri, of a boy, G. Pu-erorum, of boys D. Pu-ero, to a boy, D. Pu-er is, to boys, A. Pu-erum, a boy, A. Pu-eros, boys, V. Pu-er, o boy, V. Pu-eri, o boys, A. Pu-ero, from a boy. A. I* u-eris, from boys. B 3 LATIN GRAMMAR. Magister — masculine. Singular. N. Magist-er, a master, G. Magist-ri, of a master, D. Magist-ro, to a master, A. Magist-rum, a master, V. Magist-er, o master, A. Magist-ro,/™?^ a master, Singular. N. Vir, a man, G. Vir-i, of a man, D. Vir-o, to a man, A. Vir-um, a man, V. Vir, o man, A. Viv-o, from a man Plural. N. Magist-ri, masters, G. Magist-rorum, of masters, D. Magist-ris, to masters, A. Magist-ros, masters, V. Magist-ri, o masters, A. Magist-ris. from masters. Vir — masculine. Plural. N. Vir-i, men, G. Vir-orum, of men, D. Vir- is, to men, A. Vir- os, men, V. Vir-i, o men, A. Ylv-is, from men. Obs. I. The nominative and vocative cases of nouns are for the most part alike in both numbers. But when the nominative case singular of the second declension ends in us, the vocative ends in e. Dominus — - masculine. Singular. Plural. N. Domm-us, a lord, N. Domin-i, lords, G. Domin-i, of a lord, G. Domm-orum, of lords. D. Domm-o, to a lord, D. Domin-is, to lords, A. Domm-um, a lord, A. Domin-os, lords, V. Domin-e, o lord, V. Domin-i, o lords, A. Domm-o, from a lord. A. T) omin-is, from lords. But Deus, God, makes Deus in the vocative case sin- In the plural number it is thus declined : gular, N. Dii and Di G. Deorum, D. Diis and Dis, A. Deos, V. Dii andT>i, A. Diis and Dis. Obs. II. Proper names in ius form the vocative in i ; as, Cornelius, Cornelius, Voc. Corneli. In like manner, jilius, a son, makes Jili ; and genius, a genius, geni. DECLENSION OF NOUNS SUBSTANTIVE. But names in ius, derived from the Greek, form the vocative in e ; as, Artus, Arius, Voc. Arte ; Cynthius, Cynthius, a surname of Apollo, Voc. Cynthie. Obs. in. Nouns of the neuter gender are generally of the secoud or third declension, and make the no- minative, the accusative, and the vocative cases alike, in both numbers: in the plural number these cases end, all, in a. Regnum — neuter. Singular. N. Regn-um, a kingdom, G. Regn-i, of a kingdom, D. Regn-o, to a kingdom, A. Regn-um, a kingdom, V. Regn-um, o kingdom, A. Regn-o, from a kingdom. Plural. N. Regn-a, kingdoms, G. Regn-orum, of kingdoms, D. Regn-is, to kingdoms, A. Regn-a, kingdoms, V. Regn-a, o kingdoms, A. Regn-is, from kingdoms. N.B. — For Greek nouns of this declension, &c. Part II. see THE THIRD DECLENSION. The third declension makes the genitive case singular to end in is. Nubes — feminine. Singular. N. Nub-es, a cloud, G. Nub-is, of a cloud, D. Nub-i, to a cloud, A. Nub-em, a cloud, V. Nub-es, o cloud, A. Nub-e, from a cloud. Amnis ■ Singular. N. Amn-is, a stream, G. Amn-is, of a stream, D. Amn-i, to a stream, A. Amn-em, a stream, V. Amn-is, o stream, A. Arnn-e, from a stream. b 4 Plural. N. Nub-es, clouds, G. Nub-ium, of clouds, D. Nub-ibus, to clouds, A. Nub-es, clouds, V. Nub-es, o clouds, A. Nub-ibus, from clouds. masculine. Plural. N. Amn-es, streams, Gr. Amn-ium, of streams, D. Amn-ibus, to streams, A. Amn-es, streams, V. Amn-es, o streams, A. Amn-ibus, from streams. LATIN GRAMMAR, Many nouns of this declension increase in the geni- tive case. Lapis - Singular. N. Lap -is, a stone, G. Lap-idis, of a stone, D. Lap-id i, to a stone, A. Lap-idem, a stone, V. Lap-is, o stone, A. Lap-ide, from a stone. Sermo — Singular. N. Serm-o, a discourse, G. Serm-onis, of a discourse, D. Serm-oni, to a discourse, A. Serui-oiiem ; a discourse, V. Serm-o, o discourse, A. Serm-one, from a dis- course. Opus — Singular. N. Op-us, a work, G. Op-eris, of a work, D. Op-eri, to a work, A. Op-us, a work, V. Op-us, o work, A. Op-ere, from a work. Parens — Singular. N. Par-ens, a parent, G. Par-entis, of a parent, D. Par-enti, to a parent, A. Par-entem, a parent, V. Par-ens, o parent, A. Par-ente, from a parent. masculine. Plural. N. Lap -ides, stones \ G. Lap-id urn, of stones, D. Lap-idibus, to stones, A. Lap- ides, stones, V. Lap-ides, o stones, A. L,3Lip'idibus, f^orn sto?ies. masculine. Plural. N. Serm-ones, discourses, G. Serm-onum, of discourses, D. Serm-onibus, to discourses, A. Serm-ones, discourses, V. Serm-ones, o discourses, A. Serm-onibus, from dis- courses. - neuter. Plural. N. Op -era, works, G. Op-erum, of works, D. Op-ertbus, to works, A. Op -era, works, V. Op- era, o works, A. Op-eribus., from works. common. Plural. N. Par-en tes, parents, [parents, G. Par-entlum and entum, of D. Par-entibus, to parents, A. Par-en tes, parents, V. Par-entes, o parents, A. 'Par-entlbus, from parents. Neuter nouns ending in al, ar, and e, for the most part make the ablative singular in i; the nominative, accusative, and vocative plural in ia, and the genitive plural in ium. See Part II. DECLENSION OF NOUNS SUBSTANTIVE. Animal — neuter. Singular. N. Anim-al, an animal, G. Anim-alis, of an animal, D. Anim-ali, to an animal, A. Anim-al, an animal, V. Anim-al, o animal, A . Anim-ali, from an animal. Plural* N. Anim-alia, animals. G. Anim-alhim, of animals. D. Anim-alibus, to animals. A. Anim-alia, animals. V. Anim-alia, o animals. A. Anim-alibus, from animals. N.B. — For the rules respecting the formation of the genitive case plural, and for Greek nouns falling under this declension, &c. see Part II. THE FOURTH DECLENSION. The fourth declension makes the genitive case sin- gular to end in its : as, Gradus masculine. Plural. N. Grad-us, steps, G. Grad-uum, of steps, D. Grad-ibus, to steps, A. Grad-us, steps, V. Grad-us, o steps, A. Grad-ibus,yrom steps. Neuter nouns of this declension have all their cases alike in the singular number. Singular. N. Grad-iis, a step, G. Grad-us, of a step, D. Grad-ui, to a step, A. Grad-um, a step, V. Grad-us, o step, A. Gra.d-\i 9 from a step. Singular. N. Gen-u, a knee, G. Gen-u, of a knee, D. Gen-u, to a knee. A. Gen-u, a knee, V. Gen-u, o knee, A. Gen -u,from a knee. Genu — neuter* Plural. N. Gen-ua, knees, G. Gen-uum, of knees, D. Gen-ibus, to knees, A. Gen-ua, knees, V. Gen-ua, o knees, A. Gen-ihus, from knees. Domus, a house, is formed partly after the second, and partly after the fourth declension, and is thus de- clined : B 5 10 LATIN GRAMMAR. Domus — feminine. Singular, N. Dom-us, a house, Gr. Dom-i or us, of a house, D. Dom-ui, to a house, A. Dom-um, a house, V. Dom-us, o house, A. Doin-o, from a house. See Part II. Plural, N. Dom-us, houses, [houses, G. Dom-orum, or uum, of D. Dom-ibus, to houses, A. Dom-os, or us, houses, V. Dom-us, o houses, A. Dom-ibus,yro^ houses. THE FIFTH DECLENSION. The fifth declension makes the genitive case singu- lar to end in ei. Faeies Singular. N. Faci-es, a face, G. Faci-ei, of a face, D. Faci-ei, to a face, A. Faci-em, a face, V. Faci-es, o face, A. Faci-e, from a face. feminine. Plural. N. Faci-es, faces, G. Faci-erum, of faces, D. Faci-ebus, to faces, A. Faci-es, faces, V. Faci-es, o faces, A. Faci-ebus, from faces. See Part II. DECLENSION OF NOUNS ADJECTIVE. Some adjectives have three terminations^ — the mas- culine, the feminine^ and the neuter : as, bonus, bona, bonum, good ; tener, tenera, tenerum, tender ; niger, ni- gra, nigrum, black ; — and are declined as in the following examples. Singular, M. F. N. N. Bon-us, bon-a, bon-um, G. Bon-i, bon-se, bou-i, D. Bon-o, bon-se, bon-o, A. Bon-um, bon-am, bon-um, V. Bon-e, bon-a, bon-um, A. Bon-o, bon-a, bono. Plural, M. F, N. N. Bon-i, bon-se, bon-a, G. Bon-orum, bon-arum,bon- D. Bon-is, [orum, A. Bon-os, bon-as, bon-a, V. Bon-i, bon-se, bon-a, A. Bon-is. DECLENSION OF NOUNS ADJECTIVE. 11 Singular. M. F. N. N. Ten-er, ten-era, ten-erum, G. Ten-eri, ten-erae, ten-eri, D. Ten-ero, ten-erae, ten-ero, A. Ten-erum, ten-eram, ten-erum, V. Ten-er, ten-era, ten-erum, A. Ten-ero, ten-era, ten-ero. Plural. M. F. N. N. Ten-eri, ten-erae, ten-era, G. Ten-erorum, ten-erarura, ten-er- D. Ten-eris, [orum, A. Ten-Sros, ten-eras, ten-era, V. Ten-eri, ten-era?, ten-era, A. Ten-eris. Singular. Plural. M. F. N. M. F. N. N. Nig-er, nig-ra, nig-rum, N. Nig-ri, nig-ras, nig-ra, G. Nig-ri, nig-ras, nig-ri, G. Nig-ro rum, nig-rarum, nig-ro D. Nig-ro, nig-ra?, nig-ro, D. Nig-ris. [rum A. Nig-rum, nig-ram, nig-rum, A. Nig-ros, nig-ras, nig-ra, V. Nig-er, nig-ra, nigrum, V. Nig-ri nig-rae, nig-ra, A. Nig-ro, nig-ra, nig-ro. A. Nig-ris. Obs. The masculine and neuter genders of adjectives of three terminatio?is are declined, like nouns substantive of the second declension ; and the feminine gender ', like those of the first declension. Unus one ; solus alone ; totus the whole ; ullus any ; nullus none ; alter the other ; titer whether of the two ; and other adjectives, make the genitive case singular in iusy and the dative in i. M. N. Un-us, G. Un-Ius, D. Un-i, A. Un-um, V. Un-e, A. Un-o, Singular. F. un-a, N. un-um, un-am, un-um, un-a, un-um, un~a, un-o. Plural. M. F. N. Un-i, un-ae, G. Un-orum, -arum, D. Un-is, A. Un-os, un-as, V. Un-i, un-ae. A. Un-is. N. un-a, -orum, un-a, un-a, Unus has no plural number, unless it be joined to a noun that has not the singular number ; as unce Uteres, an epistle ; una mcenia, a wall. Alter, another, makes alterius in the genitive singular. In other respects it follows the foregoing example. B 6 12 LATIN GRAMMAR. lake units also is declined alius another ; except that it makes allud in the neuter gender, singular number. Some adjectives have two terminations, — the first being common to the masculine and femiiine genders, the other being restricted to the neuter : as, tristis, triste, sad ; melior, melius, better. They are declined as follows : Singular, M. F. N. N. Trist-is, triste, G. Trist-is, D. Trist-i, A. Trist-em, triste, V. A. Trist-is, Trist-i. trist-e, Plural. M. F. Trist-es, Trist-ium, Trist-ibus, Trist-es, Trist-es, Trist-ibus. N. trist-ia, trist-ia, trist-ia, Singular. M. F. N. N. Meli-or, meli-us, G. Meli-oris, D. Meli-ori, A. Meli-orem, meli-us, V. Meli-or, meli-us, A. Meli-ore, or meli-ori. I Plural M. F. N. Meli-ores, G. Mell-orum, D. Meli-oribus, A. Meli-ores, V. Meli-5res, A. Meli-dribus. N. meli-ora, meli-5ra, meli-ora, Obs. Adjectives of two terminations are declined like nouns substantive of the third declension. Some adjectives have but one termination, which is common to all three genders: &s,felix, happy; sapiens, wise. Singular. Plural. M. F. N. M. F. N* N. Fel-ix, N. Fel-Ices, fel-icia. G. Fel-Icis, G. Fel-Icium, D. Fel-ici, D. Fel-Tcibus, A. Fel-Tcem, fel-ix. A. Fel-Ices, fel-icia, V. Fel-ix, V. Fel-Ices, fel-icia, A- Fel-Ice, or, fel-Ici. A. Fel-icibus. DECLENSION OF NOUNS ADJECTIVE. 13 Singular. M. F. N. N. Sapi-ens, G. Sapi-entis, D. Sapi-enti, A. Sapi-entem, sapi-ens, V. Sapi-ens, A. Sapi-ente or sapi-enti. Plural. M. F. N. Sapi-entes, G. Sapi-entium, D. Sapi-entibus, A. Sapi-entes, V. Sapi-entes, A. Sapi-entibus. N. sapi-entia, sapi-entia, sapi-entia, Obs. Adjectives of one termination are declined like nouns substantive of the third declension. Plus, more, Singular. is thus declined. Plural. M. F. N. G. D. A. V. A. N. plus, pluris, plus, plure. M. F. N. Plures, G. Plurium, D. Pluribus, A. Plures, V. Plures, A. Pluribus. N. plura, plura, plura, Some adjectives in er have a peculiar way of declin- ing ; as, celeber or Celebris, celebre, famous. Plural. M. F. N. N. Celeb-res, celeb-ria, G. Celeb-rium, or, rum, D. Celeb-ribus, A. Celeb-res, celeb-ria, V. Celeb-res, celeb-ria, A. Celeb-ribus. Of adjectives which follow this way of declining, the termination er is commonly masculine ; and that in is, commonly feminine, though sometimes masculine. Obs. Celer, ceteris, celer e, retains the e throughout its cases : thus, gen. cel-eris, dat. cel-eri, &c. Ambo, both, and duo, two, are nouns adjective of the plural number only, and are thus declined : — Singular. M. F. N. N. Celeb-er or -ris, celeb-re, G. Celeb-ris, D. Celeb-ri, A. Celeb-rem, celeb-re, V. Celeb-er or -ris, celeb-re, A- Celeb-ri. 14 LATIN GRAMMAR. Nom. Amb-o, amb-ae, amb-o both. Gen. Amb-orum, amb-arum amb-orum of both. Dat. Amb-obus amb-abus, amb-obus, to both. Ace. Amb-os, amb-as, amb-o, both. Voc. Amb-o, amb-se, amb-o, both. Abl. Amb-obus amb-abus, amb-obus, with both. Ambo and duo are sometimes found in the accusative masculine. Tres, three, wants the singular number : in the plural it is declined like tristis. Numeral adjectives, from quaiuor, four, to centum, one hundred, both included, are undeclined. From centum, one hundred, to mille, a thousand, they have no singular number, but are de- clined in the plural like bonus : as, ducenti, ce, a, &c, two hundred. Mille, a thousand, used adjectively, is not declined : as, mille libras, a thousand pounds weight ; when used substantively, it is declined in the plural number only, like a neuter noun of the third declension : as, millia librarurru COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES. Adjectives have three degrees of signification, or comparison : I. The positive ; which denotes the quality of a thing absolutely ; as doctus learned, tristis sad. II. The comparative ; which increases, or lessens the quality ; as doctwr more learned, tristior sadder, or more sad : And it is formed from the first case of the positive .that ends in i 9 by adding or for the masculine and feminine genders, and us for the neuter : as, from Doctus, gen. docti, is formed doctwr, doctius, more learned : from Tristis, dat. tristi, is formed tristior, tristius, sadder, or more sad. COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES. 15 III. The superlative ; which increases, or diminishes the signification, or comparison, to the greatest degree ; as doctissimus most learned; tristissimus saddest, or most sad : And it is formed, also, from the first case of the posi- tive that ends in z, by adding ssimus : as, from Gen. docti, is formed doctissimus, most learned : Dat. tristi, is formed tristissimus, saddest, or most sad. Note. Many Adjectives vary from these general rules, and form their comparisons irregularly : as, Sonus, good ; melior, better ; optimus, best. Dexter, on the right hand; dexterior more on the right hand ; dextimus, most on the right hand. Dives, rich ; ditior, more rich ; ditissimus, most rich. Externus, outward ; exterior, more outward ; extremus, or, extimus, outermost, or most outward. Frugi, frugal ; frugalior, more frugal ; frugalisshnus, most frugal. Inferus, low ; inferior, lower, or more low ; infimus, or, imus, lowest, or most low. Magnus, great ; major, greater ; maximus, greatest. Malus, bad ; pejor, worse ; pessimus, worst. Multus, much ; plus, more ; plurimus, most. Nequam, wicked ; nequior, more wicked ; nequissimus, most wicked. Parvus, little ; minor, less ; minimus, least. Posterus, late ; posterior, later ; postremus, latest, or last. Superus, high ; superior, higher, or more high ; supremus, or summus, highest, or most high. Some adjectives, frequently found in the comparative and superlative degrees, are formed from prepositions : thus, Citra, on this side ; citerior, nearer ; citimus, nearest. 16 LATIN GRAMMAR. Intra, within ; interior, more inward ; intimus, innermost, or most inward. Prce, before ; prior, former ; primus, first. Prope, near ; propior, nearer ; proximus, nearest, or, most near. Ultra, far ; ulterior, further ; ultimus, furthest, or, last . — With some others. The following have no positive degree : — Deterior, worse ; deterrimus, worst. Ocior, swifter; ocissimus, swiftest. Potior, preferable ; potissimus, most to be chosen. These want the superlative degree : — Adolescens, young; adolescentior, younger. Juvenis, young ; junior, younger. Senex, old; senior, older. Adjectives ending in er, form the superlative degree from the nominative case, by adding rimus : as, pul- cher fair, pulcher-rimus fairest, or, most fair. Adjectives ending in lis, form the superlative degree according to the general rule : as, from utilis useful, Dat. utili, is formed utili-ssimus most useful : Except the following, which change is into limus : as, Facil-is, easy ; facil-linius, easiest, or, most easy. Gracil-is, slender ; gracil-limus, slenderest, or, most slender. Humil-is, low ; humil-Umus lowest, or, most low. Simil-is, like ; simil-limus likest, or, most like. Also, If a vowel comes before us in the nominative case of an adjective, the comparison is made by magis more, and maxime most : as, Pius, godly ; magis pius, more godly ; maxime plus, most godly. PRONOUNS. 17 But with quus, pronounced as one syllable, the general rule is followed ; as, Antlquus, ancient ; antiquior, more ancient ; antiquissimus, most ancient. Also tenuis is compared thus : Tenuis, thin ; tenuior, thinner ; tenuisstmus, thinnest. Some adjectives have no comparison at all, because their signification cannot be increased or diminished : as omnis, all ; totus, the whole. Such also are adjectives compounded of per and pr<2, " very much : " except, however, pr '(Belarus, illustrious, which follows the general rule for adjectives in us : Prcecldrus, illustrious; prcsclarior, more illustrious; prceclarissimus, most illustrious. OF A PEONOUN. A Pronoun is a word used instead of a noun. Some pronouns are called personal, or primitive, pro- nouns, and are used as substantives : others are called pronouns adjective, and are used as adjectives. The pronouns are : Personal or Primitive Pronouns. Ego, I, Tu, thou, or you, Sui 9 of himself, or themselves. Demonstrative Pronouns. Hie this, Ille, he, Ipse, oneself, Is, he, Iste, that, Idem, the same. Possessive Pronouns. Meus, mine, Tuus, thine, or your, Suus, his, Noster, our, Vester, your, Cujus, whose. Relative Pronouns. Qui, who ; and its compounds. Indefinite Pronoun. Quis, any one. Interrogative Pronoun. Quis ? who ? 18 LATIN GRAMMAR. DECLENSION OF PRONOUNS. Singular. Plural. Nom. Ego, I, Nom. Nos, we, Gen. Mei, of me, Gen. Nostr-um, or-i, of us, Dat. Mihi, to me, Dat. Nobis, to us, Ace. Me, me, Ace. Nos, us, Voc. — Voc. Abl. Me, from me. Singular. Abl. N5bis, from us. Plural. Nom. Tu, thou, or, you, Nom. Vos, ye, or, you, Gen. Tui, of thee, or, you. Gen. Vestr-um, vel -i, of you, Dat. Tibi, to thee, or, you, Dat. Vobis, to you, Ace. Te, thee, or, you, Ace. Vos, you, Voc. Tu, o thou or, you, Voc. Vos, o ye, or, you* Abl. Te, from you. Abl. Vobis, from you. Sui, of himself, herself, themselves, itself, has no nominative or vocative case, and is thus declined : Singular and Plural. Gen. Sui, of himself, "1 Dat. Sibi, to himself, | , 1Jt j7 7 Ace. Se, himself, \ hersel f> themsehes > *«• Abl. Se, from himself,) Mens, tuus, situs, and cujus, are declined like bonus, except that meus makes mi in the vocative case mascu- line of the singular number ; and that tuus, suus, and cujus, have no vocative case. Noster and vester are declined like niger. Hie, hcec, hoc, this, is thus declined : Singular. Plural. M. F. N. M. F. N. N. Hie, heec, hoc, N. Hi, hae, heec, G. HujuSj G. Horum, harura, horum, D. Huic, D. His, A. Hunc, hanc, hoc A. Hos, has, hsec, V. — V. — A, Hoc. hac, hoc. A. His. DECLENSION OF PRONOUNS. 19 Ille he, ilia she, and illud that, is thus declined : Singular. M. F. N. N. Ul-e, ill-a, ill-ud, G. Ill-Ins, D. Ill-i, A. Ill-um, ill-am, ill-ud, V. — A. Ill-o, ill-a, ill-o. Plural. M. F. N. N. Ill-i, ill-ae, ill-a, G. Ill-orum, ill-arum, ill-orum, D. Ill-is, A. Ill-os, ill-as, ill-a, V. — A. Ill-is. In like manner are also declined iste, that person, and ipse, he himself; except that the nominative and accu- sative cases singular of ipse make ipsum in the neuter gender. Is he, ea she, id that, is thus declined : Singular. Plural. M. F. N. M. F. N. N. Is, ea, id, N. Ii, eae, ea, G. Ejus, G. Eorum, earum, edrum, D. Ei, D. lis, or, eis, A. Eum, earn, id, A. Eos, eas, ea, V. — V. — A. Eo, ea, eo. A. lis, or, eis. In like manner also is declined its compound, idem the same ; as, Nom. idem, eddem, idem ; gen. ejusdem, &c. The relative pronoun Qui, quce, quod, who or which, is thus declined ; — Singular. M. F. n. N. Qui quae, quod, G. Cujus, D. Cui, A. Quern, quam, quod, A. Quo, qua, quo or qui. Plural. F. N. quae, quge, M. N. Qui, G. Quorum,quarum, quorum, D. Quibus, or, queis, A. Quos, quas, quae, V. — A. Quibus, or, queis. 20 LATIN GRAMMAR. In like manner also are declined its compounds, quidam a certain one; quivis, whom one will; quilibet, whom one pleases ; quicunque, whosoever. Quis, quce, quid, or quod, who or what, is declined like qui; as are also aliquis, and other compounds of quis : these for the most part make the feminine gender of the nominative case singular, and the neuter of the nominative and accusative cases plural, in qua : as aliquis, allqua, aliquid, or, aliquod, some one, &c. siquis, siqua, siquid, or, siquod, if any one, &c. Quis que, each, is thus declined : — Singular. M. F. N. N. Quis-que, quae-que, quid- que, or quod-que, G. Cujus-que, D. Cui-que, A. Quem-que, quam-que, quid-que, or quod-que, V. A. Quo-que, qua-que, quo- que or qui-que. Plural. M. F. N. Qui-que, quae-que. N. quae- que, G. Quorum-que, quarum- que, quorum-que, D. Quibus-que or queis-que, A. Quos-que, quas-que, quae- que, V. — A. Quibus-que or queis-que. After the same manner are declined quispiam, any one ; quisquam, any one ; and the interrogative quis- nam, who ? Vnusquisque, each one, compounded of unus and quis- que, is declined partly like unus, partly like quisque : as, Nom. Unusquisque, unaquaque, unumquodque : gen. uniuscujusque : dat. unicuique, &c. Quisquis, whosoever, is thus declined : M. F. N. Nom. Quisquis, quidquid, or, quicquid, Ace. quidquid, or, quicquid, Abl. Quoquo, quaqua, quoquo. VERBS. OF A VERB. 21 A Verb is a word which expresses either the action or condition of the person or thing about which it speaks. Of Verbs there are two Voices, or modes of conju- gation : 1. The Active, ending mo ; 2. The Passive, ending in or. Of Verbs ending in o, some are active, or, transitive : as, vinco, I conquer : some are neuter, or, intransitive : as, curro, I run. From transitive verbs ending in o, a new form, called the passive, is derived, by changing o into or : as, vincor, I am conquered. From intransitive verbs no passive is derived. There are also other verbs ending in or, called depo- nent Of these some have a transitive power : as, loquor, I speak ; some an intransitive : as, glorior, I boast. A verb is called active when the person or thing spoken of by the verb is represented as P doing " something to the noun following. The more correct way is to call it transitive, which term implies that the action " passes on" to such noun : as, vinco te, "I conquer you." A verb is called passive when the person or thing of whom it speaks is represented as " suffering," or, " having done to him" or "it" that action of which the " active" form speaks : as, amor, I am loved. A verb is called neuter, which is neither active nor passive. The more correct way is to call it intransitive, which term implies that the action does " not pass on" to a following noun : as, curro, I run. A verb is called deponent, because it " lays down," or throws aside its passive meaning : as, amplector, I embrace, is passive in form, but transitive in meaning. 22 LATIN GRAMMAR. There are a few verbs called neuter-passives or semi- deponents ; these are intransitive in meaning ; and have an active form in all tenses except in the perfect and those derived from it ; as gaudeo, I am glad. Verbs that have different persons, are called verbs personal ; as, ego amo, I love ; tu amas, you love. Verbs that do not have different persons, are called verbs impersonal : as, tcedet, it irks ; oportet, it behoves. OF THE MOODS. There are four moods *, i. e. methods of represent- ing the action or condition of a verb : the Indicative, Imperative, Subjunctive, and Infinitive. 1. The indicative^ mood "points out," or declares a thing as really existing : as, Ego amo, I love. 2. The imperative % mood gives a "command:" as, Abi, be gone. 3. The subjunctive § mood is used when a verb is " subjoined " to another verb in a preceding clause, and points out something not as a fact, but as a concep- tion of the mind : as something merely supposed : as, Rogo ut scribas, I beg that you write ; Nescio qualis sit, I know not what sort of person he is. N. B. — This mood is frequently called the Potential ||, that is, the mood signifying " power." But the potential is only one form of the subjunctive, and is known by the signs given in the following conjugations. For other uses of subjunctive mood, see Part II. 4. The infinitive^ mood denotes the action or condi- tion of the verb in an " indefinite" or general way : as, scribere, to write. * Modi, " methods," or " manners." f Indico, " I point out." \ Impero, " I command." § Subjungo, " I subjoin." || Potentia, " power." % Infinitum (or infinitlvus), " without bounds," and so " indefinite." VERBS. 23 OF THE TENSES OF VERBS. In Verbs there are six tenses expressing the times of an action : the Present, the Imperfect, the Perfect, the Pluperfect, the Future, the Future-perfect 1. The present tense speaks of a thing as present or in the course of taking place : as, amo, I love, or, am loving. 2. The imperfect tense speaks of a thing that was being done in time past: as, amabam, I did love, or, was loving. 3. The perfect tense speaks of a thing completed at the present time : as, amavi, I have loved. 4. The pluperfect tense speaks of a thing completed in time past : as, amaveram, I had loved. 5. The future tense speaks of a thing that will cer- tainly take place in time to come : as, amabo, I shall, or, will love. 6. The future-perfect tense speaks of a thing that will be past at a certain future time : as, scripsero, I shall have written. OF GERUNDS AND SUPINES. Verbs have three gerunds, which end in di, do, dum : as, amandi, of loving ; amando, in loving ; amandum, to love. The Supines of verbs are two : The one ending in um, which signifies actively : as, Eo amatum, I go to love : The other ending in u, and having for the most part a passive signification : as, difficllis amatu, hard to be loved. 24 LATIN GRAMMAR. OF PAETICIPLES. Verbs have four Participles : 1. the present-active, as amans, loving : 2. the future-active, as arnaturus, about to love : 3. the perfect-passive, as amdtus, having been loved : 4. the future-passive, as amandus, that must be loved. OF NUMBERS AND PERSONS. Verbs have two numbers, singular and plural ; and in each number three persons : as, Plur. Nos amdmus, We love ; Sing. Ego amo, I love ; Tu amas, thou lovest ; Ille amat, he loveth : Vos amdtis, ye love ; Illi amant, they love. The imperative mood has no first nor third person in the present, and no first person in the future tense. All nouns are of the third person, except ego, nos, tu, and vos : Also all nouns of the Vocative Case are of the second Person. THE VEKB SUM. Sum , es,fui, esse, futurus, to be INDICATIVE MOOD. L. Present Tense. — am. Sing. Sum, I am. Es, thou art. Est, he is. Plur. Siimus, We are. Estis, ye are. Sunt, they are. 2. Imperfect Tense. — was. Sing. firam, I was. Eras, thou wast. Erat, he was. Plur. Eramus, We were. Eratis, ye were. Erant, they were. THE VERB SUM. 25 3. Perfect Tense. — have. Sing. Fui, Fuisti, Fuit, Plur. Fuimus, Fuistis, Fuerunt or fuere, / have been, thou hast been, he hath been. We have been, ye have been, they have been. 4. Pluperfect Tense. — had. Sing. Fueram, Fueras, Fuerat, Plur. Fueramus, Fuerat is, Fuerant, / had been, thou hadst been, he had been. We had been, ye had been, they had been. 5. Future Tense. — shall, will. Sing. £ro, I shall, or, will be. Eris, thou shalt, or, wilt be. Erit, he shall, or, will be. Plur. Enmus, We shall, or, will be. Eritis ye shall, or, will be. Erunt, they shall, or, will be. 6. Future Perfect Tense. — shall or ivill have. Sing. Fuero, Fueris, Fuerit, Fuerlmus, Fu eritis, Fuerint, Plur. / shall have been, thou shalt have been, he shall have been. We shall have been, ye shall have been, they shall have been. IMPERATIVE MOOD. Present Tense. No first nor third person. Sing. Es, Plur. Este, Be thou. Be ye. 26 LATIN GRAMMAR. Future Tense. Sing. Esto, Esto, Plur. Estote Sunto, No first person. JBe thou, let him be. Be ye. let them be* SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 1. Present Tense, — may, can, 8fc. (Potential Signs.) Sing. Sim. I may, or, can be. Sis, thou may 9 st or, canst be. Sit, he may, or, can be. Plur. Slmus, We may, or, can be. Sltis, ye may, or, can be. Sint, they may, or, can be. 2. Imperfect Tense. — might, could, would, should. Sing. Essem or forenr, Esses or fores, Esset or foret, Plur. Essem us or foremus, Essetis or foretis, Essent or forent, I might, or, coidd be. thou might' st, or, couloVst be. he might, or, could be. We might, or, could be. ye might, or, could be. they might, or, could be. 3. Perfect Tense. — may have. Sing. Fuerim, / may have been. Fueris, thou may st have been. Fuerit, he may have been. Plur. Fuerimus, We may have been. Fueritis, ye may have been. Fuerint, they may have been. 4. Pluperfect Tense. — might, could, would, should have. Sing. Fuissem, I might, or, could have been. Fuisses, thou might st, or, could' st have been. Fuisset, he might, or, could have been. Plur. Fuissemus, We might, or, could have been. Fuissetis, ye might, or, could have been. Fuissent, they might, or, could have been. CONJUGATION OF ACTIVE VERBS. 27 INFINITIVE MOOD. Present and Imperfect Tense. Esse, to be. Perfect and Pluperfect Tense, Fuisse, to have been. Future Tense, Fore, or, Futiirum esse, to be about to be. Participle of the future in rus, Futiirus, that must be. CONJUGATION OF ACTIVE VERBS. VERBS have four conjugations, which are known from their infinitive mood. 1. The first has a long before re: as, amdre. 2. The second has e long before re : as, monere. 3. The third has e short before re : as, regere. 4. The fourth has i long before re : as, audire. FIRST CONJUGATION. — Amo. Am-o, am-as, am-avi, am-are ; am-andi, am-ando, am-andum ; am-atum, am-atu ; am-ans, am-aturus : to love. INDICATIVE MOOD. 1. Present Tense. — do, am. Sing. Am-o, / love, do love, or, am loving. am-as, thou lovest, dost love, or art loving. am-at, he loveth, doth love, or, is loving. Plur. Am-amus, We love, do love, or, are loving. am-atis, ye love, do love, or, are loving. am-ant, they love, do love, or, are loving, c 2 28 LATIN GRAMMAR. 2. Imperfect Tense. — did, was. Sing. Am-abam, I did love, or, tvas loving. am-abas, thou didst love, or, wast loving. am-abat, he did love, or, tvas loving. Plur. Am-abamus, We did love, or, were loving. am-abatis, ye did love, or, were loving. am-abant, they did love, or, were loving. 3. Perfect Tense. — have. Sing. Am-avi, I loved, or, have loved. am-avisti, thou lovedst, or, hast loved. am-avit, he loved, or, hath loved. Plur. Am-avmius, We loved, or, have loved. am-avistis, ye loved, or, have loved. arn-averunt, avere, they loved, or, have loved. 4. Pluperfect Tense. — had. Sing. Am-averam, I had loved. am-averas, thou hadst loved. am-averat, he had loved. Plur. Am-averam us, We had loved. am-averatis, ye had loved. am-averant, they had loved. 5. Future Tense. — shall, will. Sing. Am-abo, / shall, or, will love. am-abis, thou shalt, or, wilt love. am-abit, he shall, or, will love. Plur. Am-abimus, We shall, or, will love. am-abitis, ye shall, or, will love. am-abunt, they shall, ox, will love. 6. Future Perfect Tense. — shall or will have. Sing. Am-avero, i" shall have loved. am-averis, thou shalt have loved. am-averit, he shall have loved. Plur. Am-averlmus, We shall have loved. am-averltis; ye shall have loved. am-averint, they shall have loved. CONJUGATION OF ACTIVE VERBS. 29 IMPERATIVE MOOD. Present Tense. No first nor third person. Sing. Am-a, Love thou, or, do thou love. Plur. Am-ate, Love ye, or, do ye love. Future Tense. No first person. Sing. Am-ato, Love thou, or, do thou love. am-ato, let him love. Plur. Am-atote, Love ye, or, do ye love. am-anto, let them love. SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 1. Present Tense. — may, can, Sfc. (Potential Signs.) Sing. Am-em, I may, or, can love. am-es, thou mayst, or, canst love, ain-et. he may, or, can love. Plur. Am-emus, We may, or, can love. aru-etis, ye may, or, can love. am-ent, they may, or, can love. 2. Imperfect Tense. — might, could, would, should. Sing. Am-arem, / might, or, could love. am-ares, thou might 'st, or, could 3 st love. am-aret, he might, or, could love. Plur. Am-aremus, We might, or, could love. am-aretis, ye might, or, could love. ani-arent, they might, or, could love. 3. Perfect Tense. — may have. Sing. Am-averim, I may have loved. am-averis, thou mayst have loved. am-averit, he may have loved. Plur. Am-averimus, We may have loved. am-averitis, ye may have loved. am-averint, they may have loved, c s 30 LATIN GRAMMAR. 4. Pluperfect Tense. — might, could, would, should have. Sing. Am-avissem, I might have loved. am-avisses, thou might' st have loved. am-avisset, he might have loved. Plur. Am-avisseinus, We might have loved. am-avissetis, ye might have loved. am-avissent, they might have loved. INFINITIVE MOOD. Present and Imperfect Tense, Am-are, to love. Perfect and Pluperfect Tense. Am-avisse, to have loved. Future Tense, Am-aturum esse, to be about to love. GERUNDS, Am-andi, of loving. Arn-ando, in loving. Am-andum, to love. SUPINES. Active, Passive. Am-atum, to love. Am-atu, to be loved. PARTICIPLES. Present Tense, Future in rus. Am-ans, loving. Am-aturus, about to love. Obs. In Verbs, several tenses are formed from the perfect tense of the Indicative mood ; as, of am-avi are formed — CONJUGATION OF ACTIVE VERBS. 31 1. The pluperfect of the same mood, amav-eram. 2. The future-perfect tense of the same mood, amav-ero. 3. The perfect of the subjunctive mood, amav-erim. 4. The pluperfect of the same mood, amav-issem. 5. The perfect tense of the infinitive mood, amav-isse. SECOND CONJUGATION.— Moneo. Mon-eo, mon-es, mon-iii, mon-ere ; mon-endi, mon- endo, mon-endum; mon-itum, mon-itu; mon-ens, mon-iturus, to advise. im)ICATIVE MOOD. 1. Present Tense. — do, am. Sing. Mon-eo, / advise, do advise, or, am advising. • mon-es thou advisest, dost advise, or,art advising. mon-et he adviseth, doth advise, or, is advising. Plur. Mon-emus, We advise, do advise, or, are advising. mon-etis, ye advise, do advise, or, are advising. mon-ent, they advise, do advise, or, are advising. 2. Imperfect Tense. — did, teas. Sing. MSn-ebam, I did advise, or was advising. mon-ebas, thou didst advise, or wast advising. mon-ebat, he did advise, or was advising. Plur. Mbn-ebamus, We did advise, or, were advising. mon-ebatis, ye did advise, or, were advising. mon-ebant, they did advise, or, were advising. 3. Perfect Tense. — have. Sing. Mbn-ui, I advised, or, have advised. mon-uisti, thou advisedst, or, hast advised. mon-uit, he advised, or, hath advised. Plur. Mon-uimus, We advised, or, have advised. mon-uistis, ye advised, or have advised. mon-uerunt ,or uere, they advised, or, have advised, c 4 32 LATIN GRAMMAR. 4. Pluperfect Tense. Sing. Mon-uerain, mon-ueras, mon-uerat, Plur. Mon-ueramus, mon-iieratis, mon-uerant. had. I had advised, thou hadst advised, he had advised. We had advised, ye had advised, they had advised. 5. Future Tense. — shall, will. Sing. Mon-ebo, mon-ebis, nion-ebit, Plur. Mon-ebimus, mon-ebitis, mon-ebunt, / shall, or, will advise, thou shalt, or, wilt advise, he shall, or, will advise. We shall, or, will advise, ye shall, or, will advise, they shall, or, will advise. 6. Future Perfect Tense. — shall or will have. Sing. Mon-uero, mon-ueris, mon-uerit, Plur. Mon-uerlmus, mon-uerltisj mon-uerint, / shall have advised, thou shalt have advised, he shall have advised. We shall have advised, ye shall have advised, they shall have advised. IMPERATIVE MOOD 1. Present Tense. Sing. M6n-e, Plur. Mon-ete, No first nor third Person. Advise thou, or, do thou advise. Advise ye, or, do ye advise. 2. Future Tense. No first Person. Sing. Mon-eto, mon-eto, Plur. Mon-etote, mon-ento, Advise thou, or, do thou advise, let him advise. Advise ye, or, do ye advise, let them advise. CONJUGATION OF ACTIVE VERBS. 33 SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. ■ may, can, 8fc. (Potential Signs.) / may, or, can advise, thou may' st or, canst advise, he may, or, can advise. We may, or, can advise, ye may, or, can advise, they may, or, can advise. 2. Imperfect Tense. — might, could, would, should. I might, or, could advise, thou might st, or could' st advise. he might, or, could advise. We might, or, could advise, ye might, or, could advise, they might, or, could advise. 1. Present Tense. Sing. Mon-eam, mon-eas, mon-eat, Plur. Mon-eamus, mon-eatis, mon-eant, Sing. Mon-erem, mon-eres, mon-eret, Plur. Mon-eremus, mon-eretis, mon-erent, 3. Perfect Tense. — may have. Sing. Mon-uerim, mon-ueris, mon-uerit, Plur. Mon-uenmus, mon-iieritis, mon-uerint, 4. Pluperfect Tense. Sing. Mon-uissem, mon-uisses, mon-uisset, Plur. Mon-uissemus, mon-uissetis, mon-iiissent, / may have advised, thou mayst have advised, he may have advised. We may have advised, ye may have advised, they may have advised. — might, could, would, shoidd have. I might have advised, thou migMst have advised. he might have advised. We might have advised, ye might have advised, they might have advised. INFINITIVE MOOD. Present and Imperfect Tense, Mon-ere, to advise, c 5 34 . LATIN GRAMMAR. Perfect, and Pluperfect Tense, Mon-uisse, to have advised. Future Tense, Mon-iturum esse, to be about to advise. GERUNDS. Mon-endi, of advising. Mon-endo, in advising. Mon-endum, to advise. SUPINES. Active Passive, Mon-itum, to advise. Mon-itu, to be advised. PARTICIPLES. Present Tense, Future in rus, Mon-ens, advising. Mon-iturus, about to advise. THIKD CONJUGATION. — Kego. Reg-o, reg-is, rex-i, reg-ere ; reg-endi, reg-endo, reg- endum ; rec-tum, rec-tu ; reg-ens, rec-turus, to rule. INDICATIVE MOOD. 1. Present Tense. — do, am. Sing. Reg-o, I ride, do rule, or, am ruling. reg-is, thou rulest, dost ride, or, art ruling. reg-it, he ruleth, doth rule, or, is ruling. Plur. Reg-imus, We ride, do rule, or, are ruling. reg-itis, ye rule, do rule, or, are ruling. reg-unt, they rule, do rule, or, are ruling. CONJUGATION OF ACTIVE VEKBS. 35 2. Imperfect Tense. — did, was. Sing. Rege-bam, rege-bas, • rege-bat, Plur. Rege-bamus, rege-batis, rege-bant, / did rule, or, was ruling, thou didst rule, or, ivast riding, he did ride, or, was ruling. We did rule, or, were ruling, ye did rule, or, were ruling, they did rule, or. were ruling. 3. Perfect Tense. — have. Sing. Rex-i, I ruled, or, have ruled. rex-isti, thou ruledst, or, hast ruled. rex-it, he ruled, or, hath ruled. Plur. Rex-imus, We ruled, or, have ruled. rex-istis, ye ruled, or, have ruled. rex-erunt, or, ere, they ruled, or, have ruled. 4. Pluperfect Tense. — had. Sing. Rex-eram, / had ruled. rex- eras, rex-erat, Plur. Rex-eramus, rex-eratis, rex-erant, thou hadst ruled, he had ruled. We had ruled, ye had ruled, they had ruled. 5. Future Tense. — shall, will. Sing. Reg-am, reg-es, reg-et, Reg-emus, reg-etis, re^-ent, Plur. I shall, or, will rule, thou shalt, or, wilt rule, he shall, or, will rule. We shall, or, will rule, ye shall, or, tvill rule, they shall, or, will rule. 6. Future Perfect Tense. — shall or will have. Sing. Rex-ero, rex-eris, rex-erit, Plur. Rex-enmus, rex-eritis, rex-erint, I shall have ruled, thou shalt have ruled, he shall have ruled. We shall have ruled, ye shall have ruled, they shall have ruled, c 6 36 LATIN GRAMMAR. IMPERATIVE MOOD. Present Tense. — No first nor third Person. Sing. Reg-e, Rule thou, or, do thou rule. Plur. Reg-ite, Rule ye, or, do ye rule. Future Tense. — No first Person. Sing. Reg-ito, Rule thou, or, do thou ride. reg-ito, let him ride. Plur. Regitote, Rule ye, or, do ye rule. reg-unto, let them rule. SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 1. Present Tense. — may, can, fyc. (Potential Signs.) Sing. Reg-am, I may, or, can ride. reg-as, thou mayst, or, can'st rule. reg-at, he may, or, can rule. Plur. Reg-amus, We may, or, can rule. reg-atis, ye may, or, can rule. reg-ant, they may, or, can rule. 2. Imperfect Tense. — might, could, would, should. Sing. Reg-erem, I might, or, could rule. reg-eres, thou mighfst, or, could 'st rule. reg-eret, he might, or, could rule. Piur. R.eg-eremus, We might, or, could rule. reg-eretis, ye might, or, coidd rule. reg-erent, they might, or, could rule. 3. Perfect Tense. — may have. Sing. Rex- en m, / may have ruled. rex-eris, thou may'st have ruled. rex-erit, he may have ruled. Plur. Rex-erimus, We may have ruled. rex-eritis, ye may have ruled. rex-erint, they may have ruled, CONJUGATION OF ACTIVE VERBS. 37 4. Pluperfect Tense. — mighty could, would, should have. Sing. Rex-issem, I might have ruled, rex-isses, thou might st have ruled. rex isset, he might have ruled. Plur. Rex-issemus, We might have ruled. rex-issetis, ye might have nded. rex-issent, they might have ruled. INFINITIVE MOOD. Present and Imperfect Tense, Reg- ere, to rule. Perfect and Pluperfect Tense, Rex-isse, to have ruled. Future Tense, Rec-turum esse, to be about to rule. GERUNDS. Reg-endi, of ruling. Reg-endo, in ruling. Reg-en dum, to rule. SUPINES. Active, Passive, Rec-tum, to rule. Rec«tu, to be ruled. PARTICIPLES, Present Tense, Future in rus. Reg-ens, ruling. Rec-turus, about to rule. Note. Verbs of this conjugation that end in zo, insert i before the ter- minations given in the preceding form, in the present, imperfect, and future indicative, and in the present subjunctive; as also before the termi- nation of the third person plural of the imperative future. The indica- tive present is thus formed : — Sing, io, is, it. Plural, imus, itis, iunt. 38 LATIN GRAMMAR. FOURTH CONJUGATION. — Audio. Aud-io, aud-is, aud-ivi, aud-ire; aud-iendi, aud-iendo, aud-iendum ; aud-itum, aud-itu ; aud-iens, aud-iturus, to hear. INDICATIVE MOOD. 1. Present Tense. — do, am. Sing. x\ud-io, / hear, do hear, or, am hearing. aud-is, thouhearest, dost hear, or, art hearing. aud-it, he heareth, doth hear, or, is hearing. Plur. Aud-Imus, We hear, do hear, or, are hearing. aud-itis, ye hear, do hear-, or, are hearing. aud-iunt, they hear, do hear, or, are hearing. 2. Imperfect Tense. — did, ivas. Sing. Aud-iebam, / did hear, or, ivas hearing. aud-iebas, thou didst hear, or, wast hearing. aud-iebat, he did hear, or, teas hearing. Plur. Aud-iebamus, We did hear, or, ivere hearing. aud-iebatis, ye did hear, or, ivere hearing. aud-iebant, they did hear, or, were hearing. 3. Perfect Tense. — have. Sing. Aud-ivi, / heard, or, have heard. aud-ivisti, thou heard st, or, hast heard. aud-Ivit, he heard, or, hath heard. Plur. Aud-ivimus ? We heard, or, have heard. aud-ivistis, ye heard, or, have heard. aud-iverunt,or ere, they heard, or, have heard. 4. Pluperfect Tense. ■ — had. Sing. Aud-Iveram, / had heard. aud-Iveras, thou hadst heard. aud-Iverat, he had heard. Plur. Aud-Iveramus, We had heard. aud-iveratis, ye had heard. aud-iverant, they had heard. CONJUGATION OF ACTIVE VERBS. 39 5. Future Tense. — shall, will. Sing. Aud-iam, / shall, or, will hear. aud-ies, thou shalt, or, wilt hear. aud-iet, he shall, or, will hear. Plur. Aud-iemus, We shall, or, will hear. aud-ietis, ye shall, or, will hear. aud-ient, they shall, or, will hear. 6. Future Perfect Tense. — shall or will have. Sing. Aud-Ivero, / shall have heard. aud-Iveris, thou shalt have heard. aud-Iverit, he shall have heard. Plur. Aud-Iverimus, We shall have heard. aud-iverltis, ye shall have heard. aud-Iverint, they shall have heard. IMPEEATIVE MOOD. 1. Present Tense. No first nor third Person. Sing. Aud-I, Hear thou, or, do thou hear. Plur. Aud-ite, Hear ye, or, do ye hear. 2. Future Tense. No first Person. Sing. Aud-Ito, Hear thou, or, do thou hear. aud-Ito, • let him hear. Plur. Aud-Itote, Hear ye, or, do ye hear. aud-iunto, let them hear. SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 1. Present Tense. — may, can, Sfc. (Potential Signs.) Sing. Aud-iam, / may, or, can hear. aud-ias, thou mayst, or, canst hear. aud-iat, he may, or, can hear. Plur. Aud-Tamus, We may, or, can hear. aud-iatis, ye may, or, can hear. aud-iant, they may, or, can hear. 40 LATIN GRAMMAR. 2. Imperfect Tense. — might, could, would, should. I might, or, could hear, thou might st, or, could 'st hear, he might, or, could hear. We might, or, could hear, ye might, or, could hear, they might, or, could hear. Sing. Aud-irem, aud-ires, aud-iret, Plur. Aud-Iremus, aud-Iretis, aud-irent, 3. Perfect Tense Sing. Aud-iverim, aud-iveris, aud-Iverit, Plur. Aud-Iverimus, aud-iveritis, aud-iverint, may have. I may have heard, thou mayst have heard, he may have heard. We may have heard, ye may have heard, they may have heard. 4. Pluperfect Tense. — might, could, would, should have. Sing. Aud-ivissem, aud-ivisses, aud-ivisset, Plur. Aud-ivissemus, aud-ivissetis, aud-ivissent, / might have heard, thou might' st have heard, he might have heard. We might have heard, ye might have heard, they might have heard. INFINITIVE MOOD. Present and Imperfect Tense, Aud-Ire, to hear. Perfect and Pluperfect Tense, Aud-ivisse, to have heard. Future Tense, Aud-iturum esse, to be about to hear. GERUNDS. Aud-iendi, aud-iendo, aud-iendum, of hearing, in hearing, to hear. CONJUGATION OF PASSIVE VERBS. SUPINES. 41 Passive, Aud-Itu, to be heard. Active, Aud-itum,fo hear. PARTICIPLES. Present Tense, Future in rus, Aud-iens, hearing. Aud-itiirus, about to hear. CONJUGATION OF PASSIVE VERBS. FIRST CONJUGATION. — Amor. Am-or, arn-aris or am-are, am-ari ; am-atus, am-andus, am-atus sum or fui ; to be loved. INDICATIVE MOOD. 1. Present Tense. — am. Sing. Am-or, am-aris, or, are, am-atur, Plur. Am-amur, am-amini, am-antur, 2. Imperfect Sing. Am-abar, am-abaris, or abare, am-abatur, Plur. Am-abamur, am-abamini, am-abantur, I am loved, thou art loved, he is loved. We are loved, ye are loved, they are loved. Tense. — teas. I was loved, thou wast loved, he was loved. We were loved, ye were loved, they were loved. 3. Perfect Tense. — Sing. Am-atus sum, or, fui, am-atus es, or, fuisti, am-atus est, or, fuit, Plur* Am-ati sumus, or, fuimus, am-ati estis, or, fuistis, am-ati sunt, fuerunt, or, ere, have been. I have been loved, thou hast been loved, he hath been loved. We have been loved, ye have been loved, they have been loved. 42 LATIN GRAMMAR. 4. Pluperfect Tense. — had been. Sing. Am-atus eram, or, fueram, / had been loved. ani-atus eras, or, fueras, thou hadst been loved. am-atus erat, or, fuerat, he had been loved. Plur. Am-ati eramus, or, fueramus, We had been loved. am-ati eratis, or, fu eratis, ye had been loved. am-ati erant, or, fuerant, they had been loved. 5. Future Tense. — shall or will be. Sing. Am-abor, / shall, or, will be loved. am-aberis, or, abere, thou shalt, or, wilt be loved. am-abitur, he shall, or, will be loved. Plur. Am-abimur, We shall, or, will be loved. am-abimini, ye shall, or will be loved. am-abuntur, they shall, or, will be loved. 6. Future Perfect Tense. — shall or will have been. Sing. Am-atus ero, or, fuero, I shall have been loved. am-atus eris, or, fueris, thou shalt have been loved. am-atus erit, or, fuerit he shall have been loved. Plur. Am-ati erimus, or, fuerlmus, We shall have been loved. aon-ati eritis, or, fueritis, ye shall have been loved. am-ati erunt, or, fuerint, they shall have been loved. IMPERATIVE MOOD. 1. Present Tense. No first nor third Person. Sing. Am-are, Be thou loved. Plur. Am-ain^ni, Be ye loved. 2. Future Tense. No first Person. Sing. Am-ator, Be thou loved. am-ator, let him be loved. Plur. Am-aminor, Be ye loved. am-antor, let them be loved. CONJUGATION OF PASSIVE VERBS. 43 SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 1. Present Tense. — may, can be, Sfc. (Potential signs.) Sing. Am-er, / may, or, can be loved. am-eris, or, ere, thou mayst, or, canst be loved. am-etur, he may, or, can be loved. Plur. Am-emur, We may, or, can be loved. am-emini, ye may, or, can be loved. arn-entuv they may, or, can be loved. 2. Imperfect Tense. — might, could, would, should be. Sing. Am-arer, / might, or, could be loved. am-areris, or, arere, thou might' st, or, could 'st be loved. am-aretur, he might, or, could be loved. Plur. Am-aremur, We might, or, could be loved. am-aremini, ye might, or, could be loved. am-arentur, they might, or could be loved. 3. Perfect Tense. — may have been. Sing. Am-atus sim, or, fuerim, / may have been loved. am-atus sis, or, fueris, thou mayst have been loved. am-atus sit, or, fuerit, he may have been loved. Plur. Am-ati simus, or, fuerimus, We may have been loved. am-ati sitis, or fueritis, ye may have been loved. am-ati sint, or, fuerint they may have been loved. 4, Pluperfect Tense. — might, could, would, should have been. Sing. Am-atus essem, or, fuissem, I might have been loved. am-atus esses, or, fuisses, thou might 'st have been loved. am-atus esset, or, fuisset, he might have been loved. Plur. Am-ati essemus, or, fuissemus, £Fe might have been loved. am-ati essetis, or, fuissetis, ye might have been loved. am-ati essent^or, fuissent, they might have been loved. INFINITIVE MOOD. Present and Imperfect Tense, Am-ari, to be loved. 44 LATIN GRAMMAR. Perfect and Pluperfect Tense, Am-atum esse, or, fuisse, to have been loved. Future Tense, Am-atum iri, to be about to be loved. PARTICIPLES. Perfect Tense, Am-atus, having been loved. Future in dus (or Participle of Necessity). Am-andus, that must be loved. SECOND CONJUGATION. — Moneor. Mon-eor, mon-eris or mon-ere, rnon-itus sum or fui ; mon-eri ; mon-itus, nion-endus, to be advised. mDICATTVE MOOD. 1. Present Tense. — am. Sing. Mon-eor, / am advised, mon-eris, or, ere, thou art advised. mon-etur, he is advised. Plur. Mon-emur, We are advised. mon-emini, ye are advised. mon-entur, they are advised. 2. Imperfect Tense. — teas. Sing. Mon-ebar, I was advised. mon-ebaris, or, ebare, thou ivast advised. mon-ebatur, he was advised. Plur. Mon-ebamur, We were advised. mon-ebamini, ye were advised, mon-ebantur, they were advised. CONJUGATION OF PASSIVE VERBS. 45 3. Perfect Tense. — have been. Sing. Mon-itus sum, or, fui, / have been advised. nion-itus es, or, fuisti, thou hast been advised. mon-itus est, or, fuit, he hath been advised. Piur. Mon-iti sumus, or, fuimus, We have been advised. mon-iti estis, or, fuistis, ye have been advised. mon-iti sunt, fuerunt, or, fuere, they have been advised. 4. Pluperfect Tense. — had been. Sing. Mon-itus erara, or, fueram, I had been advised. mon-itus eras, or, fueras, thou hadst been advised. mon-itus erat, or, fuerat, he had been advised. Plur.Mon-itieramus,or, fueramus, We had been advised. mon-iti eratis, or, fueratis, ye had been advised. mon-iti erant, or, fuerant, they had been advised. 5. Future Tense. — shall or will be. Sing. Mon-ebor, / shall, or, will be advised. mon-eberis, or, ebere, thou shah, or, wilt be advised. mon-ebitur, he shall, or, will be advised. Piur. Mon-ebimur, We shall, or, will be advised. mon-eblmini, ye shall, or, will be advised. mon-ebuntur, they shall, or, will be advised. 6. Future Perfect Tense. — shall or will have been. Sing. Mon-itus, ero, or, fuero, I shall have been advised. mon-itus eris, or, fueris, thou shalt have been advised. mon-itus erit, or, fuerit, he shall have been advised. Piur. Mon-iti erimus,or,fuerImus, We shall have been advised. mon-iti erltis, or, fueritis, ye shall have been advised. mon-iti erunt, or, fuerint, they shall have been advised. IMPERATIVE MOOD. 1. Present Tense. No first nor third Person. Sing. Mon-ere, Be thou advised. Piur. Mon-emini, Be ye advised. 46 LATIN GRAMMAR. 2. Future Tense. No first Person. Sing. Mon-etor, Be thou advised. mon -e tor, let him be advised. Plur. Mon-enrinor, Be ye advised. mon-entor, let them be advised. SUBJUXCTIYE MOOD. 1. Present Tense. — may, can be, fyc. (Potential signs.) Sing.Mon-ear, / may, or, can be advised. mon-earis, or. eare, thou may'st, or, canst be advised. rnon-eatur, he may, or, can be advised. Plur.Mon-eamur, We may, or, can be advised. rnon-eammi, ye may, or, can be advised, nion-eantur, they may, or, can be advised. 2. Imperfect Tense. — wight, could, would, should be. Sing. Mon-erer, I might, or, could be advised. mon-ereris, or, -erere, thou might st,OT, could 'st be advised. mon-eretur, he might, or, could be advised. Plur. Mon-eremur, We might, or, could be advised. rnon-eremini, ye might, or, could be advised. mon-erentur, they might, or, could be advised. 3. Perfect Tense. — may have been. Smg. Mon-itus sini,0?*,fuerim, I may have been advised. mon-itus sis, or, fueris, thou may'st have been advised. mon-itus sit, or, fuerit, he may have been advised. Plur. Mon-iti simus,or,fuerimus, We may have been advised. mon-iti sitis, or, fueritis, ye may have been advised mon-iti sint, or, fuerint, they may have been advised. 4. Pluperfect Tense. — might, could, would, should have been. S. Mon-itus essem^orjfaissem,/ might have been advised. mon-itus esses, or, fuisses, thou might* st have been advised. mon-itus esset, or, fuisset, he might have been advised. PL Mon-iti essemus,or,fuissemus, We might have been advised. mon-iti essetis, or, fuissetis, ye might have been advised. mon-iti essent, or, fuissent, they might have been advised. CONJUGATION OF PASSIVE VERBS. 47 INFINITIVE MOOD. Present and Imperfect Tense, Mon-eri, to be advised. Perfect and Pluperfect Tense, Mon-itum esse, or, fuisse, to have been advised. Future Tense, Mon-itum iri, to be about to be advised. Participles. Perfect Tense, Mon-itus, having been advised. Future in dus (or Participle of Necessity). Mon-endus, that must be advised. THIED CONJUGATION. — Eegor. Peg-or, reg-eris or reg-ere, rec-tus sum or fui ; reg-i ; rec-tus, reg-endus, to be ruled. INDICATIVE MOOD. 1. Present Tense. — am. Sing. Reg-or, I am ruled. reg-eris, or, ere, thou art ruled. reg-Ttur, he is ruled. Plur. Reg-imur, We are ruled. reg-imi'ni, ye are ruled. reg-untur, they are ruled. 2. Imperfect Tense. — was. Sing. Reg-ebar, I was ruled. reg-ebaris, or, ebare, thou wast ruled. reg-ebatur, he was ruled. Plur. Reg-ebamur, We tvere ruled. reg-ebamini, ye were ruled. reg-ebantur, they were ruled. 48 LATIN" GRAMMAR. 3. Perfect Tense. — have been. Sing. Rec-tus sum, or, fui, rec-tus es, or, fuisti, rec-tus est, or, fuit, Plur. Rec-ti sumus, or, fuTmus, rec-ti estis, or, fuistis, / have been ruled, thou hast been ruled, he hath been ruled. We have been ruled, ye have been ruled. rec-ti sunt, fuerunt, or, fuere, they have been mded. 4. Pluperfect Tense. — had been. I had been ruled, thou hadst been ruled, he had been mded. We had been mded. ye had been ruled, they had been ruled. Sing. Rec-tus eram, or, fueram, rec-tus eras, or, fueras, rec-tus erat, or, fuerat, Piur. Rec-ti eranius, or, fueramus, rec-ti eratis, or, fu eratis, rec-ti erant, or, fuerant, 5. Future Tense. — shall or will be. Sing. Reg-ar reg-eris, or, ere, reg-etur, Plur. Reg-emur, reg-emmi, reg-entur / shall, or, will be ruled, thou shalt, or wilt be ruled, he shall, or, will be ruled. We shall, or, will be ruled, ye shall, or, will be ruled, they shall, or, will be ruled. 6. Future Perfect Tense. — sJiall or will have been. Sing. Rec-tus ero, or, fuero, I shall have been ruled. rec-tus eris, or, fueris, thou shalt have been ruled. rec-tus erit, or, fuerit, he shall have been ruled. Plur. Rec-ti erimuSjOrjfuerlmus^Fe shall have been ruled. rec-ti eritis, or, fuerltis, ye shall have been ruled. rec-ti eruntj or, fuerint, they shall have been ruled. IMPERATIVE MOOD. 1. Present Tense. No first nor third Person. Sing. Reg-ere, Plur. Reg-imini, Be thou ruled. Be ye ruled. CONJUGATION OF PASSIVE VERBS. 49 2. Future Tense. No first Person, Sing. Reg-itor, Be thou ruled. reg-itor, let him be ruled. Plur. Reg-iminor, Be ye ruled. reg-untor, let them be ruled. SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 1. Present Tense. — may, can be, Sfc. (Potential signs). Sing. Reg-ar, / may, or, can be ruled. reg-aris, or, are, thou may'st, or, canst be ruled. reg-atur, he may, or, can be ruled. Plur. Reg-amur, We may, or, can be ruled. reg-amini, ye may, or, cari be ruled. reg-antur, they may, or, can be ruled. 2. Imperfect Tense. — mighty could, would, should be. Sing. Reg-erer, / might, or, could be ruled. reg-ereris, or, erere, thou mightst,or,couldst be ruled. reg-eretur, he might, or, could be ruled. Plur. Reg-eremur, We might, or, could be ruled. reg-eremini, ye might, or, could be ruled. reg-erentur, they might, or, coidd be ruled. 3. Perfect Tense. — may have been. Sing. Rec-tus sim, or, fuerim, / may have been ruled. rec-tus sis, or, fueris, thou mayst have been mded. rec-tus sit, or, fuerit, he may have been ruled. Plur. Rec-ti simus,or,fuerimus, We may have been ruled. rec-ti sitis, or, fueritis, ye may have been ruled. rec-ti sint, or, fuerint, they may have been ruled. 4. Pluperfect Tense. — might, could, would, should have been. Sing. Rec-tus essem,or,fuissem,7 might have been ruled. rec-tus esses, or, fuisses, thou migMst have been ruled. rec-tus esset, or, fuisset, he might have been ruled. Plur. Rec-ti essemus,or,fuissemus, We might have been ruled. rec-ti essetis,0/*,fuissetis,?/e might have been ruled. rec-ti essent, or, fuissent, they might have been ruled. D 50 LATIN GRAMMAR. INFINITIVE MOOD. Present and Imperfect Tense, Reg-i, to be ruled. Perfect and Pluperfect Tense, Rec-tum esse, or, fuisse, to have been ruled. Future Tense, Rec-tum iri, to be about to be ruled. Participle of the Perfect Tense, Rec-tus, having been ruled. Participle of the Future in dus (or Participle of necessity). Reg-endus, that must be ruled. Note. Verbs of this conjugation that end in lor, insert i before the terminations given in the preceding form in the present, imperfect and future indicative, and in the present subjunctive ; as also before the third person plural of the imperative future. The indicative present is thus formed : — Sing, tor, eris or ere, itur. Plur. tmur, imlni, iuntur. FOURTH CONJUGATION. — Audior. Aud-ior, aud-iris or aud-ire, aud-itus sum or fui, aud-iri ; aud-itus, aud-iendus, to be heard. INDICATIVE MOOD. 1. Present Tense. — am. Sing. Aud-ior, lam heard. aud-iris, or, ire, thou art heard. aud-Itur, he is heard. Plur. Aud-Imur, We are heard. aud-Imini., ye are heard. aud-iuntur, they are heard. CONJUGATION OF PASSIVE VERBS. 51 2. Imperfect Tense. — was. Sing. Aud-iebar, I was heard. aud-iebaris, or, lebare, thou wast heard. aud-iebatur, he was heard. Plur. Aud-iebamur, We were heard. aud-iebamini, ye were heard. aud-iebantur, they were heard. 3. Perfect Tense. — have been. Sing. Aud-Itus sum, or, fui, / have been heard. aud-Itus es, or, fuisti, thou hast been heard. aud-Itus est, or, fuit, he hath been heard. Plur. Aud-Iti sumus, or, fuimus, We have been heard. aud-Iti estis, or, fuistis, ye have been heard. aud-Iti sunt, fuerunt, or, fuere, they have been heard. 4. Pluperfect Tense. — had been. Sing. Aud-Itus eram, or, fueram, / had been heard. aud-Itus eras, or, fueras, thou hadst been heard. aud-Itus erat, or, fuerat, he had been heard. Plur. Aud-Iti eramus, or, fu eramus, We had been heard. aud-Iti eratis, or, fueratis, ye had, been heard. aud-Iti erant, or, fuerant, they had been heard. 5. Future Tense. — shall or will be. Sing. Aud-iar, i" shall, or, will be heard. aud-ieris, or, iere, thou shalt, or, wilt be heard. aud-ietur, he shall, or, will be heard. Plur. Aud-iemur, We shall, or, will be heard. aud-iemini, ye shall, or, will be heard. aud-ientur, they shall, or, will be heard. 6. Future Perfect Tense. — shall or will have been. Sing. Aud-Itus ero, or, fuero, I shall have been heard. aud-Itus eris, or, fueris, thou shalt have been heard. aud-Itus erit, or, fuerit, he shall have been heard. Plur. Aud-Iti erimus, or, fuerlmus, We shall have been heard. aud-Iti eritis, or, fuerltis, ye shall have been heard. aud-Iti-erunt, or, fuerint, they shall have been heard. d 2 52 LATIN GRAMMAR. IMPERATIVE MOOD. 1. Present Tense. Nojirst nor third Person. Sing. Aud-ire, Be thou heard. Plur. Aud-Iniini, Be ye heard. 2. Future Tense. No first Person. Sing. Aud-itor 3 Be thou heard. aud-Itor, let him be heard. Plur. Aud-Iminor, Be ye heard. aud-iuntor, let them be heard. SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 1. Present Tense. — may, can be, 8fc. (Potential signs). Sing. Aud-iar, / may, or, can be heard. aud-iaris, or, iare, thou mayst, or, canst be heard. aud-iatur, he may, or, can be heard. Piur. Aud-iamur, * We may, or, can be heard. aud-iamini, ye may, or, can be heard. aud-iantur, they may, or, can be heard. 2. Imperfect Tense. — might, could, would, should be. Sing. Aud-Irer, I might, or, could be heard. aud-Ireris, or, Irere, thou might st, or, could st be heard. aud-Iretur, he might, or, could be heard. Plur. Aud-Iremur, We might, or, could be heard. aud-Iremini, ye might, or, could be heard. aud-Irentur, they might, or, could be heard. 3. Perfect Tense. — may have been. Sing. Aud-itus sim, or, fuerim, I may have been heard. aud-itus sis, or, fueris, thou may'st have been heard. aud-itus sit, or, fuerit, he may have been heard. Plur. Aud-iti simus, or, fuerimus, We may have been heard. aud-iti sitis, or, fueritis, ye may have been heard. aud-iti sint, or, fuerint, they may have been heard. CONJUGATION OF DEPONENT VEEBS. 53 4. Pluperfect Tense. — might, could, tvould, should have been. Sing. Aud-itusessem,0r,fuissem,/?m#A£ have been heard. aud-Itus esses, or, fuisses, thou might' st have been heard. aud-itus esset, or, fuisset, he might have been heard, Plur. Aud-iti essemus, or, fuissemus, We might have been heard. aud-iti essetis, or, fuissetis, ye might have been heard. aud-iti essent, or, fuissent, they might have been heard. INFINITIVE MOOD. Present and Imperfect Tense, Aud-iri, to be heard. Perfect and Pluperfect Tense, Aud-itum esse, or, fuisse, to have been heard. Future Tense, Aud-itum iri, to be about to be heard. Pakticiple of the Perfect Tense, Aud-Itus, having been heard. Participle of the Future in dus (or Participle of necessity). Aud-iendus, that must be heard. VERBS DEPONENT. Verbs deponent are formed partly like an active and partly like a passive verb ; but are conjugated altogether in their tenses like passive verbs. 1. Moder-or, moder-aris or moder-are, moder-atus sum or fui, moder-ari ; moder-andi, moder-ando, moder- andum; moder-atum, moder-atu; moder-ans, moder- atiirus ; moder-atus, moder-andus, to rule. 2. Pollic-eor, pollic-eris or pollic-ere, pollic-itus sum or fui, pollic-eri ; pollic-endi, pollic-endo, pollic-endum ; pollic-itum, pollic-itu ; pollic-ens, pollic-iturus ; pollic- itus, pollic-endus, to promise. D 3 54 LATIN GRAMMAR. 3. Amplect-or, amplect-eris or amplect~ere, amplex- us sum or fui, amplect-i; amplect-endi, amplect-endo, amplect-endum ; amplex-um, amplex-u ; amplect-ens, amplex-urus ; amplex-us, ainplect-endus, to embrace. 4. Larg-ior, larg-iris or larg-ire, larg-itus sura or fui, larg-iri ; larg-iendi, larg-iendo, larg-iendum ; larg- Itum, larg-itu; larg-iens, larg-iturus; larg-itus, larg- iendus, to bestow freely. VERBS NEUTER PASSIVE. A neuter- passive verb Is formed partly like an active, partly like a passive verb. In the perfect and the tenses derived from it, it is formed and conjugated like a passive verb ; in the remaining tenses like an active verb ; as, Gaudeo, gaudes, gavisus sum or fui, gaudere ; gaud- endi, gaudendo, gaudendum; gavisum, gavisu; gaud- ens, gavlsiirus ; gavisus, to rejoice. CONJUGATION OF VEEBS IEEEGULAE. Possum, Volo, Nolo, Malo, Edo, Fero,^ Feror, Fio, are verbs irregular, and are conjugated as follows : — Possum, potes, potui, posse, potens, to be able. INDICATIVE MOOD. Present Tense. — am. Sing. Possum, I Hur. Possumus, potes, potestis, potest. I possunt. Imperfect Tense. — was. Plur. Poteramus, poteratis. Sing. Poteram, poteras, poterat. poterant. CONJUGATION OF IRREGULAR VERBS, 55 Perfect Tense . — have been. Sing. Potiii, potuisti, potuit. Plur. Potuimus, potuistis, potuerunt or ere, Pluperfect Tense. — had been. Sing. Potueram, potueras, potuerat. Plur. Potueramus, potueratis, potuerant, Future Tense. — shall or will be. Sing. Potero, poteris, poterit. Plur. Poterimus, poteritis, poterunt. Future Perfect Tense, — shall or will have been Sing. Potuero, potueris, potuerit. Plur. Potuerlmus, potuerltis, potuerint. The Imperative Mood is not found SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. Present Tense. — may be, &c. (Potential signs). Sing. Possim, Plur. Posslmus, possis, possit. possltis, possint. Imperfect Tense. — might be, &c Sing. Possen, posses, posset. Plur. Possemus, possetis, possent. Perfect Tense. — may have been. Sing. Potuerim, potueris, potuerit. D Plur. Potuerimus, potuerltis, potuerint. 4 56 LATIN GRAMMAR. Pluperfect Tense. — might have been, fyc. Sing. Potuissem, potuisses, potuisset. Plur. Potuissemus, potuissetis, potuissent. INFINITIVE MOOD. Pres. and Imperf. Perf. and Pluperf. Posse. Potuisse. PARTICIPLE. Pres. Potens (used only as adjective), powerful. Volo, vis, volui, velle; volendi, volendo; volens, to be willing. ESTDICATIVE MOOD. Present Tense. — am. Sing. Volo, vis, vult. Plur. VolumuSj vultis, volunt. Imperfect Tense. — was. Sing. Volebam, volebas, volebat. Plur. Volebamus, volebatis, volebant. Perfect Tense — have been. Sing. Volui, I Plur. Volmmus, voluisti, voluistis, voluit. voluerunt, or ere. Pluperfect Tense. — had been. Sing. Volueram, volueras, voluerat. Plur. Volueramus, volueratis, voluerant. CONJUGATION OF IRREGULAR VERBS. 57 Future Tense. — shall or will be. Sing. Volam, voles, volet. Plur. Volemus, voletis, volent. Future Perfect Tense. — shall or will have been. Sing. Voluero, volueris, voluerit. Plur. Voluerlmus, voluerltis, voluerint. The Imperative Mood is not found. SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. Present Tense. — may be, 8fc. (Potential signs). Sing. Velim, Plur. Vellmus, velis, velltis, velit. I velint. Imperfect Tense. — might be. Sing. Vellem, Plur. Vellemus, velles, velletis, vellet. vellent. Perfect Tense. Sing. Voluerim, volueris, voluerit. may have been. Plur. Voluerimus, voluerltis, voluerint. Pluperfect Tense. — might have been, 8fc. Sing. Voluissem, voluisses, voluisset. Plur. Voluissemus, voluissetis, voluissent. INFINITIVE MOOD. Pres. and Imperf. Velle. Perf. and Pluperf. Voluisse. D 5 58 LATIN GRAMMAR. GERUNDS. Volendi, Volendo. PARTICIPLE. Pres. Volens. Nolo, nonvis, noliii, nolle ; nolendi; nolens, to be unwilling. INDICATIVE MOOD. Present Tense. — am. Sing. Nolo, Plur. Nolumus, nonvis, nonvultis, nonvult. nolunt. Imperfect Tense. — was. Sing. Nolebam. Plur. Nolebamus, nolebas, nolebatis, nolebat. nolebant. Perfect Tense. — have been. Sing. Nolui, Plur. Noluimus, noluisti, noluistis, noluit. noluerunt or ere. Pluperfect Tense. — had been. Sing. Nolueram, nolueras, noluerat. Plur. Nolueramus, nolueratis noluerant. Future Tense. — shall or will be. Sing. Nolam, noles, nolet. -Plur. Nolemus, noletis, nolent. CONJUGATION OF IRREGULAR VERBS. 59 Future Perfect Tense. — shall or will have been. Sing. Noluero, I Plur. Noluerlmus, nolueris, nolueritis, noluerit. I noluerint. IMPERATIVE MOOD. Present Tense. Sing. Noli. | Plur. Nolite. Future Tense. Sing. Nollto, nolito. I Plur. Nolltote, nolunto. SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. Present Tense. — may be, Sfc. (Potential signs), Sing. Nolim, nolis, nolit. Plur. Nollmue, nolltis, nolint. Imperfect Tense. — might be, 8fc. Sing. Nollem. nolles, nollet. Plur. Nollemus, nolletis, nollent. Perfect Tense. — may have been. Sing. Noluerim, nolueris, noluerit. Plur. Noluerimus, nolueritis, noluerint. Pluperfect Tense. — might have been, 8fc. Sing. Noluissem, noluisses, noluisset. Plur. Noluissemus, noluissetis, noluissent. D 6 60 LATIN GRAMMAR. INFINITIVE MOOD. Pres. and Iniperf. Perf. and Pluperf. Nolle. Noluisse. GERUND. Nolendi. PARTICIPLE. Pres. Nolens. Malo, mavis, maliii, malle ; to be more willing, or to have rather. INDICATIVE MOOD. Present Tense. — am. Sing. Malo, mavis, mavult. Sing. Malebani, malebas, malebat. Plur. Malumus, mavultis, malunt. Imperfect Tense. — was. Plur. Malebamus, malebatis, malebant. Perfect Tense. — have been. Sing. Malui, j Plur. Maliiimus, maluisti? maluistis, maliiit. maluerunt or ere. Pluperfect Tense. — had been. Sing. Malueram, malueras, maluerat. Plur. Malueramus, malueratis, maluerant. Future Tense. — shall or will be. Sing. Malam, Plur. Malemus, males, maletis. malet. malent. CONJUGATION OF IRREGULAR VERBS. 61 Future Perfect Tense. — shall or will have been. Sing. Maluero, m aliieris, maluerit. Plur. Maluerimus, maluerltis, maluerint. The Imperative Mood is not found. SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD Present Tense. — may be, 8fc. (Potential signs). Sing. Malim, malis, malit. Plur. Mallmus, malltis, malint. Imperfect Tense. — might be, 8fc. Sing. Mallem, malles, mallet. Plur. Mallemus, malletis, mallent. Perfect Tense. — may have been. Sing. Maluerim, malueris, maluerit. Plur. Maluerimus, malueritis, maluerint. Pluperfect Tense. — might have been, fyc. Sing. Maluissem, maluisses, maluisset. Plur. Maluissemus, maluissetis, maluissent. INFINITIVE MOOD. Pres. and Imperf. Perf. and Pluperf. Malle. Maluisse. 62 LATIN GRAMMAR. Edo, edis or es, edi, edere or esse ; edendi, edendo, edendum ; esum, esu ; edens, esurus, to eat. INDICATIVE MOOD. Present Tense. — do, am. Sing. Edo, Plur. Edimus, edis, or, es, editis, or, estis, edit, or, est. edunt. Imperfect Tense — did, was. Sing. Edebam, Plur. Edebamus, edebas, edebatis, edebat. edebant. Sing. Edi, edisti, edit. Sing. Ederam, ederas, ederat. Perfect Tense. — have. Plur. Edimus, edistis, ederunt, or, ere. Pluperfect Tense. — had. Plur. Ederamus, ederatis, ederant. Future Tense. — shall, will. Sing. Edam, I Plur. Edemus, edes, edetis, edet. I edent. Future Perfect Tense. — shall or will have been. Sing. Edero, ederis, ederit. Plur. Ederimus, ederltis, ederint. IMPERATIVE MOOD. Present Tense, Sing. Ede, es. Plur. EdTte, este. CONJUGATION OF IRREGULAR VERBS. 63 Future Tense, Sing. Edito, esto, 1 Plur. Editote, estote, edito, esto. edunto. SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. Present Tense. — may, can (Potential signs). Sing. Edam, Plur. Edamus, edas, edatis, edat. edant. Imperfect Tense. — might, could, fyc. Sing. Ederem, or, essem, I Plur. Ederemus, or, essemus, ederes, or, esses, ederetis, or, essetis, ederet ? or r esset. ederent, or, essent. Perfect Tense. — may have. Sing. Ederim, ederis, ederit. Plur. Ederimus, ederitis, ederint. Pluperfect Tense. — might have, fyc. Sing. Edissem, edisses, edisset. Plur. Edissemus, edissetis, edissent. INFINITIVE MOOD. Pres. and Imperf. Perf. and Pluperf. Edere, or, esse. Edisse. Future Tense, Esurum esse. GERUNDS. Edendi. Edendo. Edendum. 64 LATIN GRAMMAR. SUPINES. Esum, Esu. PARTICIPLES. Pres. Edens. Fut. Esurus. N.B. — In the same way are conjugated the com- pounds of Edo. Fero, fers, tiili, ferre ; f erendi, f erendo, f erendum ; latum, latu ; f erens, laturus, to bear or suffer. INDICATIVE MOOD. Present Tense. — do, am. Sing. Fero, fers, fert. Plur. Ferimus, fertis, ferunt. Imperfect Tense. — did, was. Sing. Ferebam, ferebas, ferebat. Plur. Ferebamus, ferebatis, ferebant. Perfect Tense. — have. Sing. Tiili, tulisti, tiilit. Plur. Tiilimus, tulistis, tiilerunt, or, ere Sing. Tuleram, tuleras, tulerat. Pluperfect 1 ^ense. — had. Plur. Tuleramus, tuleratis, tulerant. Future Tense. — shall, will. Sing. Feram, j Plur. Feremus, feres, i feretis, feret. ferent. CONJUGATION OF IRREGULAR VERBS. 65 Future Perfect Tense. — shall or will have Sing. Tulero, Plur. Tulerlmus, tuleris, tulerltis, tulerit. tulerint. IMPERATIVE MOOD. Present Tense, Sing. Fer. Plur. Ferte. Future Tense, Sing. Ferto, Plur. Fertote, Ferto, Ferunto. SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. Present Tense. — may, can (Potential signs). Plur. Feramus, feratis, Sing. Feram feras, ferat. ferant. Imperfect Tense. — might, could, fyc. Sing. Ferrem, ferres, ferret. Plur. Ferremus, ferretis, ferrent. Perfect Tense. — may have. Sing. Tulerim, Plur. Tulerimus, tuleris, tuleritis, tulerit. tulerint. Pluperfect Tense. — might have, fyc. Sing. Tulissem, tulisses, tulisset. Plur. Tulissemus, tulissetis, tulissent. INFINITIVE MOOD. Pres. and Imperf. Perf. and Pluperf. Ferre. Tulisse. 66 LATIN GRAMMAR. Future Tense, Laturum esse. GERUNDS. Ferendi, Ferendo, SUPINES. Ferendum Latum, PARTICIPLES. Latu. Pres. Ferens. Fut. Laturus. INDICATIVE MOOD. Feror, ferris or ferre, latus sum or fui, ferri ; latus, ferendus, to be borne, or suffered. Present Tense. — am. Sing. Feror, Plur. FerTmur, fer-ris, or, re, ferimini, fertur. feruntur. Sing. Ferebar, fere-baris, or, bare ferebatur. Imperfect Tense. — was. Plur. Ferebamur, ferebamini, ferebantur. Perfect Tense. — have been. Sing. Latus sum, or, fui, latus es, or, fuisti, latus est, or, fuit. PI. Lati sumus, or, fuimus, lati estis, or, fuistis, [fuere. lati sunt, or, fuerunt, or Pluperfect Tense. — had been. Sing. Latus eram, or, fueram, 1P1. Lati eramus, or, fueramus, latus eras, or, fueras, lati eratis, or, fueratis, latus erat, or, fuerat. lati erant, or, fuerant. Future Tense. — shall or will be. Sing. Ferar, fer-eris, or, ere, feretur. Plur. Feremur, feremini, ferentur. CONJUGATION OF IRREGULAR VERBS. 67 Future Perfect Tense. — shall or will have been. Sing. Latus ero, or, fuero, latus eris, or, fueris, latus erit, or, fuerit, P. Lati erimus, or, fuerlmus, lati eritis, or, fueritis, lati erunt, or, fuerint. Sing. Ferre. Sing. Fertor, fertor. IMPEKATIVE MOOD. Present Tense, Plur. Ferimini. Future Tense, Plur. Feriminor, feruntor. SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. Present Tense. — may be, Sfc. (Potential signs). Sing. Ferar, fer-aris, or, are, feratur. Plur. Feramur, feramini, ferantur. Imperfect Tense. Sing. Ferrer, fer-reris, or, rere, ferretur. — might be, fyc. Plur. Ferremur, ferremini, ferrentur. Perfect Tense. — may have been. Sing. Latus sim, or, fuerim, latus sis, or, fueris, latus sit, or, fuerit. PI. Lati simus, or, fuerlmus, lati sitis, or, fueritis, lati sint, or, fuerint. Pluperfect Tense. — might have been, 8fc. S. Latus essem, or, fuissem, latus esses, or, fuisses, latus esset, or, fuisset. P.Lati essemus, or, fuissemus, lati essetis, or, fuissetis, lati essent, or, fuissent. 68 LATIN GRAMMAR. INFINITIVE MOOD. Pres. and Imperf. Perf. and Pluperf. Ferri. Latum esse, or, fuisse. Future Tense, Latum iri. PARTICIPLES. Perf. Latus. Fut. Ferendus. Flo, fis, factus sum or fui, fieri; factus, faciendus, to be made or done. INDICATIVE MOOD. Present Tense. — am. Sing. Fio, fis, fit. Plur. Fimus, fitis, fiunt. Imperfect T ense. — was. Sing. Fiebam fiebas, fiebat. > Plur. Fiebamus, fiebatis, fiebant. Perfect Tense . — have been. Sing. Factus sum, or, fui, Factus es, or, fuisti, Factus est, or, fuit. PI. Facti sumus, or, fuimus, facti estis, or, fuistis, [fuere Facti sunt, or, fuerunt, or Pluperfect Tense. — had been. Sing. Factus eram, or, fueram. factus eras, or, fueras, Cactus erat, or 9 fuerat, PI. Facti e ramus, or, fueramus, facti eratis, or, fueratis, facti erant, or, fuerant. CONJUGATION OF IRREGULAR VERBS. 69 Future Tense. — shall or will be. Sing. Fiam, Plur. Fiemus. fies, fietis, fiet. fient. Future Perfect Tense. — shall or will have been. Sing. Factus ero, or, fuero, factus eris, or 3 fueris, factus erit, or, fuerit. PL Facti erimus, or, fu erimus, facti eritis, or, fuerltis, facti erunt, or, fuerint. Sing. Fi. Sing. Fito, fito. IMPERATIVE MOOD. Present Tense, | Plur. Fite. Future Tense, Plur. Fitote, fiunto. SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. Present Tense. — may be, Sfc. (Potential signs). Sing. Fiam, Plur. Fiamus, fias, fiatis, fiat. fiant. Imperfect Tense. — might be, Sfc. Sing. Fierem, fieres, fieret. Plur. Fieremus, fieretis, fierent. Perfect Tense. — may have been. Sing. Factus sim, or, fuerim, factus sis, or, fueris, factus sit, or, fuerit. PL Facti simus, or, fu erimus, facti sitis, or, fu eritis, facti sink, or, fuerint. 70 LATIN GRAMMAR. Pluperfect Tense. — might have been, Sfc. Sing. Factus essem,or, fuisseni,!P. Facti essemus, or, fuissemus, Factus esses, or, fuisses, Factus esset, or, fuisset. facti essetis, or, fuissetis, facti essent, or, fuissent. INFINITIVE MOOD. Pres. and Imperf. Perf. and Pluperf. Fieri. Factum esse, or, fuisse. Future Tense, Factum iri, PARTICIPLES. Perf. Factus. Fut. Faciendus. EO, to go, is also a verb irregular. Eo, is, ivi, ire ; eundi, eundo, eundum ; itum, itu ; iens, iturus. INDICATIVE MOOD. Sing. Eo, is, it. Sing. Ibam, ibas, ibat. Sing. Ivi, ivisti, ivit. Present Tense. — do, am. Plur. Imus, itis, eunt. Imperfect Tense. — did, was. Plur. Ibamus, ibatis, ibant. Perfect Tense. — have. Plur. Ivimus, ivistis, iverunt, or, ere. CONJUGATION OF IRREGULAR VERBS. 71 Sing. Iveram, iveras, iverat. Pluperfect Tense. — had. Plur. Iveramus, iveratis, iverant. Future Tense. — shall, will. Sing. Ibo, ibis, ibit. Plur. Ibimus, ibitis, ibunt. Future Perfect Tense. — shall or will have. Sing. Ivero, iveris, iverit. Plur. Iverlmus, iveritis, iverint. IMPERATIVE MOOD. Present Tense. Sing. I, | Plur. Ite. Future Tense. Sing. Ito, ito, Plur. Itote, eunto. Sing. Earn, eas, eat. SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. Present Tense. — may, can. Plur. Eamus, eatis, eant. Imperfect Tense. — might, could, fyc Sing. Irem, ires, iret. Plur. Iremus, iretis, irent. 72 LATIN GRAMMAR. Perfect Tense. — may have. Sing. Iverim, Plur. Iverimus, iveris, iveritis, iverit. iverint. Pluperfect Tense. — might have, 8fc. Sing. Ivissem, ivisses, ivisset. Plur. Ivissemus, ivissetis, ivissent. INFINITIVE MOOD. Present and Imperfect Tense. Ire. Perfect and Pluperfect Tense. Ivisse. Future Tense. Iturum esse. GERUNDS Eundi, Eundo, Eundum. SUPINES. Itum, Itu. PARTICIPLES. Present Tense. Future in rus. lens, Iturus. Gen. Euntis. Obs. In like manner are the compounds of Eo con- jugated, except Ambio ; also Queo to be able, Nequeo to be unable. The two last, however, have neither Imperative mood, future Participle, nor Gerund. DEFECTIVE VERBS. 73 DEFECTIVE VERBS. Verbs are called Defective, that are without some of their tenses or moods. Such are Aio, 1 sag : Ausim, 1 dare : Ave, Hail ! Cedo, Give me : Coepi, / begin : Faxo, or Faxim, / mag or will do : Infit, he begins : Inquio, or Inquam, / sag : Memmi, I remember : Novi, / know : Odi, I hate : Quaeso, Iprag : Salve, Save gou. Sing. Aio, ai's, a'it. Sing. Aiebam, aiebas, aiebat. INDICATIVE MOOD. Present Tense. Plur. aiunt. Sing. aias, aiat. Imperfect Tense. Plur. Aiebamus, aiebatis, aiebant. Perfect Tense. Sing. Ait. SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. Present Tense. Plur. aiant. Participle, Present Tense. Aiens. INDICATIVE and SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. Present Tense. Plur. Sing. Ausim, ausis, ausit. ausint. 74 LATIN GKRAMMAR. IMPERATIVE MOOD. Present Tense. Sing. Ave. Plur. Avete. Future Tense. Sing. A veto. Plur. Avetote. INFINITIVE MOOD. Avere. IMPERATIVE MOOD. Sing Cedo. Plur. Cette. INDICATIVE MOOD. Future Tense. Sing. Faxo, faxis, faxit. Plur. Faximus, faxitis, faxint. SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. Present Tense. Sing. Faxim, faxis, faxit. Plur. Faximus, faxitis, faxint. INDICATIVE MOOD. Present Tense. Sing. Infit. INDICATIVE MOOD. Present Tense. Sing. Inquio, or, inquam, inquis, inquit. Plur. Inquimus, iniquitis, inquiunt. Imperfect Tense. Sing. Inquiebat. DEFECTIVE VERBS. 75 Perfect Tense. Sing. ■ inquisti, inquit. Future Tense. Sing. inquies, inquiet. IMPEEATIYE MOOD. Present Tense. Sing. Inque. Future Tense. Sing. Inquito. PARTICIPLE. Inquiens. INDICATIVE MOOD. Present Tense. Sing. Quaeso. Plur. Quaesumus. INDICATIVE MOOD. Future Tense. Sing. Salvebis. IMPERATIVE MOOD. Present Tense. Sing. Salve. Plur. Salvete. Future Tense. Sing. Salveto. ESTTIOTTIVE MOOD. Present Tense. Salvere. £ 2 76 LATIN GRAMMAR. Sing. Memin-i*, memin-isti, memin-it. Sing. Memin-eram, memin-eras, memm-erat. INDICATIVE MOOD. Perfect Tense. Plur. Memin-imus, meimn-istis, memin-erunt or ere. Pluperfect Tense. Plur. Memm-eramus, memin-eratis, memin-erant. Future Perfect Tense. Sing. Memin-ero, memin-eris, memin-erit. Plur. Memm-erlmus, memm-erltis, meuiin-erint. IMPEKATIVE MOOD. Future Tense. Sing. Memento. Plur. Mementate. SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. Perfect Tense. Sing. Memin-erim, memin-eris, memm-erit. Plur. Memin-erimus^ memin-eritis, memin-erint. Pluperfect Tense. Sing. Memin-issem, memin-isses, memin-isset. Plur. Memin-issemus, memin-issetis, memin-issent. INFINITIVE MOOD. Perfect and Pluperfect Tense. Meminisse. * In this and the three following verbs, the perfect has the significa- tion of the present ; the pluperfect of the imperfect ; the future perfect of the future ; and the imperative future of the imperative present. DEFECTIVE VERBS. 77 Coepi, i" begin ; Novi, / know ; Odi, I hate ; are formed like memini, except that they have no imperative mood. Also, Ccepi has the participle of the future active, Coepturus, about to begin; and of the perfect passive, Coeptus, having been begun. Odi has the parti- ciple of the future active, Osurus, about to hate. Fari, to speak, is an irregular deponent verb, of the first conjugation. , fatus sum or fui, fari: fandi, fando : fatu : fans, fatus, fandus. N.B. The words in italics are found only in one of the compound forms, affSri f effdri, pr&fdri, and profdri. Sing. faris, fatur. Sing. Fabar, INDICATIVE MOOD. Present Tense. Plur. Famur, famtni, fantur. Imperfect Tense. Plur. fabantur. Perfect Tense. Sing. Fatus sum, or fui, fatus es, or, fuisti, fatus est, or, fuit. Plur. Fati sumus, or, fuimus, fati estis, or, fuistis, fati sunt, fuerunt, or ere. Pluperfect Tense. Sing. Fatus eranx, or, fueram,! PI. Fati eramus or, fu eramus, Fatus eras, or, fueras, Fatus erat, or, fuerat. fati eratis, or, fueratis, fati erant, or, fuerant. Sing. Fabor, faberis, or ere, fabltur. Future Tense. Plur. Fabtmur, E 3 78 LATIN GRAMMAR, Future Perfect Tense. Sing. Fatus fuero. IMPERATIVE MOOD.* Sing. Fare. SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD Imperfect Tense. Sing. Farer, Plur. Faremur, fareris, or ere, fare/mini, faretur. farentur. Sing. Fatus sirn, or, fuerim, fatus sis, or, fueris, fatus sit, or, fuerit. Perfect Tense. Plur. Fati simus, or, fuerimus fati sitis, or, fueritis, fati sint, or, fuerint. Sing. Fatus essem, or, fuissem, fatus esses, or, fuisses, fatus esset, or, fuisset. Pluperfect Tense. PI. Fati essemuS; or, fuissemus, fati essetis, or, fuissetis^ fati essent, or, fuissent. INFINITIVE MOOD. Present Tense. Fari. Fandi Present. Fans. GERUNDS. SUPINE. Fatu. PARTICIPLES. Perfect. Fatus. Fando. Future. Fandus. * One old writer also uses prcefato for prcefator ; and prcBfamini for prcefaminor ; the second persons singular and plural of the future tense. IMPERSONAL VERBS, ETC. 79 IMPERSONAL VERBS. Verbs expressed generally, and in English taking the word It before them, are called Impersonals : as, Delectat, it delights ; Decet, it becomes ; Pugnatur, it is fought ; Videtur, it seems. OF AN ADVERB. An Adverb is a part of speech joined to verbs, adjectives, and nouns, to declare some circumstance of time, place, order, quality, or manner : as, scribit bene, he writes well. Adverbs derived from adjectives take the compara- tive and superlative degrees formed from the corre- sponding degrees of their adjectives ; as from doctus, learned, and bonus, good, are formed Docte, doetius, doctissimfc. Bene, melius, optime. OF A CONJUNCTION. A Conjunction is a part of speech that joins words and sentences together ; as, Pater et Mater, my Father and Mother. OF A PREPOSITION. A Preposition is a part of speech most commonly set before another word, and expresses the relations of substantives to each other, or to verbs : as, oppidum in Italia, a town in Italy ; venit ad me, he came to me. E 4 80 LATIN GRAMMAR. These Prepositions have an Accusative Case after them : — Ad, to or at. Juxta, beside, or nigh to Adversus, Adversum > against. Ob, Penes, for or before, in the power of Ante, before. Per, by, or through. Apud, at, or near. Pone, behind. Circa, } Post, after. Circum, > about. Praeter, beside, or except. Circiter, S Prope, nigh. Cis, Citra, J- on this side. Propter, for, or because of. Secundum, according to. Contra, against. Secus, by, or along. Erga, toward. Supra, above. Extra, without. Trans, on the further side. Infra, beneath. Versus, toward. Inter, between, or among. Ultra, beyond. Intra, within. Usque, until. These Prepositions have an Ablative Case after them : A, ab, abs , from, or by. Palam, in the presence of Absque, without. Pra>, before. Coram, before. Pro, for. Cum, ivith. Sine, without. De, of or from. Tenus, up to, or as far as. E, ex, of from, or out of These Prepositions have either an Ablative or an Accu- sative Case after them : Clam, unknown to. Sub, under, In, signifying in, an abl. Subter, under, into, an ace. Super, above. OF AN INTEKJECTION. An Interjection is a word thrown among the words of a sentence to betoken a sudden emotion of the mind, be it grief, or joy, or any other passion. 81 THE GENDERS OF NOUNS. I. SUBSTANTIVES. Proper Names. Masculine. PR OPRIA, qua maribus tribuuntur, mascula dicas ; Ut sunt Divorum ; Mars, Bacchus, Apollo : Virorum ; Ut, Cato, Virgilius : Ventorum; ut, Libs, Notus, Auster; Mensium : ut, October. Fluviorum pleraque, ut Hebrus, Mascula : Montlum item, tit Parnassus, Caucasus ; at sunt Quce neutrum genus, et quce fcemineum sibi poscant : Crustumium, Styx, hoc monstrant ; hoc Pelion, ^Etna. Feminine. PR OPRIA foemineum referentia nomina sexum, Fozmineo genem tribuuntur : sive Dearum Sunt ; ut, Juno, Venus : Muliebria ; ut Anna, Philotis : Urbium ; ut, Elis, Opus : Regionum ; ut, Grgecia, Persis : Insula item nomen ; ceu, Creta, Britannia, Cyprus. Excipienda tamen quondam sunt urbium ; ut ista Mascula; Sulmo, Agragas: qucedam neutralia; ut.Ar^os, Tibur, Praeneste ; et genus Anxur quod dat utrumque. Insula Duiichium neutrum ; Pontus, regio, est mas. Nouns Appellative. Masculine. MASCULA sunt qucBcunque virilem nomina sexum Significant ; deus ut; vir, rex, pater, et leo, taurus. E 5 82 LATIN GRAMMAR. Feminine. FCEMINEUM est quicquid muliebria munera signat; Ut dea ; sic mulier, soror, uxor, vacca, leaena. Appellativa arborum erunt muliebria ; ut, alnus, Laurus et ilex. Pinaster mas, mas oleaster. JHcbc stmt neutra, siler, suber ; sic, robur, zcerque. Gemmarum potiics muliebria; mascula verb Nonnunquam : monstrant illud sapphirus, iaspis ; Hoc adaraas, opalus^z/e. Incerta sraaragdus, onjxque. Epicene. SUNT qucedam Volucrum ; ceu passer, hirundo : Ferarum, Ut tigris, vulpes : et Piscium ; ut, ostrea, cetus ; Dicta epicozna : quibus vox ipsa genus feret aptum. Neuter. OMNE quod exit in urn, aut in on aut es origine Grcecd, Est neutrale genus : sic invariabile nomen. Nouns not increasing. Feminine. NOMEN non crescens genitivo — ceu, caro carnis, Capra caprse, nubes nubis — genus est muliebre. Nouns Masculine excepted. MASCULA Grcecorum quot declinatio prima Fundit in as, et in es ; quibus adde cometa, planeta. GENDERS OF NOUNS. 83 Mascula item, natalis, aqualis : Ab asse creata, Ut centussis, semissis : conjunge lienis, Orbis, caulis, follis, collis, mensis, et ensis, Sic fustis, funis, panis, sic crinis, et ignis ; Cassis, fascis, torris, sentis, piscis, et unguis, Et vermis, vectis, postis ; sic amnis et axis. Mascula in er ; ceu venter : in us quoque mascula, ut annus. Fozminei verb generis domus, alvus, humusg'we, Porticus et manus, et colus : idus, ficus, acusj'we, Et tribus et vannus : qucedam quoque Grceca per us ; ceu, Antidotus, costus, diphthongus, byssus, abyssus, Sic pharus, et methodus, dialectus, lecythus, arctus, Cum multis aliis, qu(B nunc perscribere longum est. Nouns Neuter excepted. NE UTR UM nomen in e, si gignit is ; ut mare, rete; Sic virus, pelagus : neutrum modo, mas modo, vulgus. Nouns of the Doubtful Gender excepted. INCERTI generis sunt talpa et dama, canalis, Et cytisus, balanus, clunis, finis^we penus^we, Pampmus, et corbis, linter, torquis, specus, anguis, Pro morbo ficus, fici dans, atque phaselus, Et grossus ; sic callis item ; quels barbitus adde. Nouns of the Common of two Genders excepted. COMPOSITUM a verbo dans a, est commune duorum ; Grajugena a gigno, agricola a colo, id advena monstrant A venio. Adde senex, auriga, et verna, sodalis, Vates, extorris, patruelis, jerque duellis, Affinis, juvenis, testis, civis, canis, hostis. 84 LATIN GRAMMAR. Wtt &ccon& &ptriai mule. Nouns increasing long. Feminine. NO MEN — crescentis penultima si genitivi Syllaba acuta* sonat, velut hcec, pietas pietatis, Virtus virtutis, monstrant — genus est muliebre. Nouns Masculine excepted. MASCULA dicuntur monosyllaba nomina qucedam: Sal, sol, ren, et splen ; sic pes, et vas vadis, as, prres, Mos, flos, ros, et glis ; gryps, dens, mons, pons, simul et fons. Mascula in o vel in njinita ; ut, scipio, sermo, Senio, ternio, curculio ; delphinyz/e, lien^e. Mascula in er ; ceu crater : atque in or, ut timor, ardor. Adde bidens instrumentum, cum pluribus in dens. His etiam adjungas qua componuntur ab asse ; Ut dodrans. Addas oriens, torrens, elephas§7^. Jungantur magnes^e, lebesj^e, tapes^z/e ; meridi- es nomen quiutce ; thorax, hydrops quoque, spadix. Nouns Neuter excepted. SUNT neutralia et hcec monosyllaba nomina ; mel, fel, Lac, far, ver, aes, cor, vas vasis, os ossis, et oris, Rus, thus, jus, crus, pus : et in al polysyllaba in arque, Ut, capital, laquear. Neutrum al-ec, -ex muliebre. Nouns of the Doubtful Gender excepted. SUNT dubii generis, scrobs, serpens, bubo, rudens, grus, Perdix, lynx, lirnax, stirps pro trunco, pedis et calx : Adde dies, numero tantum mas esto secundo. * See Prosody, Part II. GENDERS OF NOUNS. 85 Nouns of the Common of two Genders excepted. SUNT commune, parens, zuoXorque, infans, adolescens, Dux, illex, haeres, exlex: a f route creata, Ut, bifrons ; custos, bos, fur, sus, atque sacerdos. *&§* ®|)trii special 2Ruk. Nouns increasing short. Masculine. NOMEN — crescentis penultima si genitivi Sit gravis*, ut sanguis genitivo sanguinis — est mas. Nouns Feminine excepted. FCE MINE I generis sit hyper dissyllabon in do, Quod dinis, atque in go, quod dat ginis, in genitivo. Id tibi dulcedo faciens dulcedinis, idque Monstrat compago compaginis. Adjice Grceca in As vel in isjinita; ut lampas, cuspis et aspis. Junge pecus formans pecudis ; sindon, etiam icon, Grando, fides, etiam teges, et seges, arbor, kyemsque, Et forfexj pellex, carex, simul atque supellex, Et chlamys, appendix, coxendix, adde ftWxque. Nouns Neuter excepted. EST neutrale genus signans rem non animatam Nomen in a, ut problema ; en, ut omen ; ar, ut jubar ; ur dans, Ut jecur ; us, ut onus; put, ut occiput. Attamen ex his Mascula sunt, pecten, furfur. Sunt neutra cadaver, Verber, tuber, et uber, et sequor, marmor, ador^we ; Sic iter atque laser, cicer, et piper, atque papaver, Et siser ; adde pecus faciens pecoris genitivo. See Prosody, Part II. 86 LATIN GRAMMAR. Nouns of the doubtful Gender excepted. SUNT dubii generis, cardo, margo, cinis, objex, Forceps, pumex, imbrex, cortex, pulvis, adeps^we ; Quels etiam conjunge culex, imtrixque, silexque ; Quamvis hcec melius vult mascula dicier usus. Nouns Common excepted. COMMUNIS generis sunt ista ; vigil, pugil, exul, Praesul, homo, nemo, martyr, Ligur, augur, et Areas, Antistes, miles, pedes, interpres, comes, hospes ; Sic ales, prseses, princeps, auceps, eques, obses : Atque alia a verbis qua nomina multa creantur ; Ut, conjux, judex, vindex, opifex, et aruspex. H. ADJECTIVES. ADJECTIVA unam duntaxat habentia vocem ; Ut, felix, audax ; retinent genus omne sub una. Sub gemind si voce cadant, velut omnis et omne, Vox commune duiim -prior est, vox altera neutrum. At si tres variant voces ; sacer ut, sacra, sacrum ; Vox prima est mas, altera fozmina, iertia neutrum. Obs. 1. At sunt qucejlexu prope substantiva vocares, Adjectiva tamen naturd usuque reperta. Talia sunt, pauper, puber, cum degener, uber ; Et dives, lociiples, sospes, conjunge superstes : Cum paucis aliis, qua lectio justa docebit Obs. 2. Hcec proprium quendam sibijlexum adsciscere gaudent : Campester, voliicer, celeber, celer, atque saluber : Junge pedester, equester, et acer : junge paluster, Atque alacer, Sylvester. At hcec tu sic variabis ; Sit rectus triplex ; celer et celeris, celere : aut sic ; Sit commune duiim celeris, celere et tibi neutrum. 87 NOUNS HETEROCLITE, OE IRREGULAR. Qnce genus autfiexum variant, qucecungue novato Ritu dejiciunt superantve, HETEROCLITA dices. Nouns changing their Gender and Declining. HJEC genus, ac Jlexum, partim variantia cernis. Pergamus in numero plurali Pergama gignit Dal prior his numerus neutrum genus, alter utrumque ; Rastrum cum freno, filum simul atque capistrum. Argos item et coelurn sunt singula neutra : sed audi, Mascula duntaxat ccelos vocitabis et Argos : Frena sed et frenos ; quo pacto et ccetera formant Pluralis numerus genus his solet adder e utrumque ; Sibilus, atque jocus, locus. — His quoque plurima jungas. Nouns defective. Q UjE sequitur, manca est casu numerove, propago. Aptotes ; or, Nouns undeclined. Q UJEnidlum variant casum — -ut, fas, nil, nihil, instar: Et pondo, mane, et nequam, semis quoque, cepe ; Multa et in u, simul i ; veluti cornuque gemique ; Et gummi, frugi : sic Tempe, tot, quot, et omnes A tribus ad centum numeros — Aptota vocabis. Monoptotes ; or, Nouns declined with one Case. EST QUE MonoptSton nomen, cui vox cadit una: Ceu, noctu, natu, jussu, injussu, simul astu, Promptu, permissu, nauci, dicis, inficiasywe ; Integra et in plurali, ambage et compede, fauce. Diptotes ; or, Nouns declined with two Cases. SUNT Diptota, quibus duplex Jlexura remansit: Ut, fors forte dabit sexto, spontis quoque sponte ; 88 LATIN GRAMMAR. Jugeris et sexto dat jugere ; verberis autem Verbere : suppetiae quarto quoque suppetias dant ; Sic repetundarum repetundis : vespere vesper, Viscere visceris, impetis impete. Verbere totum Pluralem numerum cum viscere, jugere, servant, Triptotes ; or, Nouns declined with three Cases. TRES quibus infiectis casus, Triptota vocantur : Sic opis est nostra, fer opem, legis, atque ope dignus : Flecte preci, atque precem, et prece; sic vicis et vice format, Atque vicem. His numerus semper datur omnibus alter. Tantundem, primum, quartum, recipitque secundum. Et grates, primum, quartum, quintumque reposcit. Tetraptotes and Pentaptotes ; or Nouns declined with four and five Cases. Hcec primo quintoque carent, frugis, ditionis ; Plus quoque pluris habet, plus quarto, plure^e sexto : Integra vox vis est, nisi de sit forte dativus ; Attamen hcec tibi plurali sunt integra semper. Integra sunt noster, vester ; necnon meus et tu ; Cetera cuncta carent quinto pronomina casu. Nouns defective in the Plural Number. PROPRIA cuncta notes fieri plur alia nolle. Quin alia abjiciunt numerum non pauca secundum Ex sensu aut usu ; quce maxima norma loquendi est. Nouns defective in the Singular Number. MASCULA sunt tantum numero contenta secundo, Manes, majores, cancelli, liberi, et antes, Lendes, et lemures, fasti simul, atque minores, Quum genus assignant natales ; adde penates, GENDERS OF NOUNS. 89 Et loca plurali, quales Qn\mque, Jjocnque, Et qucecunque legas passim similis rationis. Hcec sunt fceminei generis, numerique secundi : Deliciaa, exuviae, phaleraag^e, maniibiaa *, et idus, Antiaa, et induciaa ; simul insidiaa^we, minxque, Excubiaa, nonaa, nugaa, tricaa^we, calendaa, Quisquiliaa, thermaa, cunaa, diraa, exequiaa^we, Feriaa, et inferiaa ; sic primitiaa^we, plagaa^we Retia signantes, et valvaa, divitiaa^z/e, Nuptiaa item, et lactes : addantur Thebaa et Athenaa , Quod genus invenias et nomina plura locorum. Rariics hcec primo pluralia neutra leguntur ; Moania, cum tesquis, praacordia, lustra ferarum, Arma, mapalia ; sic bellaria, munia, castra : Funus justa petit, petit et sponsalia virgo ; Rostra disertus amat, puerique crepundia gestant 9 Infantesque colunt cunabiila : consulit exta Augur, et absolvens superis effata recantat: Festa deum poterunt, ceu Bacchanalia, jungi: Quodsi plura leges, licet hdc quoque classe reponas. Nouns declined after both the second and fourth Declension. H^EC simul et quarti fiexus sunt, atque secundi ; Laurus enim l&uvifacit et laurus genitivo ; Sic quercus, pinus, pro fructu ac arbore ficus, Sic colus, atque penus ; cornus quando arbor habetur ; Sic lacus, atque domus ; licet hcec nee ubique recurrant His quoque plura leges, quce priscis jure relinquas. * The u is properly short ; but a licence is here assumed of lengthen- ing it for the purpose of bringing it into the verse. 90 LATIN GRAMMAR. THE PERFECT TENSE AND SUPINES OF VERBS. I. The Perfect Tense of simple Verbs. The First Conjugation. As avi. AS in prcesenti perfectum format in avi: Ut no nas navi, vocito voeitas vocitavi. Excipias plico quod -plicuif acit, atque plicavi; Et neco quod necui raro> sed scepe necavi. Sic seco quod secui, mico quod miciii, frico verbum Quod fricui, domo quod domui, tono quod toniii dot. Sic sonui sono, sic vetui veto, sic crepo uijit ; Atque cubo cubui ; lavo dat lavi, et juvo juvi. Do das rite dedi, sto stas formare steti vult The Second Conjugation. Es ui. Es in prcesenti perfectum format ui dans : Sic mon-eo, es, monui, necnon tum-eo, es, tumiii dat. Hcec se-deo, vi-deo, cum pran-deo, stri-deo—dant di. Quatuor his infra gerninatur syllaba prima : Pendeo namque pependi, mordeo vultque momordi, Spondeo habere spopondi, tondeo vultque totondi. L vel r ante geo si stet, geo vertitur in si : Urgeo ut ursi, mulgeo mulsi, fulgeo fulsi. Prceteritum per si dant ar-deo, tor-queo, mul-ceo. Hae-reo, sua-deo, ri-deo item et man-eo ; ju-beo, ssi, PERFECT TENSE AND SUPINES. 91 Sorbeo sorbui habet, sorpsi quoque ; luceo luxi, Frigeo frixi, lugeo luxi, habet augeo et auxi. Dat fleo fles flevi, pleo pies plevi, neo nevi. Antiquum leo compositis format sibi levi. Fit veo vi ; ut moveo movi, foveo quoque fovi. Niveo habet nivi et nixi, vieoque vievi. The Third Conjugation, TER TIA prceteritum formabit ut hie manifestum. Bo fit bi : ut lambo Iambi. Scribo excipe scripsi, Et nubo nupsi. Antiquum cumbo cubui dat Co fit ci : ut vinco vici. Vult parco peperci, Vix parsi : dico dixi, duco quoque duxi. Do fit di : ut mando mandi : sed scindo scidi dat, Findo fidi, fundo fudi, tundo tutudique. Dat rii-do, divi ; pendo pependi, tendo tetendi Cedo facit cessi, cecidi cado, caedo cecidi. Vado, rado, laedo, ludo, divido, trudo, Claudo, plaudo, rodo, ex do semper faciunt si. Go fit xi : ut jungo junxi : sed r ante go vult si, Ut spargo spar si, lego legi, et ago facit egi. Dat tango tetigi, pungo pupiigi tibi reddit. Dat frango fregi, pepigi vult pango paciscor ; Pango etiam pegi, sed panxi maluit usus. Ho fit xi : traho eeu traxi docet, et veho vexi, Lo fit ui : colo ceu colui, molo ceu molui dat, Sal-lo facit Y\, sic psal-lo. Velio tibi velli Et vulsi, pello pepiili dat, fallo fefelli. M.ofit ui, ut vomo. Sed dat emo emi, dat premo pressi. 92 LATIN GRAMMAR. N o fit vi : sino ceu sivi. Temno excipe tempsi; Dat sterno stravi, sperno sprevi, lino levi Inter dum et livi, jungas cerno quoque crevi. Gigno, pono, cano ; genui, posui, cecini, dant. To fit psi : ut scalpo scalpsi, carpo quoque carpsi. Excipias rurnpo rupi> strepo quod strepui dat Quo fit qui : ut linquo natis liqui : at coquo coxi. Roj#£vi: sero ceu, pro planto et semino, sevi; Quod seriii melius semper dabit, ordino signans. Vult verro verri, vult uro ussi, gero gessi, Qusero quaesivi, tero trivi, curro cucurri. So format sivi : velut arcesso arcessivi. Viso at visi, pinso pinsui habet, quoque pinsi. Sco fit vi: ut pasco pavi; atque quiesco quievi. Sed didici disco formabit, posco poposci. To fit ti: ut verto verti: sed sisto stiti dat. Dat mitto misi, peto vult formare petivi ; Sterto stertui habet, meto messui. — Ab ecto fit exi ; Ut flecto flexi. Necto dat nexui, habetque Nexi ; etiam pecto dat pexui, habet quoque pexi. Yofit vi: ut volvo volvi: vivo excipe vixi. ILofit ui : ut monstrat texo, quod texui habebit Fit cio ci : ut facio feci, jacio quoque jeci : Antiquum lacio lexi, specio quoque spexi. Fit dio di : ut fodio fodi. — Gio, ceu fugio, gi. Fit pio pi : ut capio cepi : cu-pio excipe pivi, 2?£ rapio rapui, sapio sapui atque sapivi. Fit rio ri : ut pario peperi. — Tio ssi, ut tibi reddent Composita a quatio ; quassi haud reperitur in usu. PERFECT TENSE AND SUPINES. 93 Denique uo fit ui : ut statuo statui. Pluo pluvi Format sive plui ; struo sed struxi, fluo fluxi. The Fourth Conjugation. Is ivi. Q UAR TA dat is ivi : ut monstrat scio scis tibi scivi. Veneo venivi format, vemo quoque veni. Raucio rausi, farcio farsi, sarcio sarsi, Sepio sepsi, sentio sensi, fulcio fulsi, Haurio item hausi, sancio sanxi, vincio vinxi. Prceteritum per uiformans amicire notetur ; Pro salto salio saliii, salii, atque salivi. II. The Perfect Tense of compound Verbs. PRJETERITUM dat idem simplex et compositivum: Ut docui edocui monstrat Sed syllaba, semper Quam simplex geminat, composto non geminatur ; Attamen excurro cum prsecurro excipiantur, Atque a do, disco, sto, posco, rite creata. A plico compositum cum sub vel nomine — ut ista 9 Supplico, multiplico — gaudet formare plicavi ; Applico, complico, replico, et explico, ui quoque formant. Quamvis vult oleo simplex olui, tamen inde Quodvis compositum melius formabit olevi ; Simplicis at formam redolet sequitur, suboletj'we. Composita a pungo formabunt omnia punxi : Vult unum pupugi, interdum punxi^&e, repungo. Ex natis ab emo vult comofingere compsi, Demo dempsi, promo prompsi, sumoque sumpsi. Natum a do, quando est inflexio tertia, ut addo, Credo, edo, dedo, reddo, perdo, abdo, vel obdo, 94 LATIN GXtAMMAK. Condo, indo, trado, prodo, vendo, didi ; at unum Abscondo abscondi. Natum a sto stas, stiti habebit. Compound Verbs which change the first Vowel into e. VERBA hcec simplicia prcesentis prceteritique, Si componantur, vocalem primam in e mutant : Damno, lacto, sacro, fallo, areeo, tracto, fatiscor, Cando vetus, cap to, jacto, patior, gv&dior que, Partio, carpo, patro, scando, spargo ; ip&rioque ; Cujus nata per i duo, comperit et reperit, dant ; Ccetera sed per ui : velut hcec aperire, operire. Prceterea a pasco pavi composta noteniur Hcec duo, compeseo, dispesco, pesciii habere : At sibi depasco servabit simplicis usum. Compound Verbs which change the first Vowel into i. HJEC, habeo, lateo, salio, statuo, cado, laedo, Et tango, atque cano, sic quaero, csedo cecidi, Sic egeo, teneo, taceo, sapio, rapio^e, Si componantur, vocalem primam in i mutant : Ut rapio rapui, eripio eripui. A cano natum Prceteritum per ui, ceu concino concinui, dat. A placeo sic displiceo ; sed simplicis usum Hcec duo, complaceo cum perplaceo, bene servant. Composita a verbis calco, salto, a per u mutant : Id tibi demonstrant, conculco, inculco, resulto. Composita a claudo, quatio, lavo, rejiciunt a : Id docet a claudo, occludo, excludo ; a quatio^e, Percutio, excutio ; a lavo, proluo> diluo, nata. Compound Verbs which change the first Vowel of the Present Tense into i, but not of the Perfect Tense. HJEC si componas, ago, emo, sedeo, rego, frango, Et capio, jacio, lacio, specio, premo, pango, PERFECT TENSE AND SUPINES. 95 Vocalem primam presentis in i sibi mutant 9 Pr&teriti nunquam : ceu frango, refringo refregi ; A capio, incipio incepi. Sed pauca notentur ; Namque suum simplex perago sequitur, satago§^e ; Atque ab ago, dego dat degi, cogo coegi ; A rego, sic pergo perrexi ; vult quoque surgo Surrexi ; media prcesentis syllaba ademptd. A lacio, elicio eliciii ; dant ccetera lexL Composita a pango retinent a quatuor ista : Depango, oppango, circumpango, atque repango. JVil variat facio, nisi proeposito prceeunte : Id docet olfacio, cum calfacio, m&cioque. A lego nata, re, per, prae, sub, trans, ad, prceeunte, Prcesentis servant vocalem : in i ccetera mutant ; Be quibus hcec, intelligo, diligo, negligo, tantum Prceteritum lexifaciunt; reliqua omnia legi. The Supines of simple Verbs. NUNC ex prceterito discas formare supinum. Bi sibi turn sumit: sic namque bibi bibitumj#£. Ci Jit ctum : ut vici victum testatur, et ici Dans ictum, feci factum, jeci quoque jactum. Sed parsum sibi, parcitum item, vult parco peperci. Dijfit sum : ut vidi visum. Qucedam geminant s ; Ut pandi passum, sedi sessum, adde scidi, quod Dat scissum, atque fidi fissum, fodi quoque fossum. Syllaba prceteriti geminatur scepe, supinis Non autem : format tensum tentumque tetendi : Dat tutudi tunsum, cecidi casum, atque cecidi Csesuin; junge dedi datum habens, morsum genitivo et dativo junguntur : ut, Commune animantium omnium est Cic. Mors omnibus est communis. Cic. Non aliena consilii. Sail. Alienus ambitioni. Sen. Vobis immunibus hujus Esse mali dabitur. Ovid. Caprificus omnibus immunis est. Plin. 27. Verbalia in bllis accepta passive dativum postu- lant: ut, Nulli penetrabilis astro Lucus iners. Stat. The Accusative Case after the Adjective. 28. Magnitudinis mensura subjicitur adjectivis in accusativo, ablativo, et genitivo : ut, Turris centum pedes alta. Fons latus pedibus tribus. Area lata pedum deniim. 29. Accusativus aliquando subjicitur adjectivis et participiis, more Grseco : ut, Os humerosgwe Deo similis. Vir£. Vultum deinissus. Nee animum mitior anguibus. Hor. F 5 106 LATIN GRAMMAR. The Ablative Case after the Adjective. 30. Adjectiva, quas ad copiam egestatemve perti- nent, interdum ablativum, interdum genitivum exigunt : ut, Longa senectus Plena malis. Juv. Dives equuin, dives pictdi vestis et auri. Virg. Amor et melle et felle est foecundissimus. Plaut. Vis consilii expers mole ruit sua. Hor. 31. Adjectiva et substantiva regunt ablativum signi- ficantem causam vel formam vel modum rei : ut, Pallidus ira. Nomine grammaticus, re barbarus. Trojanus origine Caesar. Virg. 32. Dignus, indignus, prceditus, captus, contentus, ex- torris ? fretus, liber, cum adjectivis pretium significanti- bus, ablativum exigunt : ut, Dignus es odio. Ter. Qui gnatum haberem tali ingenio prseditum. Ter. Oculis capti fodere cubilia talpce. Virg. Sorte tud contentus abi. Ext orris patria et domo. Sail. Fretus conscientia officii mei. Cic. Terrore liber animus. Liv. Gemmis venale. Hor. 33. Dignus, indignus, extorris, et liber aliquando genitivum aclmittunt: ut, Carmina digna dese. Indignus avorum. Virg. Extorris regni. Stat. Liber laborum. Hor. 34. Comparatita ablativum admittunt ejus rei vel personae, cui aliquid comparatur : ut, Vilius argentum est auro, virtutibus aurum. Hor. 35. Comparativis et superlativis ablativi quidam ad- duntur, qui mensuram excessus significant : ut, SYNTAX. 107 Tanto pessimus omnium poeta. Quanto tu optimus omnium patronus. Quo plus habent, eo plus cupiunt. PEONOUNS. 36. Meiy tui, sui, nostril vestri, genitivi primitivorum, ponuntur, quum persona significatur : ut, Languet desiderio tui. Pars^we tui lateat corpore clausa meo. Ovid. Imago nostri. 37. Mens, tuus, suus, noster, vester, ponuntur, quum actio vel possessio rei significatur : ut, Favet desiderio tuo. Imago nostra : i. e., quam nos possidemus. VEEBS. The Nominative Case after the Verb. 38. Verba substantiva; ut sum, for em, fio, exsisto ; verba vocandi passiva ; ut nominor, appellor, dicor, vocor, nuncupor ; et iis similia; ut videor, habeor, existimor ; utrinque nominativum habent : ut, Deus est summum bonum. Perpusilli vocantur nani. Fides religionis nostrce fundamentum habetur. Infinitum horum utrinque eosdem casus habet; ut, Cato malebat esse quam videri bonus. Sail. Principem se esse mavult, quam videri. Cic. Natura beatis Omnibus esse dedit Claud. f 6 I OS LATIN GRAMMAR. 39. Item omnia fere verba post se adjectivum ad- mittunt, quod cum nominativo verbi casu, genere, et nuinero, concordat: ut, Nihil est amabilius virtute. Cic. Yict&jacet pietas. Ov. The Genitive Case after the Verb. 40. Sum genitivum postulate quoties possessionem, officium, aut signum denotat : ut, Pecus est Meliboei. Virg. Adolescentis est majores natu revereri. Cic. Est fortis non perturbari in rebus asperis. Cic. 41. Verba accusandi, datnnandi, absolvendi, monendi, et similia, genitivum postulant, qui crimen significat : ut, Qui alterum accusat probri, eum ipsum se intueri opor- tet Plant. Sceleris condemnat generum suum. Cic. Judex absolvit injuriarum eum. Cic. Admoneto ilium pristince fortunse. 42. Satago, misereor, et miseresco, genitivum postu- lant : ut, Is rerum suarum satagit. Ter. — Oro miserere labor am Tantorum, miserere anim^e non digna ferentis. Virg. Et generis miseresce tui. Stat. 43. Reminiscor, obliviscor, memzni, recordor 3 genitivum aut accusativum admittunt : ut, VatcB fidei reminiscitur. Oblivisci nihil soles nisi injurias. Cic. Proprium est stultitioz aliorum vitia cernere, oblivisci suorum. Cic. Faciam ut hujus loci semper memineris. Ter. SYNTAX. 109 Haec olim meminisse juvabit. Virg. Hujus meriti in me recordor. Cic. Si rite audita recordor. 44. Potior aut genitivo aut ablativo jungitur: ut 9 Romani signorum et armorum potiti sunt. Sallust. Egressi optatd potiuntur Troes arena. Virg. The Dative Case after the Verb. 45. Omnia verba regunt dativum qui relationem denotat : ut, Non solum nobis nati sumus. Cic. To this rule belong the following hinds of Verbs : 46. Verba significantia commodum aut incommodum regunt dativum : ut, Non potes mihi commodare, nee incommodare. 47. Ex his juvo, Icedo, delecto, et alia quasdam, accusatiyum exigunt: ut, Fessum quies plurimum juvat. 48. Verba comparandi regunt dativum : ut, Sic parvis componere magna solebam. Virg. 49. Verba dandi et reddendi regunt dativum : ut, For tuna multis dat nimis, satis nulli. Mart. Ingratus est, qui gratiam bene merenti non reponit. 50. Verba promittendi ac solvendi regunt dativum: ut, Quce tibi promitto, ac recipio sanctissime esse obser- vaturum. Cic. JEs alienum mihi numeravit. Cic. 110 LATIN GRAMMAR. 51. Verba imperandi et nuntiandi regunt dativum: ut, Imperat 3 aut servit, collecta pecunia cuique. Hor. Quid de quo que viro et cui dicas, s&pe videto. Hor. 52. Excipe rego et guberno, quae accusativum habent ; temper o et moderor, qua3 nunc dativum, nunc accusativum habent : ut, Luna regit menses. — Orbem Deus ipse gubernat. Temperat ipse sibi. — Sol temperat omnia luce. Hie moderatur equos. — Qui non moderabitur irse. 53. Verba fidendi et diffidendi dativum regunt : ut, Vacuis committere venis Nil nisi lene decet Hor. Video?* prudentise tuce difndere. Cic. 54. Verba obsequendi et repugnandi dativum regunt : ut, Semper obtemperat pius films patri. Ignavis precibus /br^raa repugnat. 55. Verba minandi et irascendi regunt dativum : ut, Utrique mortem est minitatus. Cic. Adolescenti nihil est quod succenseam. Ter 56. Sum cum compositis, prgeter possum, regit dati- vum: ut, Rex pius est reipublicae ornamentum. Mini nee obest, nee prodest. 57. Verba composita cum quibusvis fere prapositi- onibus, et cum adverbiis bene, satis, male, regunt dati- vum : ut, Dii tibi benefaciant. Ter. Iniquissimam pacem justissimo bello antefero. Cic. SYNTAX. Ill 58. Non pauca ex his aliquoties regunt accusativum : ut, Prasstat ingenio alius alium. Quinct. 59. Est, pro habeo, regit dativum: ut, Est mihi namque domi pater, est injusta noverca. Virg. 60. Sum, cum multis aliis, admittit dativum personae cum dativo rei : ut, Exitio est avidis mare nautis. Hor. Speras tibi laudi fore, quod mihi vitio vertis ? The Accusative Case after the Verb. 61. Verba transitiva exigunt accusativum : ut, Percontat5rem fugito, nam garrulus idem est Hor. Aper agros depopulatur. 62. Verba intransitiva accusativum non admittunt: ut, Pueri ludunt. 63. Intransitiva verba nonnunauam transitive usurp- antur : ut, Bonum civem ludit. Cic. Duram servit servitutem. Longam incomitata videtur Ire viam. Virg. Nee vox hominem sonat ; O dea certe. Virg. 64. Verba rogandi et docendi, item celo, fere duplicem regunt accusativum : ut, Tu modo posce deos veniam. Virg. Dedocebo te istos mores. Ridiculum est te istuc me admonere. Ter. Ea ne me celet, consuefeci Jilium. Ter. 112 LATIN GRAMMAR. 65. Hujusmodi verba etiam in passive, voce accusa- tivum post se habent : ut 3 Posceris exta bovis. The Ablative Case after the Verb. 66. Quodvis verbum admittit ablativum significan- tem instrumentum, aut causam, ant nioduin actionis: ut, Hi jaculis, illi certant defendere saxis. Virg. Vehementer ira excanduit. Mir a celeritate rem peregit. 67. Quibusdam verbis subjicitur nomen pretii in ab- lativo casu : ut, Teruncio seu vitiosd nnce non emerim. Multorum sanguine ac vulneribus ea Pcenis victoria stetit. Liv. 68. Excipiuntur hi genitivi sine subs tan ti vis positi; tanti, quanti, pluris, minoris, tantidem, quantivis, quan- tilibet, quanticunque, &c. ut, Tanti eris aliis y quanti tibi fueris. Cic. 69. Flocci, nauci, nihili, pili, assis, hujus, teruncii, verbis aestimandi peculiariter adduntur : ut 5 Ego ilium flocci pendo ; nee hujus facio, qui me pili gestiinat. 70. Verba abundandi, implendi, onerandi, et his di- versa, ablativo junguntur : ut, Amore abundas, Aniipho. Ter. Sylla omnes suos divitiis explevit. Sail. Te quibus mendaeiis homines levissimi onerarunt. Cic. Nulla vitce pars vacare officio potest. Cic. SYNTAX. 113 71. Ex quibus quaedam nonnunquam genitivum re- gunt: ut, Implentur veteris Bacchi pinguisque ferinae. Virg. Non tarn artis indigent, quam laboris. Ter. 72. Fung or, fruor, utor, vescor, pascor, dignor, muto, nitor, super sedeo, ablativo j unguntur : ut, Qui adipisci veram gloriam volet, justitice fungatur officiis. Cic. Optimum est aliend frui insania. In re mala, animo si bono utare, juvat. Vescor carnibus. Maleficio et scelere pascuntur. Cic. Haud equidem tali me dignor honore. Virg. Diruit, cedificat, mutat quadrdta rotundis. Hor. Quod ita ortum est e terra, ut stirpibus suis nitatur. Cic. Verborum multitudme supersedendum est. 73. Verbis, quae vim comparationis obtineut, additur ablativus significans mensuram excessus : ut, Incredibile est quanto herum anteeo sapientid. Ter. 74. Verbis, vel potius orationibus, interdum additur ablativus absolute sumptus : ut, Imperante Augusto natus est Christus ; imperante Tiberio, crucifixus. Me duce, tutus eris. Ovid. 75. Verbis intransitivis et passivis saepe additur ab- lativus partis affectae, et poetice accusativus : ut, .ZEgrotat animo magis quam corpore. Nee vultum sermone movetur. Virg. 114 LATIX GRAMMAR. 76. Passivis additur ablativus agentis, sed antece- dente a vel ab praepositione ; et interdum dativus : ut, Laudatur ab his, culpatur ab illis. Hor. Honesta bonis viris, nan occulta, quseruntur. THE INFINITIVE MOOD. 77. Verbis quibusdam 3 participiis, et adjectivis, ad- duntur verba infinita : at, Dicere qua pudtiit, scribere jussit amor. Ovid. Jussus confxm&ere fcedus. Virg. Erat turn dio-nus amari. Vira 78. Ponuntur interdum sola verba infinita* pro im- perfecta indicative : at, Qua pergebaL agros yastare, prcedas agere. Sail. {Pro vastabat., agebat.) Hinc spargere voces In valgum ambiguas, et quserere conscius arma. Virg. {Pro spargebat, quasrebat.) 79. Verba infinita frequenter accusativum ante se statuunt : at, Te rediisse incolumem gaudeo. GERUNDS AND SUPINES. 80. Gerundia et Supina regunt casus suorum ver- borum : ut, Efferor studio patres vestros videndi. Cic. Scitatum oracula Phcebi Mittimus. — Viig. * This is called the Historical infinitive. SYNTAX. 115 Gerunds. 81. Gerundia in di eandem cum genitivis construc- tionem habent, et pendent a quibusdam turn substan- tivise turn adjectivis : ut, Cecropias inndtus apes amor urget habendi. Virg. JEneas celsd in puppijam certus eundi. Virg. 82. Pro gerundiis in di verba infinita nonnunquam usurpantur: ut, Tempus abire tihi est. Hor. 83. Gerundia in do eandem cum dativis et ablativis constructionem obtinent : ut, Simul aptat habendo ensem. Virg. Hominis mens discendo alitur et cogitando. Cic. Scribendi ratio conjuncta cum loquendo est Quinct. 84. Gerundia in dum pro accusativis usurpantur, prsecedente prsepositione : ut, Breve tempus cetatis satis longum est ad bene koneste- que vivendum. Cic. Inter spoliandum corpus hostis veruto percussus est. Liv. 85. Vertuntur etiam gerundia in nomina adjectiva, quae Gerundiva vocantur : ut, Ad accusandos homines dud prcemio, proximum latro- cinio est. 86. Quum significatur necessitas usurpantur gerun- diva cum verbo substantivo : ut, Ager colendus est, utfrugesferat. Cic. Est calcanda semel via let hi. Hor. Video rem omittendam esse. Cic. 87. Gerundiva in dum cum verbo substantivo pro verbis impersonalibus nonnunquam usurpantur : ut, Utendum est estate, cito pede prceterit oetas. Obliviscendum tibi injuriarum esse censeo. 116 LATIN GRAMMAK. Supines. 88. Supinum in um active significat, et sequitur ver- bum aut participium significans niotuni ad locum : ut, Spectatum veniunt, veniunt spectentur ut ipsce. Ovid. Millies sunt missi speculatum arcem. 89. Supinum in u passive significat, et sequitur nomina adjectiva: ut, Quod factu foedum est, idem est et dictu turpe. PAETICIPLES. 90. Participia regunt casus verborum a quibus derivantur : ut, Duplices tendens ad sidera palmas, Talia voce refert. — Virg. 91. Participiis passive vocis, praesertim quum exeunt in dus, dativus agentis aliquando additur : ut, Magnus civis obit, et formidatus OthSni. Juv. O ! mihi post nullos, Juli, memorande soddles. 92. Participia, pro adjectivis posita, genitivum exi- gunt: ut, Alieni appetens, sui profusus. Sail. 93. Exosus, perosus, pertcesus, activd significantia, accusativum exigunt : ut, Astronomus exosus ad unam mulieres. Immundam segnitiem perSsas. Pertaesus ignaviam suam. Suet. 94. Exosus et perosus, passive significantia, cum da- tivo leguntur : ut, SYNTAX. 117 Exosus Deo et Sanctis. Germdni Romanis perosi sunt. 95. Natus, prognatus, satus, cretus, creatus, ortus, editus, ablativum exigunt : ut, Bona bonis prognata parentibus. Sate sanguine divum ! Virg. Quo sanguine cretus. Virg. Venus orta mari mare prcestat eunti. Ovid. Terra editus. IMPERSONAL VERBS. 96. Impersonalia nominativum non habent : ut, Juvat ire sub umbras. 97. His impersonalibus subjicitur accusativus per- sonam cum genitivo rei, — poenitet, tcedet, miseret, mise- rescit, pudet, piget : ut, Si ad centesimum vixisset annum, senectutis eum suce non poeniteret. Cic. Miseret me tui. Te miserescat mei. Ter. 98. Verbum impersonate passivae vocis pro singulis personis utriusque numeri eleganter accipi potest : ut, Quid agitur ? Statur. Ter. TIME AND PLACE. I. Time. 99. Qum significant partem temporis, in ablativo fre- quentius ponuntur : ut, Nemo mortalium omnibus horis sapit. Plin. 118 LATIN GKAMMAR. 100. Quae durationem temporis significant, in accusa- tive fere ponuntur, rarius in ablativo : ut, Hie jam ter centum totos regnabitur annos. Virg. Quatuordecim annis exsilium toleravit. Tac. II. The Space of a Place. 101. Spatium loci in accusative) ponitur, interdum et in ablativo : ut, Jam mille passus processeram. Abest ab urbe quingentis millibus passuum, III. The Names of Places. 102. Omne verbum admittit genitivum oppidi no- minis, in quo fit actio, modo primas vel secundse decli- nationis et singularis numeri sit : ut, Quid Roinae faciam ? mentlri nescio. Juv. 103. Hi genitivi, humi, domi, militice, belli, propriorum sequuntur forinam : ut, Parvi sunt f oris arma, nisi est consilium domi. Cic. Una semper militias et domi fuimus. Ter. 104. Verum si oppidi nomen pluralis duntaxat nu- meri aut tertiae declinationis erit, in ablativo ponitur : ut, Colchus an Assyrius ; Thebis nutritus, an Argis Hor Romce Tibur amem, ventosus ; Tibiire Romam Hor. 105. Sic utimur ruri vel rure in ablativo : ut, Eure ego viventem, tu dicis in urbe beatum. Hor. 106. Verbis significantibus motum ad locum fere ad- ditur nomen oppidi in accusativo sine praepositione : ut, Carthagmem rediit. Cic. SYNTAX. 119 107. Ad hunc modum utimur domus et rus : ut, Ite domum, satiirce, venit Hesperus; ite, capellce. Virg. Ego rus ibo. 108. Verbis significantibus motum a loco fere additur nomen oppidi in ablativo sine praepositione : ut, Nisi ante Roma profectus esses, nunc earn relinqueres. 109. Ad eundem modum usurpantur domus et rus: ut, Nuper exiit domo. Ter. Metuo patrem, ne rure redierit. Ter. ADVERBS. 110. Qiledam adverbia loci, temporis, et quanti- tatis, item ergo pro causa, genitivum admittunt ; ut, Ubi gentium ? Nihil tunc temporis amplius quamfiere poteram. Satis eloquentise, sapientiae parum. Sail. Donari virtiitis ergo. Cic. 111. Qusedam casus admittunt nominum unde de- ducta sunt : ut, Sibi inutiliter vivit Proxime Hispaniam Mauri sunt Sail. Melius vel optime omnium. Cic. Amplius opinione morabdtur. Sail. 120 LATIN GRAMMAR. CONJUNCTIONS. 112. Conjunctiones copulative et disjunctive si- miles casus, modos, et tempora fere conjungunt : ut, Socrates docuit Xenopliontem et Platonem. Recto stat corpore, despicitque terras. Nee scribit, nee legit. 113. Aliquoties connectunt diversos casus et diversa tempora : ut, Emi librum centussi et pluris. Vixi Rome et Venetiis. Nisi me lactasses amantem et falsa spe produceres. PREPOSITIONS. 114. Pr^positio subaudita interdum facit ut ad- datur ablativus : ut, Habeo te loco parentis : i. e. in loco. 115. Prepositio in compositione eunaem nonnun- quani casum regit, quern et extra compositionem rege- bat: ut, Detriidunt naves scopiilo : i. e. trudunt de. Pretereo te insalutatum : i. e. eo preter. 116. Prepositiones, quum casum amittunt, fiunt ad- verbia: ut, Longo post tempore venit. Virg. SYNTAX. 121 INTERJECTIONS. 117. Inter jectiones non raro absolute, hoc est, sine casu ponuntur : ut, Spem gregis, ah ! sillce in nudd connixa reliquit. Virg. 118. En et ecce nominativo frequentius junguntur, accusativo rarius : ut, En Priamus. Virg. Ecce tibi status noste?\ Cic. En quatuor aras : Ecce duas tibi, Daphni; ^L\xoque altaria Phcebo. Virg. 119. O, exclamantis, nominativo^ accusativo, et voca- tivo, jungitur : ut, O festus dies hominis ! Ter. O fortunatos nimium agricolas ! Virg. O formose puer ! Virg. 120. Heu et proh nunc nominativo, nunc accusativo, junguntur; item proh vocativo ; ut, Heu pietas, heu prisca fides. Virg. Heu stirpem invisam. Virg. Proh Jupiter ! Ter. * Proh deum atqae hominum fidem ! Ter. Proh sancte Jupiter ! Cic. 121. Hei et vce dativo junguntur : ut, Hei mihi. Ovid. Va3 misero mihi ! Ter. 122 PEOSODY. Pkosodia est pars Grammatical quae quantitatem syllabarum docet. Time. Tempus est syllabae proferendae mensura. Syllaba brevis unius est temporis, longa vero duorum. Tempus breve curva linea notatur (" ) ; longum autem recta linea ( " ). Ex syllabis justo ordine dispositis fiunt pedes. Est autem pes duarum syllabarum pluriumve consti- tute ex certa Temporum observatione. Syllabae duae longae sponcleum efficiunt : ut, virtus. Syllabae duae breves, longa praecedente, dactylum effi- ciunt : ut, scribere. Porro pedes justo numero atque ordine concinnati versuni constituunt. Scanning. Scansio est legitima versus in singulos pedes com- mensuratio. Scansioni accidunt figurae, Synaloepha, Ecthlipsis, Synceresis, Diaeresis, et Ccesura. Synaloepha est elisio vocalis in fine dictionis, ante alteram in initio sequentis : ut, Sera ni\mis vif\ est\\ crastina\ viv 1 hddt\e.\ Mart, pro vita, vive* At heu et 6 nunquam intercipiuntur. PROSODY. 123 Ecthlipsis est quoties m cum sua vocali perimitur, proxima dictione a vocali exorsa : ut, Mdnstr* hor\rend\ in\form\ in\gens, cui\ lumen ad\ emptum. Virg. pro monstrum korrendum, informe. Synceresis est duarum syllabarum in unam contractio : lit, Sett len\to fue\rint al\vFarw\ vimine\ texta. Virg. quasi scrip turn esset ale aria. Diaresis est, ubi ex una syllaba dissecta fiunt duae : Debue\rantfu\sos\\ evolu\isse su\os. Ovid. evoluisse pro evolvisse. CcBsura est quaedam versus in duas partes distri- bute *: ut, Et jam | finis erat — quum \ Jupiter | cethere \ summo Despici\ens mdre\ vellvo\lum — ter\rasque jd\ce?ites. Virg. Hexameter or Heroic Verse. Versus Hexameter constat ex sex pedibus ; quint us locus dactylum postulat, sextus spondeurn ; reliqui pedes vel spondeos vel dactylos admittunt : ut, Tityre\ tu patu\la> recic\bans sub\ tegmine\ fdgl. Virg. Repent ur aliquando spondeus etiam in quinto loco : ut, Card De\um sobo\les mag\num Jovis\ mcre\mentum, Virg. Ultima cujuscunque versus syllaba habetur communis. * See Prosody, Part II. g a 124 latin grammar. Pentameter Verse. Versus Pentameter e duabus constat partibus ; qua- rum prior duos pedes, vel spondeos vel dactylos, com- prehendit, cum syllaba longa ; altera etiam duos pedes, omnlno dactylos, item cum syllaba longa : ut, Res est\ sollic?\ti^ plena ti\moris a\mor\\. Ovid. Epist. QUANTITY OF FORMER SYLLABLES. Position. Vocalis ante duas consonantes, aut duplicem in eadem dietione, ubique positione longa est : ut, ventus, axis, patrizo. Quod si consonans priorem dictionem claudat, se- quente item a consonante inchoante, vocalis praecedens etiam positione longa erit : ut, Major | sum quam | cut pos\sit for\tuna no\cere. Syllable Jor, sum, quam, et sit, positione longse sunt. At si prior dictio in vocalem brevem exeat, sequente a duabus consonantibus sc, sp, vel st incipiente, plerum- que producitur : ut, Occul\ta spoil | a, et plu\res de | pace tri | umphos. Juv. Syllaba ta positione longa est. Vocalis brevis ante mutam, sequente liquida, com- munis redditur : ut, patris, volucris. Longa vero non mutatur: ut, aratrum, simulacrum. Vowel before a Vowel. Vocalis ante alteram in eadem dictione ubique brevis est : ut ,I)eus, meus, tuus, plus. PROSODY. 125 Excipias genitivos in ius pronominum inflexionem habentes : ut, unius illius, &c, ubi i communis repe- ritur : in alterius yero semper est brevis, in alius sem- per longa. Solius, utrius, neutrius, vix leguntur penultima brevi. Excipiendi sunt etiam genltivi et dativi quintae decli- nationis, ubi e inter geminum i longa fit : ut, faciei : alioqui non : ut, rei 9 spei, Jidei. Fi etiam mjio longa est, nisi sequuntur e et r simul: ut, fierem, fieri. Omnia\jdm fl\unt fie\ri qude\ posse ne\gdbam. Dius primam syllabam habet longam, Diana com- munem. Ohe, interjectio, priorem syllabam communem habet. Vocalis ante alteram in substantivis Grascis subinde longa fit : ut, Pierides, Laerten ; et in possessivis Graecis : ut, JErie'ia nutrix ; Rhodopeius Orpheus. Diphthong. Omnis diphthongus apud Latinos longa est : ut, au- rum, neuter, musa> : nisi sequente vocali : ut, pr&ire, prceustus, prceamplus. Derivation. Derivativa eandem fere cum primitivis quantitatem sortiuntur : ut, amator, amicus, amabilis, prima brevi ab amo. Excipiuntur tamen pauca, quae & brevibus deducta primam syllabam producunt : ut, G 3 126 LATIN GRAMMAR. covin comis, a coma, fames, f omentum, a foveo, humanus, ab homo, jucundus, kjuvo, jumentum, kjuvo, junior, kjicvenis, later na, a lateo, lex legis, a lego, mobilis, a moveo, nonus, a novem, rex regis, regina, a rego, sedes, a sedeo, tegula, a tego, tragula, a trdho, vomer, a vomo, vox vocis, a voco. ^ Sunt et contra, quae, a longis deducta, primam corri- piunt : ut, arena, arista, arundo, ab areo, druspex, ab ar#, dicax, a g?zc#, rfi^'o, a ditis, disertus, a dissero, dux, duds, a geo vertitur is changed in si into si ; ut as, urgeo to urge ursi, mul- geo to milk mulsi, fulgeo to shine falsi. Ardeo to burn, torqueo to twist, mulceo to stroke, h^ereo to stick, suadeo to advise, item also rideo to laugh , et and maneo to remain, dant make prceteritum the preterperfect tense per si by si ; jubeo to command makes jussi. Sorbeo to sup up habet has sorbui, quoque also sorpsi ; luceo to shine habet has luxi, frigeo to be cold frixi, lugeo to bewail luxi, et and augeo to increase auxi. Fleo fles to weep dat makes flevi, pleo pies to fill plevi, neo to spin nevi. Antiquum the obsolete verb leo to anoint format forms sibi for itself compositis in its com- pounds levi. Veo fit is made vi: ut as, moveo to move movi, quoque also foveo to cherish fovi. Niveo to blink with the eyes habet has nivi et and nixi, que and vieo to bind vievi. Tertia the third conjugation formabit will form prseteritum the preterperfect tense ut as manifestum is shown hie here. Bo fit is made bi : ut as, lambo to lick Iambi. Exeipe except scribo to write scripsi, et and nubo to be married nupsi. Antiquum the old verb cumbo to lie down dat makes cubui. Co fit is made ci : ut as, vinco to overcome vici. Parco to spare vult will have peperci, vix seldom parsi ; dico to say dixi, quoque also duco to lead duxi. Do fit is made di : ut as, mando to eat mandi : sed but scindo to cut dat makes scidi, findo to cleave fidi, fundo to pour out fudi, que and tundo to pound tutiidi. Rudo to bray like an ass dat makes rudivi ; pendo to weigh, facit makes pependi, tendo to bend tetendi, cedo to yield cessi, cado to fall cecidi, caedo to cut or slay eecidi. Vado to go, rado to shave, lredo to hurt, ludo H 2 148 LATIN GKAMMAR. to play, divido to divide, trudo to thrust, claudo to shut, plaudo to clap hands, rodo to gnaw, ex do from do semper faciunt always make si. Go fit is made xi : ut as jungo to join junxi : sed hut r the letter r ante before go, vult will have si; ut as, spargo to sprinkle sparsi ; lego to read legi, et and ago to act facit makes egi. Tanox> to touch dat makes tetigi. pungo to prick reddit gives tibi to you pupiigi. Frango to break dat makes fregi, pango for paciscor to covenant yult will have pepigi ; etiam also pango to fasten pegi, sed but usus custom maluit had rather form panxi. Ho fit is made xi : ceu as, traho to draw traxi docet shows, et and veho to carry vexi. Lo fit is made ui : ceu as, colo to till dat makes colui ; ceu as molo to grind in a mill molui. Sallo to season with salt facit makes salli, sic so psallo to play on an instrument makes psalli. Velio to pluck dat tibi makes for you velli et and vulsi ; pello to drive away pepiili, fallo to deceive fefelli. Mo fit is made ui : ut as, vomo to vomit. Sed but emo to buy dat makes emi 5 premo to press dat makes pressi. No fit is made vi : ceu as, sino to suffer sivi. Excipe except temno to contemn tempsi ; sterno to strew dat makes stravi, sperno to despise sprevi, lino to smear over levi, et and, interdum sometimes livi ; jungas you may join quoque also cerno to decree crevi. Gigno to beget, pono to put, cano to sing, dant make geniii 5 posui^ cecini. Po fit is made psi : ut as scalpo to scratch scalpsi ; quoque also carpo to pluck carpsi. Excipias you ?nay except ruinpo to break rupi ; strepo to make a noise, quod which dat makes strepui. Quo fit is made qui : ut as linquo to leave natis in its derivatives liqui ; at but coquo to cook or dress meat coxi. Ro fit is made vi : ceu as sero, pro for planto to plant et and semino to sow, sevi, quod which signans signifying RULES FOR VERBS CONSTRUED. 149 ordmo to set in order dabit will make semper always me- lius rather serui. Verro to brush vult icill have verri, uro to burn vult will have ussi, gero to bear gessi, quaero to seek quaesivi, tero to rub or bruise trivi, curro'fo run cucurri. So format forms sivi, velut as arcesso to send for arcessivi. At but viso to go to see habet has visi, pinso to pound pinsuij quoque also pinsi. Sco fit is made vi, ut as pasco to feed cattle pavi, atque and quiesco to rest quievi. Sed but disco to learn formabit will form didici 5 posco to require poposci. To fit is made ti : ut as verto to turn verti ; sed but sisto to make to stand, dat makes stiti. Mitto to send dat makes misi, peto to ask vult will formare form petivi ; sterto to snore habet has stertiii, meto to mow messui. Exi fit is made ab from eeto : ut as flecto to bend flexi. Necto to knit dat makes nexui, habetque and also has nexi ; etiam also pecto to comb dat makes pexiii, habet it has quoque also pexi. Vo fit is made vi : ut as volvo to roll volvi : excipe except vivo to live vixi. Xo fit is made ui : ut as texo to weave, quod which habebit will have texui, monstrat shews. Cio fit is made ci : ut as facio to do feci ; quoque als^ jacio to cast jeci: antiquum the obsolete verb lacio to allure lexi, quoque also specio to behold spexi. Dio fit is made di : ut as fodio to dig fodi. Gio is made gi : ceu as fugio to flee fugi. Pio fit is made pi : ut as capio £0 fale cepi ; excipe except cupio to desire cuplvi, et and rapio to snatch rapui 3 sapio to savour or taste sapui, atque and sapivi. Rio fit is made ri : ut as pario to bring forth young peperi. Tio is made ssi, ut as composita the compounds kfrom quatio to shake reddent will form tibi for you : quassi, haud reperitur is not found usu in use. Denique finally uo, fit is made ui : ut as statuo to H 3 150 LATIN GRAMMAR. erect statui. Pluo to rain format forms pluvi, sive or plui ; sed but struo to build makes struxi, fluo to flow fluxi. Quarta the fourth conjugation dat is makes is in the present tense, ivi in the perfect : ut as scio scis to know scivi, monstrat tibi shews you. Veneo to be sold format forms venivij quoque also venio to come veni : raucio to be hoarse rausi, farcio to stuff farsi, sarcio to patch sarsi, sepio to hedge sepsi, sentio to perceive sensi, fulcio to prop falsi, item also haurio to draw hausi, sancio to es- tablish sanxi, vincio to bind vinxi. Amicire let amicio to clothe notetur be marked formans forming praeteritum the perfect tense per ui in ui. Salio, pro for salto to leap, gives salui, salii, atque and salivi. Simplex the simple verb et and compositivum its compound dat makes idem prasterituni the same preter- perfect tense : ut as docui / have taught, edocui i" have taught perfectly monstrat shews. Sed but syllaba the syllable, quam which simplex the simple verb semper al- ways geminat doubles, non geminatur is not doubled composto in the compound; attamen yet excipiantur let there be excepted, excurro to run out, cum with prae- curro to run before, atque and rite creata verbs rightly formed, a from do to give, disco to learn, sto to stand, posco to require. Compositum a verb compounded a of plico to fold cum with sub, vel or nomine a noun, ut as ista these, supplico to beseech, multiplico to multiply, gaudet will formare form plicavi ; applico to apply, complico to fold up, re- plico to fold back, or lay open, et and explico to unfold, formant make quoque also ui. Quamvis although simplex the simple verb oleo to smell of\\At will have o\\x\, tamen yet quodvis composi- tum every compound verb inde thereof formabit will form RULES FOR VERBS CONSTRUED. 151 melius rather olevi ; at but redolet to cast a scent sequi- tur follows formam the form simplicis of the simple verb, que and subolet to smell a little. Omnia composita all verbs compounded a of pungo to prick formabunt will form punxi ; unum one repungo to prick again vult will have repupiigi, interdumque and sometimes repunxi. Ex natis of verbs derived ab from emo, como to dress the hair vult will fingere form compsi, demo to take away dempsi, promo to draw forth prompsi, que and sumo to take sumpsi. Natum a compound a of do to give, quando when est it is inflexio tertia the third conjugation — ut as addo to add, credo to believe, edo to set forth, dedo to yield up, reddo to restore, perdo to lose, abdo to hide, vel or obdo to set against, condo to build, indo to put in, trado to de- liver, prodo to betray, vendo to sell — makes didi : at but unum one, abscondo to hide makes abscondi. Natum a compound a of sto stas to stand habebit will have stiti. Verba haec simplieia these simple verbs, si if compo- nantur they are compounded, mutant change vocalem pri- mam the first vowel prassentis of the present tense que and prseteriti of the preterperfect tense, in e into e ; damno to condemn, lacto to suckle, sacro to dedicate, fallo to de- ceive, arceo to drive away, tracto to handle, fatiscor to be weary, vetus the old word cando to burn, capto to catch at, jacto to throw, patior to suffer, que and gradior to step, partio to divide, carpo to crop, patro to achieve or finish, scando to climb, spargo to sprinkle ; que and pario to bring forth young ; cujus duo nata whose two com- pounds, comperit to know for certain et and reperit to find, dant make the preterperfect tense per i i n i ; sed but csetera the rest per ui in ui ; velut as haec these, aperire to open, operire to cover. Praeterea besides hsec duo composta let these two com- H 4 152 LATIN GRAMMAR. pounds a o/pasco pavi to feed cattle, compesco to pasture together, dispesco to drive from pasture, notentur be ob- served habere to make tantum only pescui ; at but depasco to feed down, servabit ivill keep sibi for itself usum the use simplicis of the simple verb. H^c these verbs, habeo to have, lateo to lie hid, salio to leap, statuo to erect, cado to fall, lsedo to hurt, et and tango to touch, atque and cano to sing, sic so qusero to seek, casdo cecidi to cut or slay, sic so egeo to want, teneo to hold, taceo to be silent, sapio to savour, que and rapio to snatch, si if componantur they are compounded, mutant change vocalem primarn the first vowel in i into i ; ut as, rapio to snatch rapui, eripio to snatch away from eripui. Natum a compound a of cano to sing dat makes prseteri- tum the preterperfect tense per ui in ui ; ceu as, concmo to sing in concert concinui. Sic so displiceo to dis- please a from placeo to please : sed but haec duo these two compounds, complaceo to please cum with perplaceo to please very much, bene servant always keep usum the usage simplicis of the simple verb. Composita the compounds a of verbis the verbs calco to tread, salto to leap or dance, mutant change a per u, a into u ; conculco to tread upon, inculco to tread in, re- sulto to rebound, demonstrant shew id that tibi to you. Composita the compounds a of claudo to shut, quatio to shake, lavo to wash, rejiciunt a cast away a : occludo to shut against, excludo to shut out, a from claudo to shut, docet teaches id that ; que and percutio to strike, excutio to strike out, a from quatio to shake ; a from lavo to wash, nata the compounds proluo to wash out, diluo to wash away. Si if componas you compound hsec these verbs, ago to act, emo to take, sedeo to sit, rego to ride, frango to break, et and capio to take, jacio to cast, lacio to allure, specio to behold, premo to press, pango to fasten, mutant RULES FOR VERBS CONSTRUED. 153 they change sibi for themselves vocalem primam the first vowel praesentis of the 'present tense in i into i, nunquam never praeteriti of the perfect tense : ceu as of frango to break, refringo to break open makes refregi ; incipio to begin incepi, a of capio to take. Sed but pauca let a few notentur be marked ; namque for perago to finish sequi- tur follows suuni simplex its simple verb, que and satago to be busy about ; atque and ab from ago to act, dego to live dat makes degi, cogo to bring together coegi; sic so a from rego to rule, pergo to go forward makes perrexi ; quoque also surgo to rise vult will have surrexi ; media syllaba the middle syllable praesentis of the present tense adempta being taken away. A from lacio, elicio to entice forth elicui is the perfect tense : caetera the rest dant form lexi. Ista quatuor composita these four compound verbs a o/*pango to fix or fasten retinent a keep a; depango to fix in the ground, oppango to fasten against, circumpango to fasten about, atque and repango to fasten again. Facio to do variat changes nil nothing, nisi unless prae- posito praeeunte a preposition goes before : olfacio to smell out docet teaches id that, cum with calfacio to make hot, que and inficio to infect. Nata the compounds a of lego to read, re, per, pra?, sub, trans, ad, praeeunte going before, servant keep vo- calem the vowel praesentis of the present tense ; caetera the rest mutant change it in i into i; de quibus of which haec these tantum only, intelligo to understand, diligo to love, negligo to neglect, faciunt make praeteritum their preterperfect tense lexi ; reliqua omnia all the rest legi. Nunc now discas you may learn formare to form su- pinum the supine ex praeterito jfrom the perfect tense. Bi sumit takes sibi to itself turn : namque for sic so bibi to drink fit is made bibitum. 154 LATIN GRAMMAR. Ci fit is made ctum : ut as vici to conquer victum testatur shews, et and ici to strike dans making ictum, feci to do factum, quoque also jeci to cast j actum. Sed but parco peperci to spare vult will have sibi for itself parsum, item also parcitum. Di fit is made sum : ut as vidi to see visum. Quaa- dam some geminant s double s ; ut as pandi to open pas- sum, sedi to sit sessum, adde add scidi to cut quod which dat makes scissum, atque and fidi to cleave fissum, quo- que also fodi to dig fossum. Syllaba the {first) syllable praeteriti of the perfect tense saepe geminatur is often doubled, autem but non not supi- nis in the supines : tetendi to bend format forms tensum que and tentum, tutudi to bruise or pound tunsum, cecidi to fall casum, atque and cecidi to cut or slay csesum ; junge join dedi to give habens having datum, que and momordi to bite morsum. Gi fit is made ctum : ut as legi to read lectum ; pegi to fasten que and pepigi to covenant dant make pactum, fregi to break fractum, quoque also tetigi to touch tac- tum, egi to act actum, pupiigi to prick punctum ; fugi to flee dat makes fugitum. Li fit is made sum : ut as pepuli to drive away pul- sum, cui to which junge join fefelli to deceive dans mak- ing falsum, velli to pluck vulsum. At but tuli to bear habet has sibi for itself latum. Mi, ni, pi, qui, formant form turn, velut as manifes- tum is manifest hie here : emi to buy emptum, veni to come ventum, cecini a from cano to sing cantum, et and cepi to take captum, quoque also coepi to begin antiquis with the ancients coeptum ; et and rupi to break makes ruptum ; quoque also liqui to leave in natis in its com- pounds lictum. Ei fit is made sum : ut as verri to brush versum. Ex- cipe except peperi to bring forth young partum. Si fit is made sum : ut as visi to go to see visum. Tamen but misi to send formabit will form missum, s geminato s being doubled. Excipe except fulsi to prop RULES FOR VERBS CONSTRUED. 155 fultum, hausi to draw haustum, sarsi to patch sartum, quoque also farsi to stuff fartum, ussi to burn ustum, gessi to bear gestum ; quoque also torsi to twist postulat requires tortum ; sic so indulsi to indulge quserit seeks sibi for itself indultum. Psi, fit is made ptum : ut as scripsi to write scriptum : quoque also sculpsi to engrave sculptum. Ti, fit is made turn: namque/or steti, a from sto to stand, que and stiti, a from sisto to make to stand, ambo both rite correctly dant make statum. Tamen yet ex- cipe except verti to turn versum. Vi, fit is made turn : ut as flavi to blow flatum : ex- cipe except pavi to feed cattle pastum. Lavi to wash dat makes lotum, interdum sometimes lautum, atque and la- vatum ; potavi to drink facit makes potum, interdum sometimes et also potatum ; sed but favi to favour makes fautum, cavi to beware cautum. A from sero sevi to sow rite formes you may form correctly satum, livi que and, levi to besmear dant make litum ; solvi a from solvo to loosen solutum, volvi a from volvo to roll volutum ; sin- gultivi to sob vult will have singultum, veneo venis venivi to be sold venum, sepelivi to bury rite correctly sepultum. Quod a verb that dat makes m, dat makes itum ; ut as domui to tame domitum. Excipe except quodvis ver- bum every verb in uo, quia because semper formabit it will always make ui in utum, ui into utum : ut as exiii to put off exiitum : deme except rui, a from ruo to rush, dans making ruitum. Secui to cut vult will have sectum, necui to slay nectum, que and fricui to rub frictum, item also miscui to mingle mistum, et and amicui to clothe dat makes amictum ; torrui to roast habet has tostum, do- cui to teach doctum, que and tenui to hold tentum, eon- sului to consult consultum, alui to feed altum, que and alitum ; sic so salui to leap saltum, colui to till quoque also occului to hide, cultum ; pinsui to pound or grind habet has pinsum et and pistum ; rapui to snatch vult will have sibi /or itself raptum, serui to set in order ser- n 6 156 X^ATIN GBAMMAR. turn, sic so quoque also texui to weave habet has tex- tum. Censui to judge habet has eensum, sic so messui to mow habet has quoque also messum ; item also nexui to fasten nexum, sic so pexui to comb habebit will have pexum. Xi fit is made ctuni : ut as vinxi to bind vinctum. Quinque jive abjiciunt n cast away n ; ut as finxi to form or fashion fictum, minxi to make water mictuin, ad- jice add pinxi to paint dans giving pictum, strinxi to bind fast strictum, quoque also rinxi tb grin rictum. Sancio sanxi to establish formabit will form sancitum et and sanctum. Flexi to bend, plexi to twist, fixi to fasten, dant make xum ; et and fluo to flow fluxum. Quodqtie compositum supinum every compound su- pine formatur is formed ut as simplex the simple supine, quanrvis although eadem syllaba the same syllable non stet does not continue semper always utrique to them both. Composita the compounds a of tunsum to pound, n dempta the letter n being taken away, make tusum; a of rui- tum to rush, i media the middle letter i dempta being taken away, fit is made rutum ; et and quoque also a of saltum to leap sultum. Composta the compounds a of sero (to sow), quando when format it forms saturm dant make situm. Hsec these supines, cap turn to take, factum to do, j ac- tum to cast, raptum to snatch, mutant a per e change a into e ; et and cantum to sing, partum to bring forth young, sparsum to scatter, quoque also carptum to crop, fartum to stuff. Verbum the verb edo to eat compositum being com- pounded non facit does not make estum, sed but esum ; unum one duntaxat only, comedo to eat up, formabit will form utrumque both. A. from nosco to know duo these two compounds tantum only, cognitum to know et and agnitum to acknowledge, RULES FOR VERBS CONSTRUED. 157 habentur are found; caetera the rest dant make notum : noscitura, jam now est is nullo in usu not in use. Verba in or verhs ending in or admittunt take pras- teritum their perfect tense ex posteriore supino from the latter supine, u verso u being turned per us into us, et and sum, vel or fui, consociato being added ; ut as a of lectu to be read lectus sum, vel or fui, I have been read. At but horum of these verbs nunc sometimes est there is deponens a deponent, nunc sometimes est there is commune a common one notandum to be noted. Labor to glide dat makes lapsus ; patior to suffer dat makes passu s ; at but ejus natum its compound perpetior to endure perpessus ; fateor to own dat makes fassus, sed but confiteor to confess confessus ; gradior to step vult will have gressus, sic so digredior to step aside digressus ; jungas you may join quoque also defetiscor to be wearied out defessus sum, metior to measure mensus, et and utor to use usus. Ordior to begin raro seldom makes orditus, sed but sgepius very often orsus. Nitor to strive nisus, vel or nixus sum, et and ulciscor to avenge ultus, simul also irascor to be angry iratus, atque and reor to suppose ratus sum, obli- viscor to forget vult will have oblitus sum, fruor to enjoy optat chooses fructus vel or fruitus ; junge add mise- reri to have pity misertus atque and miseritus. Anti- quum the obsolete verb tuor to defend, et and tueor to defend make tuitus sum. Adde add locutus a from loquor to speak, et and adde add secutus a from sequor to follow. Experior to try facit makes expertus sum ; sed but opperior to wait for legitur is read reddens forming oppertus et and opperitus ; paciscor to make a bargain gaudet will formare form pactus sum, nanciscor to get nactus, apiscor to obtain, quod which est is vetus verbum an obsolete verb, aptus sum, unde from whence adipiscor to get adeptus. 158 LATIN GRAMMAR, Junge add queror to complain questus, junge add proficiscor to set out profectus, expergiscor to awaken experrectus sum ; et and quoque also hasc these, com- miniscor to devise commentus, nascor to be horn natus, que and morior to die mortuus, atque and orior to rise, quod which facit makes praeteritum its preterperfect tense ortus. ELec these verbs habent have prseteritum a perfect tense active of the active et and passivse vocis of the passive form : nubo to be married nupsi, que and nupta sum, placeo to please dat makes placui, et and placitus ; et and licet it is lawful makes licuit, licitum ; adde add libet it pleases, quod which makes libiiit, libitum ; atque and pudet it shames puduit, que and puditum : ta^det it wearies makes tsediiit, at but ssspius more frequently per- taesurn, atque and junge join piget it grieves quod which tibi format forms for you piguit, que and pigitum. Neutro-PASSIVUM a neuter-passive verb format tibi forms for you praeteritum its perfect tense sic thus ; gau- deo to be glad gavisus sum, fido to trust fisus, et and audeo to dare ausus sum, fio to be made factus, soleo to be wont solitus sum. Qusedam verba some verbs accipiunt take praeteritum their perfect tense aliunde from another source. Incep- tivum a verb inceptive in sco, stans standing pro prima- rio for its primitive, adoptat takes praeteritum the perfect tense ejus of it : tepesco to begin to be warm vult will for- maxeform tepui. Ferveo to be hot dat makes ferbui, et and furo to rage insanivi ; tollo to lift up habet has sustiili ; ferio to strike postulat requires percussi ; ferior to be struck, ictus sum ; vescor to eat, vult will have edi ; meio to RULES FOR VERBS CONSTRUED. 159 make water minxi ; sisto to stand fit is made steti ; sum to be habet has fui; fero to bear rite by custom dat makes tuli. Meditativa omnia all meditatives fugiunt want prceteri- tum the perfect tense, praeter except parturio to be in labour, esurio to be hungry: atque and inceptiva inceptives, ut as puerasco to grow toward childhood ; et and passiva verbs passive quibus activa whose actives caruere were without supinis supines, ut as timeor to be feared, poscor to be required. Etiam also fugiunt these want it : — hisco to gape, fatisco to chink ; adde add renideo to glitter, calveo to be bald, caneo to be grey, flaveo to be yellow, glisco to grow up, humeo to be damp, fceteo to stink, liveo to be black and blue, moereo to be sad, polleo to be powerful, vergo to bend, squaleo to be dirty ; sic so aveo to desire fugit wants a perfect, immineo to overhang, que and clueo to be called; ambigo to doubt ; sic so hebeo to be dull, scateo to gush forth, yegeo to be lively, que and cieo to rouse : sic so fugiunt these want the perfect : — salio meaning sale condio to season with salt, frendeo, frendo to gnash the teeth. Queis and to these jungas you may add, etiam also, medeor to heal, liquor to be melted, remi- niscor to remember. Qusecunque whatever verbs carent are without prsete- rito a perfect tense sunt are cassa without supinis supines. Sed but frendo to gnash the teeth makes fressum ; salio to salt salsum, atque and salitum. Hasc verba these verbs raro seldom aut or nunquma never retinebunt will have supinum a supine : lambo to lick, mico to glitter, sapio to taste, rudo to bray like an ass, fulgeo to glitter, turgeo to swell, sterto to snore, dis- pesco to drive from pasture, posco to require, compesco to restrain, sternuo to sneeze, disco to learn, dego to live, ango to throttle, scabo to scratch, item likewise preecello to surpass, antecello to surpass, excello to surpass, que 160 LATIN GRAMMAR. and satago to be busy about, psallo to -play on an instru- ment, volo to be witting, nolo to be unwilling, roalo to be more willing, tremo to tremble, strideo strido to creak, incesso to attack, ningo to snow, conniveo to wink, fer- veo fervo to be hot: coniposita compounds a ofmio to nod: at as, renuo to refuse: a of cado to fall; ut as accido to fall upon ; prater except occido to fall down, quod which facit makes oceasurm que and recido to fall back recasum, queis to which etiam also conjun- gas you may join incido to fall into fornians forming in- easuin : respuo to refuse, item likewise linquo to leave, furo to be mad, sic so, luo to wash, frigeo to be cold, pos- sum to be able, et and, paveo to dread, timeo to fear : sic so luceo to shine; et and arceo to drive away, cujus composita whose compounds habent have ercitum ; sic so ingruo to rush upon, congruo to accord; et and qusecunque neutra verba whatever neuter verbs secundse of the second conjugation formantur are formed in ui in ui: excipias j/<9& may except, oleo to smell of doleo to be in pain, placeo to please, que and taceo to be silent, pareo to obey, item also careo to be without, noceo to hurt, jaceo to lie down, que and lateo to lie hid, et also valeo to be strong, caleo to be hot; namque for hsec these verbs gaudent supino have the supine. SYNTAX CONSTRUED. 161 SYNTAX CONSTRUED. 1. Verbum personale a verb personal concordat agrees cum nominativo with its nominative case numero in number et and persona in person : ut as, Via the way ad bonos mores to good manners est is nunquam never sera too late. 2. Nominativus the nominative case pronominum of pronouns plerumque/br the most -part omittitur is omitted: ut as, Fertur he is reported designasse to have committed atrocia flagitia horrid crimes : ille he omittitur is omitted. Vero but quum when exprimitur it is expressed deno- tat it signifies distinctionem distinction aut or emphasin emphasis : ut as, Vos you damnastis have condemned me : id est that is, vos you, et and non alii not others. Tu you es are patronus our patron, tu you parens our father, si if tu deseris you forsake us, periimus we are undone : id est that is, praecipue especially, et and prse aliis be- yond others tu you are, Sfc. 3. Verbum infinitum a verb of the infinitive mood aut or oratio a number of words est is aliquando sometimes nominativus the nominative case verbo to a verb; ut as, Mentiri to lie non est is not meum my custom. Parum animi little spirit putabatur was supposed esse to be in eo in him. 4. Verbum a verb positum placed inter between duos nominativos two nominative cases diversorum nu- merorum of different numbers potest may concordare agree cum with alterutro either of them ; ut as, Irse the quarrels amantium of lovers est is integratio the re- 162 LATIN GRAMMAR. newal amoris of love. Pectus her breast quoque also fiunt becomes robora oak. 5. Nomen a noun multitudinis of multitude singulare of the singular number quandoque sometimes jungitur is joined verbo plurali to a plural verb : ut as, Pars part {of them) abiere are gone away. Uterque both delu- duntur are deceived dolis with tricks. 6. Ad JECTIVA adjectives, participia participles, et and pronomina pronouns concordant agree cum with sub- stantivis their substantives genere in gender, numero in number, et and casu in case : ut as, Para avis an un- common bird in terris in the world, que and simillima very like nigro cygno a black sican. 7. Aliquando sometimes oratio a sentence supplet supplies locum the place substantivi of a substantive, ad- jectivo the adjective posito being put in neutro genere in the neuter gender : ut as, Absolvitur he is acquitted, com- perto it having been ascertained crimina that the charges esse ficta were invented. 8. Adjectivum an adjective plurale of the plural number, interdum sometimes diverso genere of a different gender, aliquando conjungitur is occasionally joined with nomini a noun multitudinis of multitude singulari of the singular number ; ut as, Hie here manus a band passi having suffered vulnera wounds pugnando by fighting ob patriam in behalf of {their) fatherland. 9. Adjectiva adjectives posita when put sine substan- tivis without substantives habentur are accounted pro substantias as substantives : ut as, Boni the good dili- gunt love bonos the good. Puer a boy tulit is wont to bear que and fecit do multa many things. 10. RELATIVUM a relative concordat agrees cum with antecedente its antecedent genere in gender, numero SYNTAX CONSTRUED. 163 number, et and persona person : ut as, Quis who est is vir bonus a good man ? Qui he who servat keeps con- sulta the decrees patrum of the senators ; qui he who keeps leges the laws juraque and ordinances. 11. Aliquando sometimes oratio a sentence ponitur is put pro for antecedente the antecedent: ut as, Veni 1" came ad earn to her in tempore in season, quod which est is rerum omnium primum the first of all matters. 12. Relativum a relative collocatum placed inter be- tween duo substantiva two substantives diversorum gene- rum of different genders vel or numerorum numbers interdum sometimes concordat agrees cum with pos- teriore the latter substantive : ut as, Homines men tu- entur regard ilium globum that globe, quae which dicitur is called terra the earth. 13. Aliquando sometimes relativum a relative con- cordat agrees cum with primitivo the primitive pronoun, quod which subauditur is understood in possessivo in the possessive pronoun : ut as, Omnes all men laudare ex- tolled meas fortunas my fortune, qui haberem who had gnatum a son praedltum endued tali ingenio with such a disposition. 14. Quum when duo substantiva two substantives di- verse significationis of a different signification concur- runt meet together, posterius the latter ponitur is put in genitivo in the genitive case: ut as, Amor the love nummi of money crescit increases quantum as much as ipsa pecunia the money itself crescit increases. 15- Posterius substantivum the latter substantive re- peritur is found in dativo in the dative case, quum when relatio a reference ad aliquid to something denotatur is signified ; ut as, Est he is pater the father urbi of the city, que and maritus the husband urbi of the city. 16. Adjectivum an adjective in neutro genere of the neuter gender positum put sine substantivo without a sub- stantive postulat requires aliquando sometimes genitivum 164 LATIN GRAMMAR. a genitive case : ut as, Pauiulum pecuniae a very little money. 17. Interdum sometimes genitivus a genitive case po- nitur tantum is set alone, priore substantivo the former substantive subaudito being understood per ellipsin by the figure ellipsis : ut as, Ubi when veneris you are come ad Dianae to Diana's, ito go ad dextram to the right hand. Templum the word templum " temple " subauditur is understood. 18. Duo substantiva two substantives ejusdem rei re- specting the same thing ponuntur are put in eodem casu in the same case ; ut as, Opes riches, irritamenta ma- lorum the incentives to evils effodiuntur are dug out {of the eartK). 1 9. Qualitas the quality rei of a thing ponitur is put in ablativo in the ablative case, etiam also genitivo the genitive : ut as, Vir a man nulla fide of no integrity. Puer a boy ingenui vultus of an ingenuous countenance, que and ingenui pudoris ingenuous modesty. 20. Opus need et and usus need exigunt require abla- tivuni an ablative case : ut as, Opus est nobis we have need auctoritate tua of your authority. Non accepit he did not receive ab iis from them pecuniam money, qua of which nihil sibi esset there was not to him usus need. 21. Adjectiva plurima very many adjectives quae which denotant signify affectionem a feeling or passion animi of the mind exigunt require genitivum a genitive case: ut as, Natura the nature hominum of men est is avida eager for novitatis novelty. Mens a mind prsescia foreknowing futuri what is to come. Esto be thou memor mindful brevis aevi of a short life. Immemor unmindful beneficii of a kindness. Imperitus rerum unskilled in matters. Rudis belli ignorant of tear. Timidus deorum fearing the gods. Impavidus sui fearless of himself 22. Adjectiva adjectives, in ax ending in ax, verbalia SYNTAX CONSTRUED. 165 derived from verbs exigunt require genitivum a genitive case : ut as, Audax bold ingenii of disposition. Tempus time edax consuming rerum things. 23. Partitiva nouns partitive, numeralia nouns of num- ber, interrogativa nouns that ask a question, comparativa nouns comparative et and superlativa superlative, et and quaedam some posita put partitive partitively, exigunt re- quire genitivum pluralem a genitive case plural : ut as, Accipe take utrum horum which of these two mavis you had rather. Sum I am paulo infirmior somewhat more weak ; unus one multorum of the many. Quis what one mortalium of human beings ? Dextra the right est is for- tior the stronger manuum of the hands. Medius the middle est is longissimus the longest digitorum of the fingers. Sancte deorum O sacred one of the deities ! sequimur we follow te you. 24. Adjectiva adjectives qua3 which denotant signify relationem a reference ad rem quampiam to any thing exigunt require dativum a dative case : ut as, Fortuna fortune benigna kind nunc now mihi to me, nunc now alii to another. Si if facis you bring it about ut that sit he be idoneus serviceable patriae to his country, utilis use- ful agris to the lands. Turba a multitude gravis trouble- some paci to peace, que and inimica averse placida3 quieti to gentle ease. Similis like patri his father. J ucundus pleasant amicis to his friends. 25. Quasdam some adjectives, quaa which significant signify similitudinem likeness, junguntur are joined etiam also genitivo to a genitive case ; ut as, Quern he whom metuis you fear erat was par like hujus this man. Es you are similis like dommi your master. 26. Communis common, alienus strange, immunis free from, junguntur are joined genitivo to a genitive case, et and dativo to a dative : ut as, Est it is commune common animantium omnium to all living creatures. Mors death communis est is common omnibus to all. Non aliena not unfit for consilii the design. Alienus ambitioni averse to ambition. Dabitur it shall be granted vobis to 166 LATIN GRAMMAR. you esse to be immunibus free from hujus mali this ca- lamity. Caprificus the wild fig-tree est is immxmis free omnibus to all. 27. Verbalia in bilis adjectives in bilis derived from verbs accepta taken passive passively, postulant require dativum a dative case : ut as, Lucus iners a sluggish grove penetrabilis penetrable nulli astro by no star. 28. Mensura the measure magnitudinis of quantity subjieitur is put after adjectivis adjectives in accusativo in the accusative case, ablativo the ablative, et and geni- tivo the genitive case : ut as, Turris a tower alta high centum pedes an hwidred feet Fons a fountain latus wide pedibus tribus three feet Axes, a floor lata broad pedum denum ten feet 29. Accusativus an accusative case aliquando some- times subjieitur is put after adjectivis adjectives et and participiis participles, more Graeco according to the Greek custom : ut as, Similis like deo to a god os as to his coun- tenance que and humeros his shoulders. Demissus cast down vultum as to his look. Nee and not mitior more mild animum in mind anguibus than snakes. 30. Adjectiva adjectives, quse which pertinent re- late ad copiam to plenty ve or egestatem want, exigunt require interdum sometimes ablativum an ablative, inter- dum sometimes genitivum a genitive case : ut as, Longa senectus a long old age plena is full malis of ills. Dives rich equum in horses, dives rich pictai vestis in an em- broidered garment et and auri gold. Amor love est is foecundissimus very fruitful et both melle of honey et and felle gall. Vis strength expers devoid consilii of ivisdom ruit falls to ruin mole sua by its own weight 31. Adjectiva adjectives et and substantiva substan- tives regunt govern ablativum an ablative case signifi- cantem signifying causam the cause, vel or formam the form, vel or modum the manner rei of a thing : ut as, SYNTAX CONSTRUED. 167 Pallidus pale ira with anger. Grammaticus a gramma- rian nomine in name, re in reality barbanis a barbarian, Caesar Casar, Trojanus a Trojan origine by descent. 32. Dignus worthy, indignus unworthy, prasditus en- dued with, captus deprived of, contentus content, extorris banished, fretus relying upon, liber free, cum icith adjec- tivis adjectives significantibus signifying pretium price 9 exigunt require ablativum an ablative case : ut as, Es you are dignus zvorthy odio of hatred. Qui haberem 1 who had gnatum a son praeditum endued with tali ingenio such a disposition. Talpae the moles capti deprived of oculis eyes fodere have dug cubilia their holes. Abi go your way contentus contented sorte tua with your lot. Ex- torris banished patria from country et and domo home. Fretus relying on conscientia the consciousness officii mei of my duty. Animus a mind liber free terrore from fear. Venale to be purchased gemmis with jewels. 33. Dignus icorthy, indignus unworthy, extorris ba- nished et and liber free, admittunt admit aliquando some- times genitivum a genitive case : ut as, Carmina verses digna worthy of dese a goddess. Indignus unworthy avo- rum of ancestors. Extorris banished regni the kingdom. Liber free laborum/rom toils. 34. Comparativa comparatives admittunt receive abla- tivum an ablative case ejus rei of that thing vel or per- sons person cui with which alicjuid any thing comparatur is compared: ut as, Argentum silver est is vilius of less value auro than gold, aurum gold virtutibus than virtues. 35. Ablativi quidam certain ablative cases, qui which significant signify mensuram the measure excessus of exceeding, adduntur are put after comparativis compara- tives et and superlativis superlatives ; ut, as, Tanto by so much pessimus poeta the worst poet omnium of all, quanto by hoio much tu you are optimus patronus the lest patron omnium of all. Quo by how much plus the more habent they have, eo by so much plus the more cupiunt they desire. 168 LATIN GRAMMAR. 36. Mei of me, tui of thee or you, sui of himself , nos- tri of us, vestri of you, genitivi the genitive cases primi- tivorum of the primitives, ponuntur are used quum when persona a person significatur is signified : ut as, LaDguet she languishes desiderio with regret tui of you. Que and pars part tui of you lateat may lie clausa shut up corpore meo in my body. Imago nostri the picture of us, i. e. of our person, 37. Meus mine, tuus thine, suus his, noster our, vester your, ponuntur are used quum when actio an action, vel or possessio the possession rei of a thing signi- ficatur is signified: ut as, Favet he favours desiderio tuo your desire. Imago nostra our picture : id est that is, quam which nos we possidemus possess. 38. Verba substantiva verbs substantive ; ut as, sum I am, forem I might be, fio / am made, exsisto I am; verba passiva verbs passive vocandi of calling ; ut as, nominor I am named, appellor I am called, dicor I am said, vocor I am called, nunciipor / am named ; et and similia the like iis to them : ut as, videor I seem, habeor I am accounted, existimor I am thought ; habent have nominativum a nominative case utrinque on both sides : ut as, Deus God est is summum bonum the chief good. Perpusilli very little persons vocantur are called nani dwarfs. Fides faith habetur is accounted fundamentum the foundation religionis nostras of our religion. Infinitum the infinitive mood liorum of these habet has eosdem casus the same cases utrinque on both sides : ut as, Cato Cato malebat was more desirous esse to be quum than videri to seem bonus good. Natura Nature declit has given omnibus to all esse to be beatis happy. 39. Item likewise omnia verba all verbs fere in a manner admittunt admit post se after them adjectivum an adjective, quod which concordat agrees cum with no- minativo the nominative case verbi of the verb casu in case, genere gender, et and numero number ; ut as, Nihil SYNTAX CONSTRUED. 169 Nothing est is amabilius more lovely virtute than virtue. Pietas piety jacet lies victa conquered. 40. Sum, postulat requires genitivum a genitive case quoties as often as denotat it signifies possessionem pos- session, officium duty, aut or signum a sign : ut as, Pecus the cattle est is Meliboei Melibozutfs. Est it is the duty adolescentis of a young man revereri to reverence majores natu his elders. Est it is the mark fortis of a brave man non perturbari not to be agitated rebus as- peris by adverse circumstances. 41. Verba verbs accusandi of accusing, damnandi of condemning, absolvendi of acquitting, monendi of warn- ing, et and similia the like, postulant require genitivum a genitive case, qui which significat signifies crimen the charge : ut as, Oportet it is fit, eum that he, qui who accusat accuses alterum another probri of dishonesty, in- tueri should look into se ipsum himself Condemnat he condemns generum suum his son-in-law sceleris of wick- edness. Judex the judge absolvit acquitted eum him in- juriarum of the injuries. Admoneto ilium remind him pristmae fortune of his former condition. 42. Satago to be busy about a thing, misereor et and miseresco to pity, postulant require genitivum a genitive case : ut as, Is he satagit is busy about rerum suarum his own business. Oro I pray you miserere pity laborum tantorum so great distresses ; miserere pity animse a soul ferentis suffering non digna things undeserved. Et and miseresce pity generis tui your family. 43. Eeminiscor to remember, obliviscor to forget, me- mini to remember, recordor to call to mind, admittunt admit genitivum a genitive case, aut or accusativum an accusative : ut as, Reminiscitur he remembers datas fidei his promise given. Soles you are accustomed oblivisci to forget nihil nothing nisi except injurias injuries. Est it is proprium the property stultitiae of folly cernere to dis- cern aliorum vitia other men's faults, oblivisci to forget I 170 LATIN GRAMMAR. suorum its own. Faciam i" will give you cause ut memi- neris to remember hujus loci this place semper always. Juvabit it will be a pleasure olim hereafter meoiinisse to remember hsec these things* Recordor / call to mind hujus meriti this favour in me towards me. Si if re- corder / recollect rite well audita the things heard. 44. Potior to gain or enjoy jungitur is joined aut either genitivo to a genitive case, aut or ablativo to an ablative : ut as, Romani the Romans potiti sunt gained possession of signorum the standards et and armorum the arms. Troes the Trojans egressi having disembarked potiuntur enjoy optata arena the wished-for shore. 45. Omnia verba all verbs regunt govern dativum a dative case qui which denotat denotes relationem refer- ence: ut as, Nati sumus we are born non solum nobis not for ourselves alone. 46. Verba verbs significantia signifying commodum advantage, aut or incommodum disadvantage, regunt govern dativum a dative case : ut as, Non potes you are unable commodare to serve nee or incommodare disserve mihi me. 47. Ex his of these, juvo to help, lsedo to hurt, delecto to delight, et and alia qusedam some other verbs, exigunt inquire accusativum an accusative case; ut as, Quies rest plurimum juvat very much helps fessum a wearied man. 48. Verba verbs comparandi of comparing regunt go- vern dativum a dative case : ut as, Sic thus solebam I was used componere to compare magna great things parvis to small. 49. Verba verbs dandi of giving et and reddendi of giving bach regunt govern dativum a dative case : ut as, Fortuna fortune dat gives nimis too much multis to many, satis enough nulli to nobody. Est he is ingratus ungrateful, qui who non reponit does not return gratiam thanks bene merenti to one deserving well {of him.) SYNTAX CONSTRUED. 171 50. Verba verbs promittendi of promising, ac and sol- vendi of paying, regunt govern dativum a dative case : ut as, Quae which things promitto I promise tibi to you, ac and recipio engage, esse observaturum that I will ob- serve sanctissime most religiously. Numeravit he paid mihi me aes alienum the debt. 5h Verba verbs imperandi of commanding, et and nuntiandi of telling, regunt govern dativum a dative case : ut as, Pecunia money collecta gathered together imperat commands aut or servit serves cuique every man. Saepe often videto take care quid dicas what you say de quoque viro of each man, et and cui to whom {you say it). 52. Excipe except rego to rule et and guberno to govern, qua3 which verbs habent have accusativum an accusative case ; tempero to rule, et and moderor to rule, qua3 which nunc sometimes habent have dativum a dative case, nunc sometimes accusativum an accusative case : ut as, Luna the moon regit rules menses the months. Deus ipse God himself gubernat governs orb em the world. Ipse he temperat sibi has the command of himself Sol the sun temperat orders omnia all things luce by (its) light Hie this man moderatur manages equos his horses, qui who non moderabitur will not govern ine his passion. 53. Verba verbs fidendi of trusting et and diffidendi of mistrusting, regunt govern dativum a dative case : ut as, Decet it is fit committere to commit nil nothing nisi but lene what is soft vacuis venis to empty veins. Videor I seem diffidere to mistrust prudential tuae your prudence. 54. Verba verbs obsequendi of complying with, et and repugnandi of opposing, regunt govern dativum a dative case: ut as, Pius filius a dutiful son semper always obtemperat obeys patri his father. Fortuna fortune repugnat opposes ignavis precibus the prayers of the slothful. 55. Verba verbs minandi of threatening, et and iras- cendi of being angry, regunt govern dativum a dative case: ut as, Minitatus est he threatened mortem death i 2 172 LATIN GRAMMAR. utrique to each one. Nihil est there is no reason quod succenseam why I should be angry adolescenti with the young man. 56. Sum, cum compositis with its compounds, praeter except possum, regit governs dativum a dative case : ut as, Rex pius a pious king est is ornamentum an orna- ment reipublicse to the state. Nee obest it neither hurts nee prodest nor profits mihi me. 57. Verba verbs composita compounded cum quibus- vis fere praepositionibus toith almost any prepositions, et and cum adverbiis with the adverbs, bene well, satis enough, male ill, regunt govern dativum a dative case: ut as, Dii may the gods benefaciant do good tibi to you. Antefero I prefer iniquissimam pacem the most unequal peace justissimo bello to the most just war. 58. Non pauca not a few ex his of these aliquoties sometimes regunt govern accusativum an accusative case : ut as, Alius one prsestat exceeds alium another ingenio in ability. 59. Est, pro for habeo to have, regit governs dativum a dative case: ut as, Nam que for est mihi I have pater a father domi at home ; est / have injusta noverca a severe step-mother. 60. Sum, cum multis aliis with many others, admittit admits dativum a dative case persons of the person cum loith dativo a dative case rei of the thing : ut, as, Mare the sea est is exitio a destruction avidis nautis to greedy sailors. Speras do you expect fore that that ivill be laudi a credit tibi to yourself, quod which vertis you impute vitio as a fault mihi to me? 61. Verba transitiva verbs transitive exigunt require accusativum an accusative case: ut as, Fugito avoid percontatorem an inquisitive person, nam for idem the same est is garriilus a blab. Aper the wild boar depo- pulatur lays waste agros the fields. 62. Verba in transitiva intransitive verbs non admit- tunt do not take accusativum an accusative case: ut as, Pueri boys ludunt play. SYNTAX CONSTRUED. 173 63. Verba intransitiva intransitive verbs nonnun- quam usurpantur are sometimes used transitive transi- tively : ut as, Ludit he plays bonum civein the good citizen ; i. e. he imitates, §• Gen. jurisju- randi, &c. ; respublica, Gen. reipublicce, &c. IRKEGULAK NOUN'S. § 12. Irregular nouns are divided into I. Defective, II. Redundant. I. Defective nouns are divided into, 1. Those which are not inflected. 2. Those which have only certain cases. 3. Those which have only the singular number. 4. Those which have only the plural number. 1. Nouns not inflected are called aptotes.* To those mentioned at page 87. Part I., may be added the letters of the Greek and Latin alphabets, alpha, beta, &c, a, b, c, &c. Also all Hebrew names as such, and which have not been modified either after the Greek or Latin languages; as, Joseph, Raphael; except Daniel, David, which form Danielis, Davldis. Also some foreign words ; as, git, or gith, or githi, fennel-flower; manna, manna. Obs. Sponte is used mostly in combination with a possessive pronoun. Jussu, and some other verbal substantives in u, formed from supines, are either joined to an adjective, or else are followed by a dependent genitive ; but natu depends on an adjective. Dicis depends on causa or gratia ; nauci attaches itself to some part of facio or sum; infitias follows ire; suppetias is joined to ferre expressed or to be supplied ; secus, sex, with the adjective virile or muliebre, is used in apposition to all cases. 2. Nouns which have only certain cases are called diptotes |, triptotes, tetraptotes, pentaptotes, according to the number of cases attaching to them. See page 87. Part I. 3. Nouns which have only the singular number are called Sin- gularia tantum. Such are a. Abstract nouns ; as, justitia, justice; superbia, pride ; dulcedo, sweetness ; aviditas, greediness ; juventus, youth ; senium, old age. Exc. Abstract nouns are, however, occasionally used in the plural to denote the frequent repetition of an action ; as, concursus fiebant, exitus bellorum: also qualities which attach to several objects; as, proceritates arborum, hominum industrias. So also * A, not; irrooais, a case. f dvo, two; rpels, three; r4rrapes, four ; tt4pt€, five ; irr&cns, a case. § 12.] IRREGULAR NOUNS. 219 amoves, ira, &c, are frequently used by the poets in the place of amor, ira, &c. b. The names of herbs, which when growing are not large enough to be considered apart ; as, apium, parsley. Exc. The poets, however, occasionally use the plural ; as thyma, thyme ; minthce, mint. c. The names of grain ; as, triticum, wheat. Exc. The plural number ; as, hordea, barley, is sometimes used by the poets, and by prose writers in imitation of them. d. The names of metals, and other mineral productions ; as, aurum, gold ; argentum, silver ; marmor, marble. Obs. When the plural of such words is used, it points out several individual objects made out of them ; as, (Era, bronze statues; or it is employed by poetic license ; as, marmor a for marmor, e. The names of liquids and of such things as may be melted ; as, aqua, water ; vinum, wine ; pix, pitch. Obs. Aqua, however, is used to signify mineral springs ; and both aquce and unda>, a large collection of water; so also vina wines of different kinds. /. Words which cannot have a plural, from their very nature : as nemo, nobody ; nihil, nothing. g. Collective nouns, in which the total is regarded, not the component parts ; as, vulgus, the mob ; plebs, the commons ; supellex, furniture. h. Words which have no plural from custom only. Such are, JEther, the sky. Barathrum, a pit. Diluculum, day-break. Ccelum*, heaven. Fama, fame. Hepar, the liver. Humus, the ground. Justitium, a vacation. Lethum, death. Lues, a plague. Meridies, noon- day. Penus, victuals. Pontus, the sea. Prolubium, desire. Pus, corrupted matter. Solum, the open sea. Tabes, a wasting disease. Venia, pardon. Vespera, the evening. Virus, poison. 4. Nouns which have only the plural number, are called Pluralia tantum. See p. 88. Part I. These may be classified under the following divisions : — a. Collective nouns belonging to persons, in which the com- ponent parts are regarded, rather than the total ; as, major e?. ancestors ; liberi, children ; ccelicolai, the celestials. * Cceli is found only in Ecclesiastical writers, and once in Lucretius. l 2 226 LATIN GRAMMAR. [§ 13. N. B. When an individual is to be pointed out from among a class thus expressed, it is done by unus, &c. ; as, unus majorurn, unus de liberis, &c. b. Parts of the body ; as, artus, limbs ; exta, the intestines ; prcecordia, the diaphragm, &c. c. Material compound objects, wherein the component parts that form the whole are regarded ; as bigce, a, carriage with two horses ; quadrigce, a carriage with four horses ; spolia, spoils ; vepres, a bramble bush, &c. d. Names of games and festivals ; as, Bacchanalia, Saturnalia, festivals in honour of Bacchus and Saturn, &c. So, also, natalitia, a birth-day entertainment ; repotia, a carousing on the day follow- ing an entertainment ; sponsalia, a betrothal feast. e. Names of days in the Roman calendar : calendce, the calends ; idus, the ides ; nonce, the nones. f. Names of certain towns ; as, Athence, Athens ; Bactra, Bactra. Those that end in i denote, for the most part, either the town or its inhabitants, as Delphi, Delphi, also the Delphians ; Leontini, Leontini, also the Leontines. But Veii, Yeii ; the people, Veientes. II. Redundant nouns are divided into, 1. Such as have more than one form ; 2. Such as have more than one gender. 1. Those which have more than one form are called Hetero- clita* Such are barbaria and barbaries ; mollitia and mollifies. So also lawns, which makes the genitive in lauri and laurus, &c. &c. 2. Nouns which, besides a different form, take in consequence a different gender, are called Heterogenea^ ; as, callus (masc.) and callum (neut), hard skin ; jugulus (masc.) and jugulum (neut.), the throat. So also Pergamus (fern, sing.) and Pergdma (neut. plur.) Troy ; rastrum (neut. sing.) and rastri (masc. plur.), a rake, &c. See also page 87. Part I. NOUNS WITH DIFFERENT MEANINGS IN SINGULAR AND PLURAL. § 13. Some words which, in the singular, imply a single object, denote, in the plural, not merely a plurality of such objects, but are even used as plur alia tantum, denoting a complex object, bearing some affinity to the meaning of the word in the singular. Such are * ^Erepos, another ; kX'ktis, declension. •j* "Erepos, another ; yevos, gender. §14.] ADJECTIVES. 221 Singular, JEdes (an undivided edifice), a temple. Animus, mind. Aqua, water. Auxilium, help. Bonum, a, good, or blessing. Career, a prison. Castrum, a castle. Codicillus (rare), a log. Comitium, a place in the Roman Forum. Copia, plenty. Cupedia, daintiness. Facultas, power. Fortuna, fortune, chance. Gratia, favour. Hortus, a garden. Impedimentum, a hindrance. Litera, a letter (of the alphabet). Ludus, play. Naris a nostril. Natalis, a birth-day. Opts (nom. ops, obs.) help. Opera, labour. Pars, a part. Rostrum, a beak. Sal, salt. Spiritus, breath. Tabula, a board. Plural. JEdes (a divided edifice) a house. Animi, spirit, pride. Aquce, mineral springs. Auxilia, auxiliary troops. Bona, property. Carceres, the turning point in a race-course. Castra, a camp. Codicilli, tablets, hence writings. Comitia, assemblies of the Ro- man people. Copies, forces. Cupedice, dainties. Facultdtes, means. Fortunes, fortune, property. Gratice, thanks. Horti, pleasure-grounds. Impedimenta, baggage. Literce, a letter (an epistle). Ludi, public games. Nares, a nose. Natdles, lineage. Opes, resources, wealth. Operce, work-people. Partes, a party or faction. Rostra, the orator's platform in the Roman forum. Sales, wit. Spiritus, pride, courage. Tabula, an account-book. To these may be added Epulum, a solemn feast (neut.). Fastus, pride (4th dec). Forum, the forum (neut.). Epuloe, a banquet (fern.). Fasti, the calendar (2nd dec). Fori, (inasc) the gangways of a ship. ADJECTIVES. § 14. Adjectives are inflected like substantives, as pointed out at pp. 11, 12, 13. The rules that influence the one, for the most part influence the other also. L 3 222 LATIN GRAMMAR. [§14- a. Adjectives that form the ablative singular in i only, form the neuter nominative, &c. plural in ia; as, tristis, tristi, tristia. Those that form the ablative in e or i also form the nominative plural in ia ; as, felix, felice or felici, felicia ; sapiens, sapiente or sapienti, sapientia. JExc. Comparatives, however, take only a; as melior, meliore or meliori; meliora. Veins also has Vetera, though it takes, in the ablative singular, both vetere and veteri. b. Plus has plura only, in good classical writers : pluria is un- classical. Yet the compound complures, which loses its compara- tive power, and is used merely to signify u several," has both a and ia. c. Plerusque is obsolete ; yet Sallust has pier 'ague juvenilis, and nobilitas ; pjlerceqae Africce (dative) ; plerumque exercitum. The genitive plural is not found ; plurimorum is used in its place. d. Made and macti supposed to be derived from the obsolete mactus, are found only in combination with the imperative of sum : necesse, neuter nominative with est, erat, fuit, &c. ; and accusative with some part of liabeo : necessum, in old writers, with some third person of sum. To these may be added damnas, with esto or sunto ; and potis, pote, in poetry, with some third person of sum. e. The superlative degree points out not only the highest state of a thing, but also something very great. Flumen Rhenus latissimus atque altissimus (Caes. B. G. 1, 2.), " Very broad, and very deep." f. The following adjectives have no comparative degree : Bellus, pretty, bellissimus, I Inclitus, famous, inclitissimus. Diversus, different, diversissimus. Novus, new, novissimus. Falsus*, false, falsissimus. Sacer, sacred, sacerrimus. Also the participial meritus has a superlative meritissimus. g. The following have no superlatives : Agilis, nimble, Agrestis, rustic, Aldcer, active, Ater, black, Ccecus, blind, Credibilis, credible, Docilis, teachable, Deses, slothful, Jejunus, fasting, agilior. agrestior. alacrior. atrior. cacior. credibilior. docilior. desidior. jejuni or. Opimus, fat opimior. Probabilis, probable, probabilior. Proclivis, inclined, proclivior. Propinquus, near, propinqiuor. Protervus, wanton, protervior. Salutaris, wholesome, salutarior. Satur, full, saturior. Surdus, deaf, surdior. Teres, smooth, teretior. Longinquus, distant, longinquior. h. Declivis, sloping, has neither comparative nor superlative decree. * Falsius is found once in Petronius. § 15.] NUMERAL ADJECTIVES. 223 Anterior, preceding ; sequior, following ; have neither the posi- tive nor superlative degree. i. Adjectives formed in part from dico, I saj;facio, I do ; loouor, I speak ; volo, I wish ; form their comparative and superlative by changing us into entior and entissiraus : thus, Maledicus, abusive, maledicentior, maledicentissimus. Magnificus, magnificent, magnificentior, magnificentissimus. Magniloquus, boastful, magniloquentior, magniloquentissimus. JBenevolus, kind, benevolentior, benevolentissimus. But mirificus, wonderful, makes both mirificentissimus and mirificissimus. k. Dives, besides ditior, ditissimus, takes the forms divitior and divitissimus. I. The following irregular comparisons are found : Assiduus, attentive ; assiduior, assiduissimus. JEgregiuSy excellent ; egregiissimus, Exiguus, small; exiguior, exiguissimus. Perpetuus, continual; perpetuior, perpetuissimus. Pius, dutiful; piissimus. Streuuus, vigorous ; strenuior, strenuissimus. Moreover Plautus uses at Trin. iv. 2. 146. a superlative formed from ipse ; viz. ipsissimus, the very self-same. NUMERAL ADJECTIVES. § 15. Numeral adjectives are divided into, 1. Cardinal, which point out the number ; as, unus, " one ; " duo, " two," &c. : 2. Or- dinal, which mark the order or succession ; as, primus, " first ; " secundus, " second," &c. : 3. Distributive, which signify so many each ; as, singuli, " one each ; " bini, " two each," &c. : 4. Multi- plicative, implying so many times over ; as, simplex, " once over ; " duplex, "twice over," or "two-fold," &c. : 5. Proportional, which indicate proportion ; as, duplus, " twice as much," or " many ; " triplus, " three times as much," or " many." N.B. These last are usually found only in the neuter gender. a. All cardinal adjectives from one to twenty, inclusive, are ex- pressed by some single word, except in the following instances, in which more than one mode of writing is employed : viz. thirteen, tredecim or decern et tres, occasionally tres et decern; sixteen, sedecim or sexdecim, decern et sex ; seventeen, septemdecim, better decern et septem ; eighteen, duodeviginti, sometimes decern et octo ; nineteen, undeviginti, sometimes decern et novem. From twenty- one to ninety-nine, both included, either the smaller number is l 4 224 LATIN GRAMMAR. [§ 16. put first with et, or the larger without et. Above a hundred the larger number precedes either with or without et. All numbers above a thousand are expressed by a multiplication of mille ; as, bis mille, two thousand. b. From Distributives are formed adjectives in anus, which re- present a thing as having so many units ; as, nummus quinarius, a coin with five units, or asses; nummus denarius, a coin with ten units or asses : versus senarius, a verse with six units or feet. c. The date of a year is expressed by annus, and the requisite ordinal adjective or adjectives ; as, Annus millesimus octingentesi- mus quinquagesimus secundus, the year 1852. romax xumeral figures. § 16. "With the exception of M. for mille, a thousand, the Romans represented numbers by arbitrary signs. A perpendicular line (represented by I) was used by them to denote One, Two lines crossing each other diagonally (whence was formed X) signified Ten ; while half of this figure (V) was their Five. A perpendi- cular line with another line at right angles with it at the lower end (L, whence came L) denoted Fifty; while another line added at right angles to the upper part of the last-named figure (C) denoted One hundred. C was soon deprived of its angles and represented by the more easy form of C. The perpendicular line with C inverted (0) made their Five hundred ; and from this was formed D, representing the same value. Each subsequent was equi- valent to our "cypher : thus 13 (or D) = 500 ; 100 = 5000 ; 1000 = 50,000/ The number was doubled by putting C as often before the perpendicular line as after it ; thus CIO = 1000 ; CCIOO = 10,000; CCCI000 = 100,000. I. 1. VI. 6. XL 11. XVI. 16. XXX. SO. LXXX. 80. II. 2. VII. 7. XII. 12. XVII. 17. XL.-40. XC. 90. III. 3. VIII. 8. XIII. 13. XVIII. 18. L. 50. C. 100. IV. 4. IX. 9. XIV. 14. XIX. 19. LX. 60. CX. 110. V. 5. X. 10. XV. 15. XX. 20. LXX. 70. M. 1000. Hence it will be seen that a numeral sign (or a combination of numeral signs) placed to the right of the representative of an equal or larger amount must be added to it : to the left, must be subtracted from it: VI. = V+L = 6; XYI. = X +VI. = 16 ; XX. = X-f X. = 20; but IV. = V-I. = 4; IX. = X-L=9; XL. = L — X. = 40. § 17, 18.] FRACTIONS, ETC. 225 FRACTIONS. § 17. Fractions are expressed in the following ways : — 1. By an ordinal adjective with pars, either expressed or to be supplied : dimidia pars, \ ; tertia pars, or tertia, % ; quarta pars, or quarta, \. Obs. Pars is never omitted with dimidia in the best authors. Another way of expressing half is by putting dimidius in concord with its substantive, or by using dimidium substantively. Luna est major quam dimidia pars terra, Cic. de Nat Deor. ii. 40. ; Dimidia circuli forma, " a half circle," Plin. ii. 59. So in Cicero's pun upon his brothers bust : Frater meus dimidius major est quam totus, Macrob. Sat. ii. 8. Hibernia dimidio minor quam Britannia, Caes. B. G. v. 13. Instead of sexta is found dimidia tertia; and instead of octava, dimidia quarta. But here dimidia forms, at it were, a portion of the following word. 2. When the fraction mentioned consists of one part less than the number of parts into which the whole is divided, the cardinal number denoting the lesser amount is used in combination with partes ; as duce partes, f ; tres partes, f , &c. 3. Sometimes a mode corresponding wholly to the English is employed, viz. the cardinal and ordinal adjectives are used with an ellipse of partes ; as tres quintce, f ; sex septima, -§-, &c. 4. Sometimes the fraction is broken up; as dimidia pars et tertia, i. e. J + i == 1 5 quinta pars et septima, i. e. \ + -f = £§. Thus Pliny, H. N. vi. 39., Horce quatuordecim atque dimidia cum trigesimd parte unius horce, i. e. 14 + \ + 3V = 14 T 8 ¥ ; i. e. 14 hours, 32 minutes. PRONOUNS. § 18. For Pronouns, see Part I. p. 17. It should be observed that, in order to give emphasis to the personal pronouns, the affix met is found added to them in all cases, except the genitive plural, and also the nominative and vocative singular of tu. This addition to them is about tanta- mount to the English word " self; " as egomet, " I myself," &c. Still greater emphasis is produced by the further use of ipse ; as egomet ipse, " I my own self," or u my very own self." When tu is to be made emphatic, te is added; as tute, "you yourself;" and to this met may also be joined : tutemet, " your very own self." Se is often doubled for emphasis, and also for euphony. Of the demonstrative pronouns, hie, ille, iste are called direct ; is indirect ; ipse and idem emphatic demonstratives. Is is also sometimes called the " adjunctive " pronoun. Instead of cujus and cui, the genitive and dative of the relative qui, the old writers employed quojus and quoi. l 5 226 LATIN GEAMMAE. [§ 19. § 19. Explanation of certain Grammatical Terms employed in the following Syntax. Adjective attributive. See § 27. 1. — predicative. See § 27. 2. Apodosis clause containing the consequence or re- sult. Clause a member of a proposition. — demonstrative . clause containing the demonstrative pro- noun, &c. — dependent clause depending on one preceding. — independent ... clause not depending on one preceding. — objectival clause used as the object of a verb. — relative clause containing the relative pronoun, — subjectival clause used as the subject of a verb. Genitive, objective See § 46. Obs. 1. a. — possessive ... genitive denoting property or possession. — subjective ... See § 46. Obs. 1. b. Infinitive, objectival ... infinitive used as the object of a verb. — subjectival... infinitive used as the subject of a verb. — substantival . infinitive used as a substantive. Object the accusative after transitive verbs to which the action of the subject as de- noted by the verb passes immediately on. Oratio obliqua the language employed by a writer in stating what another said, &c. " recta the very words of the writer, &c. himself. Predicate that which is stated of the subject. Predicated stated concerning. Proposition a combination of words, whereby some- thing is set forth, and afiirmed, denied, or inquired, respecting some person or thing. Protasis clause containing a supposition or limita- tion. S ubj ec t that of which something is stated. § 20—22.] syntax. 227 SYNTAX. The Nominative Case and the Verb. The Verb with Personal Subjects. § 20. A verb preceded by two or more subjects of the singular number is put in the plural if one, at least, of them denotes a person. Consules declarantur P. Scipio Nasica, L. Calpurnius JBestia. Sail. Jug. 27. JEodem lecto Scipio atque Hasdrubal adcubuerunt. Liv. xxviii. 8. Nee dubitare, quin Syphax regnumque ejus jam in Romanorum essent potestate. Liv. xxviii. 18. Obs. 1. When Senatus and populus (Romanus, Sfc.) are united by et, a plural verb is used, if these two component parts of the state are to be regarded separately ; but a singular verb, if the idea of the whole state collectively, as one body, is to be pre- sented to the mind. Populus et Senatus Romanus placide inter se rempublicam trac- tdbant. Sail. Jug. 41. Senatus et Populus Romanus beneficii et injuries memor esse solet. Sail. Jug. 104. Obs. 2. With the expression, Senatus Populusque, a singular verb is employed. Senatus Populusque Romanus intelligit. Cic. Ep. ad Div. v. 8. Ubi Senatus Populusque Romanus esset. Hirt. Pell. Alex. 68. § 21. But when a verb is preceded by two or more per- sonal subjects, and one is to be brought prominently forward as the principal, the verb is placed nearest to it, and con- forms to it in number. Homerusfuit et Hesiodus, ante Romam conditam. Cic. Tusc. i. 1. Obs. In an enumeration of persons in the singular, where each is to be presented separately to the mind, the verb is placed last, in the singular number, and in the person of the nearest subject. TJt enim tu nunc de Corioldno, sic Clitarchus, sic Stratocles de Themistocle finxit. Cic. Brut. 11, § 22. The verb is in the plural when it is predicated of two or more persons of whom one is represented by a nomi- native case singular, the other or others by an ablative preceded by cum. x 6 228 LATIN GRAMMAR. [§ 23—25. Demosthenes cum ceteris erant expulsi. Corn. Nep. Phoc. 2. Lentulus cum ceteris constituerant. Sail. Cat. 43. Obs. Yet the verb is in the singular, if the person represented by the nominative singular is to be especially and principally marked. Ipse cum expeditis coJiortibus inter primos erat. Sail. Jug. 46. Metellus cum exercitu conspicatur. Sail. Jug. 49. § 23. When a verb is preceded by two or more subjects of different persons, it is put in the plural number and in the first person, if one of such subjects be of the first per- son ; but if they be of the second and third persons, then the verb is in the second person plural. Ego et suavissimus Cicero valemus : — si tu et Tullia, lux nostra, valetis. Cic. Ep. ad Div. xiii. 3. Obs. 1. The same rule holds good where one of the subjects is a person, the other a thing. Debemur morti nos nostraque. Hor. A. P. 63. Obs. 2. An exception, however, to the rule occurs, when one of the personal subjects is to be especially emphasized ; in which case the verb is placed nearest to it, and in its number and person. Ego et Cicero meus flagitabit. Cic. Ep. ad Att. iv. 17. The Verb with Subjects denoting " Things." § 24. When two or more singular subjects denoting things precede a verb, it is put in the singular, if they are to be regarded as collectively denoting a simple idea ; but in the plural, if they represent separate and distinct ideas. Eas gloria, imperium, potentia sequebatur. Sail. Cat. 12. Ratio et constantia ducis copias trans vexit. Tac. Agr. 18. Metus atque mozror invasere civitatem. Sail. Jug. 39. Fortitudo et sapientia vix videntur posse sejungi. Cic. Phil. xiii. 3. § 25. But when of any number of subjects denoting things one at least is in the plural, the verb is also in the plural, unless particular emphasis attaches to one of them in the singular number; in which case the verb is placed nearest to it in the singular number, and thus brings it prominently forward. Stipendium, alia, qua bello usuiforent, decernuntur. Sail. Gloria opesque inventce sunt. Sail. Jug. 70. Ubi plerique thesauri, filiorumque ejus multus pueritiai cultus erat. Sail. Jug. 74. § 26, 27.] syntax. 229 Miscellaneous Kules. § 26. 1. When, in narrative, the writer employs the first person plural, he intends either to carry the reader along with him, as it were, or else to express what others heard, saw, felt, &c. in com- mon with himself. When he uses the first person singular, he restricts himself to the declaration of his own view, &c. Vidimus sub divo Vespasiano Veledam. Tac. Germ, 8. Metellum magnum virumfuisse comperior. Sail. Jug. 45. 2. The subject is sometimes omitted before the third person plural in other cases than the unemphasized pronouns, and par- ticularly when a common saying or proverb is mentioned. Dicunt or aiunt, sc. homines. 3. Sometimes dicit or ait is omitted before the quoted words of another person. De quo pr cedar e familiar is noster JSnnius, sc. ait. Cic. Cat. Maj. 4. Laniger contra timens, sc. dicit. Phaed. i. 1.6. The Substantive and Adjective, &c. § 27. Adjectives and adjectival words may be divided into attributive and predicative. 1. An attributive adjective is one joined to a substantive, pointing out some inherent or essential quality attaching to it : as amnis rapidus, " a rapid stream ; " puer bonus, " a good boy." 2. A predicative adjective, &c. is one which is affirmed of its substantive, and points out some quality which does not necessarily belong to it, but which holds good of it, as represented by the writer, under particular circumstances, or at a particular time ; as amnis est rapidus, " the stream is rapid ; " puer est bonus, " the boy is good;" i.e. as above mentioned, either under particular cir- cumstances, or at a particular time. Beyond these circumstances, or this time, the quality will not extend, unless it be further stated that it will. Obs. Closely allied in meaning to this is the use of the adjective, &c. in what may be termed "apposition;" i.e. when it is em- ployed in the place of an adverb or an explanatory clause, and denotes the state of the substantive or pronoun during the time of the action, &c. denoted by the verb. Tollunt se celeres. Virg. 2En. vi. 202. Celeres= celeriter. Cyrus eo sermone, quern moriens habuit, negat, &c. Cic. Cat. Maj. 8. moriens = quum moreretur. QuumAgnppa eumflens atque osculans oraret. Corn. Nep. Att. 22. flens atque osculans = una cumfletu atque osculis. 230 LATIN GRAMMAR. [§ 28 — 31. Attributive Adjective. § 28. An attributive adjective, &c. belonging to two or more substantives is always in the gender of the nearest. Vigebat patrius mos et disciplina. Cic. Cat. Maj. 9. Metellum multi filii^ jUia>, nepotes, neptes in rogum imposuerunt. Cic. Tusc. i. 35. Obs. So also with an adjective, &c. in apposition : — Ccesaris omni et gratia et opibus sic fruor ut meis. Cic. Ep. ad Div. i. 9. Predicative Adjectives^ fyc. § 29. Sometimes a neuter singular predicative adjective is used of a masculine or feminine substantive. Triste lupus stabulis, maturis frugibus imbres. Virg. Ec. iii. 80. Quum omnium rerum mors sit extremum. Cic. Ep. ad Div. vi. 21. Obs. In this case the adjective appears to be used substantively. § 30. A neuter plural predicative adjective is used both of two or more things devoid of life, though they are of the masculine or feminine gender, and also of persons and things conjointly named ; provided that in either instance they are regarded merely as matters, and the idea of gender is not connected at all with the statement. Ni virtus fidesque vestra spectata mihi forent. Sail. Cat. 9. Transacta astas, sparsi numeric prcesumta quies (videbantur) tarda et contraria bellum inchoaturo. Tac. Agr. 18. Romani regem regnumque Macedonia sua futura (esse) sciunt. Liv. xl. 10. Obs. 1. Sometimes, however, the adjective is in the gender and number of the nearest substantive, if that is to be strongly marked. Salus, liberie fama, fortunes sunt carissimce. Cic. Obs. 2. If in the combination of persons and things the reader's attention is to be directed rather to the living subject, then the gender of such living subject is employed. Rex regiaque classis una profecti (sunt). Liv. xxi. 50. Compare §§ 20. 24. for verb. § 31. When two or more subjects of the singular number, and denoting things, precede a verb of " being" or " calling " to which is joined a predicative adjective, &c, such predica- tive adjective, &c. will be in the gender of the nearest sub- ject, if all the subjects together form one compound idea. § 32—35.] syntax. 231 Animus et consilium et sententla civitatis posita est in legibus. Cic. pro Claent. 53. Parentes carissimos habere debemus, quod ab iis nobis vita, matri- monium, libertas, civitas tradita est Cic. post Red. 2. Compare § 24. for the verb. § 32. If, however, the subjects designate persons the plural is used, and the adjective is in the masculine if one of the subjects be masculine. Qudm pridem pater mihi et mater mortui essent. Ter. iii. 3. 11. Compare § 20 for the verb. Obs. The rule holds good as to the gender when the subjects are of the plural number. Effigies sacrce Divum Phrygiique Penates visi ante oculos astare. Virg. 2En. iii. 148. § 33. If the subjects be of the plural number and denote things, the predicative adjective, if placed after them, will be in the plural number and the neuter gender. Secundce res, honores, imperia, victoria? fortuita sunt. Cic. Off. ii. 16. Leges cultusque pleraque (sunt) Sidonica. Sail. Jug. 78. Obs. Occasionally there is a departure from this rule, and the predicative adjective, &c. is in concord with the nearest subject if it is to be strongly marked. Ut brachia atque humeri ad sustinenda arma liberi ab aqua esse possent. Ca3S. B. G. vii. 56. Donaque ac fruges super eum (ferunt) a multitudine congestas. Liv. vii. 6. § 34. When, however, the predicative adjective is placed before the subjects, it is in concord with the nearest, if it be in the plural : otherwise the construction pointed out in the foregoing rules will hold good. Missa (sunt) eb cohortes et C. Annius prcefectus. Sail. Jug. 77. Naturd inimica sunt libera civitas et rex. Liv. xliv. 24. Miscellaneous Kules. § 35. 1. An adjective &c. sometimes agrees with the gender im- plied in a noun, and not its grammatical gender, provided, however, such noun is used of persons. This is especially the case with millia. Capita conjurationis ejus, qucestione habita, virgis casi ac securi percussi (sunt). Liv. x. 1. Latium Capuaque agro multati. Liv. viii. 11. 232 LATIN GRAMMAR. [§ 35. Millia sex sine timore perterriti, sine spe salutis inducti, ex castris egressi, ad Rhenum finesque (Germanorum) contenderunt. Cass. B. G. i. 27. 2. Substantives are sometimes used as adjectives : — especially those in tor formed from transitive verbs. These last have commonly a feminine form in trie, which is also used adjectively. While further still, a neuter plural in tricia is likewise found in an ad- jectival force : Populum late regem, Virg. ; ' Regina pecunia, Hor. ; Contemptor animus, Sail. ; Raptores lupi, Yirg. ; Victor animus, Sail.; Victrices Athence, Cic. ; Victricia arma, Virg. ; Ultricia bella, Sil. Ital. Obs. The poets employ proper names derived from the Greek, and ending in as and is in the same way ; as, Pelias hasta; Sithonis unda. Ovid. 3. When an adjective of the positive degree is coupled to multus, the conjunction is not rendered into English. In consule nostro multce bonceque artes erant (Sail. Jug. 28.), " Many good qualities." 4. Adjectives derived from proper names, and sometimes also from appellative nouns, are found in the place of a dependent geni- tive. Labor Hercideus for Herculis, Hor. ; Sulldni milites for Sulla, Sail.; Regia utilitas for Regis, Tac. ; Herllis JUius for Heri, Ter. 5. Primus (adjective) in all genders, joined with a subject of a verb, points out the person or thing of whom, &c. it is used, as being the first to do, or suffer, &c. the action or state denoted by the verb : i. e. before any other person, &c. But primiim (adverb) points out that the subject of the verb did or suffered the action or state denoted by the verb in the first place : i. e. before pro- ceeding to any thing else. (Duillius) qui Poenos classe primus devicerat. Cic. Cat.Maj. 13. Primus Romam elephantos (Curius) duxit. Eut. ii. 14. Primum /regit Corcyrceos. Corn. Xep. Them. ii. 3. Obs. The same distinction holds good between solus and solum. Solus ille aberat Athenis libenter. Corn. Xep. Chab. iii. 4. Soli omnium opes atque inopiam pari ad/ectu concupiscunt. Tac. Agr. 30. AitC tandem ? Una de re solum est dissensio f Cic. de Leg. i. 20. 6 Infimus, imus, summits, primus, medius, ullimus, and some others, are at times used to point out where the substantive to which they are attached is lowest, highest, &c. : so that they represent (in its required case) injima, &c. pars ; and their substantive, a dependent genitive. Mittit homines ad infimos montes. Corn. Nep. Plum. ix. 6. Injimos monies = injimas partes montium. Amphoras summas operit auro etargento. Corn. Kep. Hann. ix. 3. Amphoras summas = summas partes amphorarum. § 36—38.] syntax. 233 Relative and Demonstrative Pronouns. § 36. When a clause forms the antecedent id quod is at times used instead of quod alone. Existimans, id quod accidit, se (Aspim) imprudentem parvd manu oppressurum. Corn. Nep. Bat iv. 3. Catilina, id quod factu facillimum erat, omnium flagitiorum atque facinorum circum se catervas habebat. Sail. Cat 14. Obs. In this construction the clause beginning with id quod pre- cedes that to which it relates. In grammatical strictness id is in apposition to the clause referred to, while quod relates to id. §'37. When a word or sentence is explained by a substan- tive in connection with sum, dico or dicor, voco or vocor, and other similar verbs, the relative is usually in concord with such explanatory word. Tusculum se contulit, quce civitas non longe ab urbe est Eut. i. 11. Celebrant carminibus antiquis, quod unum apud illos memorice et annalium genus est Tuistonem deum. Tac. Germ. 2. Locus in car cere, quod Tullianum dicitur. Sail. Cat. 55. Obs. 1. When the noun to be explained is to be distinguished from another of the same kind, or from a foreign word, the general rule is followed. Flumen est Arar, quod in Rhoddnum inftuit Cass. B. G. i. 12. TJnus erat toto natures vultus in orbe, Quern dixere Chaos. Ovid. Met i. 6. Ad eum locum, qui appellatur Pharsdlus, applicuit Caes. B. C. iii. 6. Obs. 2. Closely connected with this is the use of the relative with gens and civitas to define a people. Volscos, quce gens est non longe ab urbe, vicit Eut. i. 8. Non longe a Tolosatiorum finibus absunt; qua civitas est in pro- vincial. Cses. B. G. i. 10. N.B. The foregoing construction occurs, however, at times in other combinations than with the verbs named in § 37 ; and with the demonstrative as well as the relative. Tribuni plebis, resistentibus collegis, continuare magistratum nite- bantur ; quce dissensio totius anni comitia impediebat Sail. Cat. 37. Philenon ara, quern finem imperii Carthaginienses habuere. Sail, Jug 10. Syphax Romam mittitur ; qua re audita, &c. Eut. iii. 20. Idem velle atque nolle ; eafirma amicitia est. Sail. Cat. 20. § 38. When a relative refers to two or more antecedents of the singular number it is put in the plural. 234 LATIN GRAMMAR. [§ 39 — 41. Quis est, qui C. Fabricii, M\ Curii non cum caritate aliqud memoriam usurpet, quos nunquam videritf Cic. Lad. 8. Obs. 1. If the antecedents be persons, and of different genders, the relative is put in the masculine in preference to the feminine. Mulieres etpueri, qui visum processerant, fugere. Sail. Jug. 85. Obs. 2. If the antecedents be things, even though some or all of them are of the masculine or feminine gender, jet the relative, &c. if the plural is used, is found in the neuter. Pro virtute audacia, largitio, avaritia vigebant. Quce tametsi animus aspernabatur, &c. Sail. Cat. 3. Subveniendum est menti atque animo. Nam nac quoque, &c. Cic. Cat. Maj. 11. Primb pecunia, deinde imperii cupido crevit : ea quasi mater ies omnium malorunifuere. Sail. Cat. 10. Obs. 3. Also, when things are denoted, the relative, &c. is generally in the number and gender of the nearest antecedent, if esjDecial reference is made to it. Neque flumen neque mons erat, qui fines discerneret. Sail. Jug. 79. Obs. 4. If the antecedents be persons and things conjointly, the relative, &c. will assume the masculine gender if one of the persons be of the male sex ; but if none be of the male sex, but the female sex alone is spoken of, then the feminine. Sensus nostros non parens, non nutrix, non magister, non poeta, non scena deprarant; non multitudinis consensus abducit a vera. Animis omnes tenduntur insidia> vel ab Us, quos modb enumeravi, &c. Cic. de Leg. i. 17. § 39. The relative, &c. sometimes refers to the gender implied in a noun, and not its grammatical gender. Scepe enim interfui querelis, quce C. Scdinator, quce Sp. ATbinus deplorare solebant. Cic. Cat. Maj. 3. Vicit in senatu pars ilia, qui vero pretium aid gratiam ante- ferebant. Sail. Jug. 15. Fatale monstrum ; qua 3 generosiiis Perire quarens. Hor. Od. i. 37. 21. § 40. When a relative, &c. refers to a collective noun of the singular number, it is often put in the plural. Casar equitatum pramittit, qui videant, &c. Cass. B. G. i. 15. § 41. The relative clause sometimes precedes the demon- strative, especially when any matter is to be brought pro- minently forward. Quocirca et absentes adsnnt; et, quod difficilius dictu est, mortui vivunt. Cic. Lad. 7. Ubi, qua Metellus agebat, ex nunciis accepit. Sail. Jug. § 42 — 45.] syntax. 235 § 42. The relative sometimes attracts the substantive out of the demonstrative clause into its own, and has it in its own case. Ita ferebat duo, qua maxima putantur oner a. Cic. Cat.Maj. 5. Urbem quam statuo, vestra est. Virg. 2En. i. 573. § 43. When a relative refers to a word to which a super- lative adjective naturally belongs, it attracts such superlative into its own clause. Coriolos civitatem, quam habebant optimam, perdiderunt. Eut. i. 8. § 44. If a relative is strictly required twice in reference to the same antecedent ; and if the construction requires that the first time it should be in the nominative, and the second, in some other case, then, in the place of such other case a corresponding case of the demonstrative is sometimes used. Omnes turn fere, qui nee extra urbem hanc vixerant,nec eos aliqua barbaries domestica infuscaverat, recte loquebantur. Cic. Brut. 74. Nee eos, for nee quos. This construction is not uncommon in Cicero. Obs. Occasionally this construction obtains when the cases are the same, and when, therefore, the conjunction alone would suffice. Quern (i. e. Pythagoras) Phliuntem ferunt venisse ; eumque cum Leonte principe Phliasiorum docte et copiose qucedam disserere. Cic. Tusc. v. 3. Eumque for quemque, or even the conjunction alone. Miscellaneous Eules. §45. — 1. The demonstrative pronoun is often omitted before the relative, especially when it is in the same case with it. Accipere se, qua liberis inviolata reddat. Tac. Germ. 18. Ccesar cognovit Considium, quod non vidisset, pro viso sibi nunci- dsse. Cses. B. G. i. 22. In Ex. 1. qua = ea qua : in Ex. 2. quod = id quod. Obs. But when the demonstrative is emphatic, it is invariably expressed. Neque eos, qui fee ere, pcenitet aut pudet. Sail. Jug. 31. Constituerunt ea, qua ad projiciscendum pararent, comparare. Caes. B. G. i. 3. 2. The relative is sometimes attracted into the case of the ante- cedent, after the Greek mode of expression. 236 LATIN GRAMMAR. [§ 46. Quum scribas et aliquid agas eorum, quorum consuesti, gaudeo. Cic. Ep. ad Fam. v. 14. 3. In order to avoid the frequent repetition of the conjunction, the relative is often used to connect propositions in the place of the demonstrative and et ; so that in this construction qui = et hie. In primis est senectus : quam ut adipiscantur omnes optant Cic. Cat. Maj. 2. Accidit ut Athenienses Chersonesum colonos vellent mittere. Cujus generis quum magnus numerus esset, Sue. Corn. Xep. Milt. i. 1, 2. 4. Talis, tantus, tot, are followed in comparisons by qualis, quantus, quot. Of these tot and quot are not declined. The others assume the gender and number of the same substantive, if both have reference to it. Tale scilicet, quale cujusque studium in superior e vita fuit Cic. Cat. Maj. 8. Nullam concionem unquam vidi tantam, quanta nunc vestra est. Cic. Phil. vi. 7. Obs. 1. Sometimes two different persons or things are compared ; in which case the above adjectives attach themselves to their re- spective substantives. Amicum talem habere cupiunt, quales ipsi esse non possunt Cic. Lai. 22. Quale solet silvis brumali tempore viscum Fronde virere nova Talis erat species auri. Virg. 2En. vi. 205. Tantam eorum multitudinem nostri interfecerunt, quantum fuit diei spatium. Caes. B. G.'A. 11. Obs. 2. Talis, tantus, tot, are often omitted in the demonstrative clause. Aut mihi carmen, Quale meo Codro, concedite. Virg. Ec. vii. 21 Parit ova, quanta anseres. Plin. H. N. viii. 25. Portis alii bipatentibus adsunt, Millia quot magnis nunquam venire Mycenis. Virg. JEn. ii. 330. SUBSTANTIVES. Genitive after the Substantive. § 46. The genitive dependent on a substantive shows the relation in which it stands to that substantive. The two together express one simple idea. Obs. 1. This genitive is of two kinds : subjective and objective. a. The subjective genitive points out that (1.) which is made § 47, 48.] syntax. 237 done, &c. by the governing substantive, or (2.) which belongs to it : (1.) Signum Praxitelis, a statue of (i. e. made by) Praxiteles ; Promissa Dei, the promises of (i. e. made by) God ; Peccata homi- num, the sins of (t. e. committed by) men. (2.) Patris domus, the house of (i. e. belonging to) the father ; barba capellce, the beard of (i. e. belonging to) the goat ; juventce spatium, the space of (i. e. belonging to) youth. N.B. These divisions of the subjective genitive are sometimes also called (1.) genitivus conjunctivus, (2.) genitivus possessivus. b. The objective genitive — which usually follows substantives derived from transitive verbs, but sometimes from other verbs — denotes the object referred to by the governing substantive. PfX7)s efoai (Thuc. i. 113.), " To be of the same opinion." 'Eavrov chat, " to be the property of himself;" i. e. his own master. So, r\v v/j.coi/ avrcov ideA-fio-Tire yevevdai (Dem. p. 42. 9, 10., Reiske's ed.) "If you shall wish to become your own property ; " i.e. to be your own masters and independent. See Jelf, § 521. § 80. Instead of the possessive genitive the possessive neuter pronouns meum, tuum, suum, nostrum, vestrum, are used. So also are sometimes neuter adjectives denoting " a property," such as humanum, bellulnum, &c. Non est meum contra auctoritatem senatus dicer e. Quod spiro et placeo {si placed) tuum est. Hor. Od. iv. 3. 24. Humanum est irasci. Ter. Adelph. iii. 5. 25. Et facer e et patifortia JRomanum est. Liv. ii. 12. Obs. This construction can only be used in the third person, and when the subject is a substantival infinitive, or a sentence; so that these adjectives assume the nature of predicative adjectives. § 81. The verbs of accusing, condemning, acquitting, specified in Rule 41. Part I. are followed by an accusative of the person and a genitive of the charge. This genitive is usually said to be dependent on nomine or crimine to be supplied, as those words are sometimes expressed (see Obs. below)/ But it is rather to be considered as the objective genitive, inasmuch as it is the object towards which the quality implied in the verb is directed. See examples in rule mentioned above. m 5 250 LATIN GRAMMAR. [§ 82—85. Obs. When these verbs are followed by nomine or crimine ex- pressed, these ablatives are to be regarded as those of the " cause." § 82. After verbs of condemning the genitive of the punish- ment is far more frequently used than the ablative. If, however, the punishment consists of a mulct in money the ablative is ge- nerally used. Qui capitis damnarent Cses. B. C. iii. 83. Sceleris condemnat generum suum. Cic. Ep. ad Div. xiv. 14. Qui pecunid mulctarent. Cses. B. C. iii. 83. Octuplo condemnari. Cic. Verr. ii. 3. 13. § 83. In the passive voice the genitive is retained after the verbs mentioned in Rule 41. Part I. Miltiades proditionis accusatus est. Corn. Nep. Milt, vii, 5. Damnati rei capitalis. Cic. Cat. Maj. 12. Obs. 1. Instead of this genitive the ablative with de is sometimes used. De majestate damnatus. Cic. Verr. i. 19. De pr&varicatione absolutus. Cic. Ep. ad Q. Frat. ii. 16. Obs. 2. Verbs of warning are also followed either by an accu- sative and de with an ablative ; or by two accusatives, of which the accusative of the thing is for the most part illud, istuc, quod, multa, res, and other like words. De cede telluris et de portion Catuli me admones. Cic. Ep. xa Q. F. iii. 1. Ridicuhim est te istuc me admonere. Tei\ Beaut, ii. 3. 112. Illud me prceclarum admones. Cic. Ep. ad Att. ix. 9. N.B. The construction remains in the passive voice. Putavi ed de re te esse admonendum. Illud te esse admonitum volo. Cic. pro Cosl. 3. Obs. 3. TJterque, nullus, neuter, alius, ambo, and superlative adjec- tives are put after them only in the ablative either with or without de, whether in the active or passive voice. Accusas furti an stupri ? Utroque or de utroque ; ambobus or de ambobus ; neutro or de neutro. De plurimis simul accusaris. § 84. The genitive after misereor and miseresco is the objective genitive denoting the feeling. (See examples Rule 42. Part I.) Miseror and commiseror are real transitives. § 85. Reminiscor, obliviseor, memini y rarely recordor, are fol- lowed by an objective genitive when they signify " to think of," or "about a thing;" but when they denote "to have," or "hold in § 86—89.] syntax. 251 mind," they become real transitives and are accordingly followed by an accusative case. (See examples Rule 43. Part I.) § 86. The verbal expression venit in mentem is nearly allied in meaning to reminiscor and memini, and hence is followed by a genitive case. Sometimes, however, it is used personally. Non minus scepe ei venit in mentem potestatis, qudm cequitatis tuce. Cic. Quint. 2. Solet mihi venire in mentem illius temporis. Cic. ad Div. vii. 3. Miser ce ubi venit in mentem mortis metus. Plaut. Rud. iii. 3. 23. § 87. In imitation of the Greek idiom the genitive is used by the poets after verbs of abstaining from, ceasing from, being freed from. Abstineto irarum calidceque rixce. Hor. Od. iii. 28. 69. Desine mollium Tandem querelarum. Hor. Od. ii. 9. 17. Cumfamulis operum solutis. Hor. Od. iii. 17. 6. Dative after the Verb. § 88. The dative after a verb points out the person or thing "for" or "in reference to" whom, &c. the action of the verb holds good, or its quality exists. Do tibi librum. — Mihi nee obest nee prodest. Obs. The general name for this dative is dativus commodi or in- commodi, of advantage or disadvantage, as the case may be. N.B. " For" in the meaning of " in behalf of" is never expressed by the dative, but by an ablative with pro. " To speak for you " is dicere pro te, not dicere tibi. § 89. Verbs denoting "to compare," such ascompdro, con- fero, are constructed not only with the dative, but also with the prepositions eum with an ablative, or ad and inter with an accusative ; compono with cum and the ablative. Hominem cum komine comparate. Cic. pro Dom. 51. Nee tantum inutilibus comparantur utilia, sed inter se quoque. Quint, iii. 83. Nee comparandus hie quidem ad ilium est. Ter. Eun. iv. 4. 14. Quern cum Democrito conferre possimus f Cic. Acad. ii. 23. Vitam inter se utriusque conferte. Cic. Ros. Com. vii. 20. Bos ad bovem colldtus. Varr. L. L. ix. 22. Componere dicta cumfactis. Sail. Jug. 48. sx 6 252 LATIN GRAMMAR. [§ 90 — 93. Obs. Many other verbs compounded with cum usually repeat that preposition, or else some other equivalent to it. Conjunge earn epistolam cum hdc. Cic. Ep. ad Div. vii. 30. Conjungere inter se. Lucr. ill. 568. TJt ea communicent cum proximis. Cic. Lcel. 19. Quum de societate multa inter se communicarent. Cic. Quint. 4. !N\B. In one passage communico is found with the ablative alone. Communicabo te semper mensd med. Plaut. Mil. Glor. i. 1. 51. § 90. Impero is often a real transitive, and so takes an ac- cusative. Faciendum nobis id, quod par entes imperant Plaut. Stick, i. 1. 53. Moram et solicitudinem impero. Quint, x. 3. !N\B. Impero is sometimes followed by both a dative and an ac- cusative. Sto exspectans, si quid mihi imperent. Ter. Eun. iii. 5. 46. Imperat ei nuptias. Quint, vii. 114. § 91. Tempero and moderor mean with accusative, "to re- gulate, arrange, order ;" with dative, "to set bounds to." (See Examples Rule 52. Part I.) § 92. Fido and confldo are sometimes followed by the ablative. Confidere alio duce, Liv. xxi. 4. ; Prudentid fidens, Cic. Off. i. 23. § 93. Many verbs compounded with the prepositions ad, ante, con (cum), in, inter, ob, post, prce, re, sub, super, are followed by a dative (whether person or thing) of that to Avhich reference is made. But if the reference be local, i, e. if motion to or from a place or person, or continuance in a place, is intended, the preposition is usually repeated with its proper case : yet sometimes, for the purpose of a more dis- tinct and thorough definition, a different preposition is used. Intempestive qui occupato adluserit. Phaed. iii. 19. 12. Hoc conducit republics. Cic. Prov. Cons. 1. Poetce impendere saxum Tantalo faciunt. Cic. Tusc. iv. 16. Omnibus terror impendet. Cic. Tusc. iv. 16. Omnibus negotiis non solum interfuit sed etiam prcefuit. Cic. Ep. ad Div. i. 6. Ea quoniam nemini obtrudi potest, itur ad me. Ter. And. i. 5. 15. Subolet hoc jam uxori, quod ego maclnnor. Plaut. Cos. iii. 2. 64. Adibam ad istum fundum. Cic. Cac. 29. Accidere in Senatum. Cic. Ep. ad Att. vii. 4. Tecto assuetus coluber succedere et umbrce. Virg. Georg. iii. 418. § 94—97.] syntax. 253 Tempestas signa cum columnis, quibus superstabant, evertit. Liv. xl. 2, Olympias non diufiliis supervixit. Justin, xxviii. 3. Obs. 1. Such of the above verbs as are transitive are also followed, necessarily, by an accusative of the object in virtue of their own inherent power. Iniquissimam pacem justissimo bello antefero. Cic. Ep. ad Div. vi. 6. Scorto postponet honesium officium. Hor. Ep. i. 18. 34. Quam igitur relinquis popular i rei-publicce laudem ? Cic. Rep. 3. Obs. 2. Benedlco " to bless," is found only in ecclesiastical writers as a transitive. In classical writers it is intransitive, and means " to speak well of:" with them it is usually written as two words. Requievit die septimo, eumque benedixit. Lactant, vii. 14. Cui bene dixit unquam bono ? Cic. Sext. 52. § 94. Invideo, " to envy," is usually followed by dative. Invident homines paribus. Cic. de Orat. ii. 52. a. But in the meaning of " to begrudge," and so " to deprive of," it takes an ablative, as well as a dative of person ; which latter is either expressed or understood. Invidere igne rogi miseris. Lucan. vii. 798. Ne hostes quidem sepulturd invident (sc. occisis). Tac. Ann. i. 22. b. With the poets it is sometimes constructed with a genitive. Neque ille Sepositi ciceris nee longoe invldit avence. Hor. Sat. ii. 6.84. § 95. Medeor is followed by a dative. Morbis corporis medemur. Sen. Clem. i. 16. § 96. Suadeo and persuadeo have usually a dative of the person with an accusative of the thing, seldom an accusative of the person alone. Tu quod ipse tibi suaseris, idem mihi persuasum putato. Cic. Ep. ad Att. xiii. 38. t Ut te suadeam, Cic. Ep. ad Div. xiii. 4. ; Quis te persuasit f En- nius in Serv. Virg. 2En. x. 10. § 97. The verbs jaceo, labor, sedeo> sto, and also volvor, when compounded with ad take sometimes, instead of a dative, an accusative dependent on the ad. Adjacent mare, Corn. Nep. Tim. ii. 1.; Fama allabitur aures, Virg. jEn. ix. 474. ; Assidendo castellum, Tac. Ann. vi. 43. ; Quum Alexander ad Achillis tumulum adstitisset, Cic. pro Arch. x. 24. ; Genua patrum advolvuntur, Sail. Fragm. 254 LATIN GRAMMAR. § 98. So accedo when used as showing a hostile intent — (i I approach for an attack." Accedit muros Romana juventus. Gell. x. 29. § 99. Verbs denoting "to differ from" are often followed by a dative case ; as well in prose as in poetry. Ipsi singuli sibi discrepantes. Cic. de Orat. iii. 50. Paulum sepultce distat inertia Celata virtus. Hor. Od. iv. 9. 29. Quod pede certo Differt sermoni sermo meras. Hor. Sat. i. 4. 48. § 100. Some verbs of taking away are also followed by a dative. Cui non auferret fructum voluptatum solitudo ? Cic. Led. 23. Classe CcBsari ereptd. Cses. B. C. iii. 111. Hortari, ut se hostifugd eriperet. Curt. v. 13. § 101. The dative of the personal pronouns is at times used superfluously as far as the strict construction of the passage ; yet it gives liveliness and an appearance of actuality to the language employed, conveying the idea that one hears the speaker using the words attributed to him. Quid enim mihi L. Paidli nepos qucerit ? Cic. Rep. i. 19. Sit mihi orator tinctus Uteris. Cic. de Orat. ii. 20. Alter tibi descendit de palatio et adibus suis. Cic. Rose. Am. 46. Suo sibi gladio huncjugulo. Ter. Ad. v. 8. 35. Quid ait tandem nobis Sannio f Ter. Ad. ii. 4. 12. Hac vobis ipsorum per biduum militia fuit. Liv. xxii. 60. Cochlea — Suo sibi succo vivunt. Plaut. Copt. i. 1. 13. U.B. This is termed dativus ethicus. § 102. Instead of an accusative with ad to denote a direc- tion or motion towards a place, the poets sometimes use the simple dative. It coelo clamor — for ad cozlum. Yirg. JEn. xi. 192. Linquimus Ortygia portus pelagoque volamus for ad pelagus. Virg. iii. 124. Accusative after the Verb. § 103. The accusative case does not, of itself, specify any particular relation ; but merely by its termination shows that it is not the nominative. It is the object of transitive verbs. § 104—106.] syntax. 255 § 104. Some transitives occasionally lay aside their tran- sitive power, and are used like the Greek middle verbs, in a reflexive force. Such are accingo, agglomero > admoveo, averto, conficio, converto, declino, dedo, deformo, do, emergo, erumpo, facesso, fero, frango, habeo, insinuo, minuo, misceo, muto, penetro, prcebeo, pracipito, propdgo, proruo, refero, tendo, transmitto, turbo, verto. Quantum mores mutaverint (sc. se). Liv. xxxix. 51. Si ventus forte remisisset (sc. se). Cses. B. C. hi. 26. Quod iter Xerxes, anno vertente (sc. se) confecerat. Corn. Nep. Ages. iv. 3. N.B. These verbs are sometimes found with se expressed. § 105. Some transitives occasionally lose the accusative of the object and are used intransitively. Such are, appello (sc. navem), duco (sc. exercitum), moveo (sc. castra). § 106. Of intransitive verbs used in a transitive force the following classes are the more common : — 1 . Those that denote a state of mental emotion or grief, or that betoken the results or effects of such emotion or grief. Such are, miror, video : also doleo, lugeo, horreo ; gemo,fleo, lacrimor, lamento, ploro, queror, &c. In the several cases of all which " at," " for," or " on account of," must be prefixed to the rendering of the accusa- tive of the object, according to the custom of the English language : as, " I wonder at," " I grieve for " or " on account of." Mirari satis hominis negligentiam non queo. Cic. Ep. ad Att. x. 5. Meum casum luctumque doluerunt Cic. pro Sest. 69. 2. An accusative of the same root : as, Quorum majoi^um nemo servitutem servivit Cic. Top, 6. Vivere duram vitam. Ter. Ad. v. 4. 5. 3. An accusative of cognate meaning. Similem insanire errorem. Hor. Sat. ii. 3. 63. (errorem = insa- niam.) X.B. The accusatives in 2. and 3. are usually, though not always, ' accompanied by an adjectival word. 4. Many verbs (at times) which denote " motion along" or " through," when compounded with circum, per, prceter, subter, super, trans. Such are, circumeo, circumfluo, circiunvado, circum' vehor, circumvenio ; percurro, pervddo, pervdgor ; prceter eo, prceter- fiuo, prcetergredior, prater vehor, prcetervolo ; subterfugio, subterlabor; 256 LATIN GRAMMAR. [§ 106. supergredior, supervehor, super volo; transgredior,transilio, transmeo, transno or more commonly trano. Quinctilius circumire arcem ccepit. Cass. B. C. ii. 28. Percurrens luna fenestras. Propert. i. 3. 31. 5. Some verbs of motion, also, compounded with ad, cum, in. Such are, adeo, I approach ; aggredior, I attack ; convenio, I meet ; coeo, I enter into ; ineo, I enter upon. Aliquot me adie?mnt. Ter. And. iii. 3. 2. Quum eum in itinere (Helvetii) convenissent. Cses. B. G. i. 27. 6. Some verbs of "motion out of:" such are, eldbor, evddo, excedo. Obvium Petelium habuere custodias Vitellii elapsum. Tac. Hist. iii. 59. Ipse angustias evadit. Liv. xxi. 32. Facto senatusconsulto, ut urbem excederent Volsci. Liv. ii. 37. NJB. Eldbor, evado, are usually followed by ex with an ablative. Pauci ex prcelio elapsi. Cass. B. G. v. 37. Ex abditis sedibus evadere. Cic. N. D. ii. 37. 7. Verbs denoting " subsidence in a plaoe," when compounded with circum. Such are, circumsedeo, circumsisto, circumsto. Mutinam circumsedent. Cic. Phil vii. 8. Plures paucos circumsistunt. Caes. B. G. iv. 26. Qui circumstant Senatum. Cic. Cat. i. 8. 8. Verbs denoting a sound, when compounded with circum. Such are circumfremo, circumlatro, circumsono, circumstrepo. Nidos circumfremunt. Sen. Cons, ad Marc. 7. Canes circumlatrare hominem incipiunt. Sen. Cons, ad Marc. 22. Clamor hostes circumsonat Liv. iii. 28. Tot humanam vitam circumstrepentibus minis. Sen. de Vit. Beat. 11. 9. Lastly the following; — allatro, alloquor, expugno, impugno, obstdeo, oppugno ; so antecedo, antecello, anteeo, antevenio, as also prasto, are sometimes found as pure transitives, and as such having an accusative case after them. Cato aUatrare ejus magnitudinem solitus erat. Liv. xxxviii. 54. Quern nemo alloqui vellet. Cic. pro Cluent. 61. Ut castellum expugnarent. Cass. B. G. ii. 9. Cato Uticam obsidere instituit. Caes. B. C. ii. 36. Quce te impugnare auderet. Cic. Ep. ad Div. iii. 12. Nemo eum amicitid antecederet. Corn. Nep. Ale. ix. 3. Ne honore nullo regium genus peregrinam stirpem antecelleret. Tac. Ann. ii. 3. Semper vos cetatem meam honoribus vestris anteistis. Liv. xxxviii. 51. § 107, 108.] syntax. 257 Homines novi per virtutem soliti erant nobilitatem antevenire. Sail. Jug. 4. Quantum Galli cceteros mortales virtute prcestarent. Liv. v. 36. § 107. There are many transitive verbs which at times with their accusative of the object do not give a complete idea, To these therefore is commonly added a second accusative further developing their meaning, and which, in fact, forms a kind of predicate of the former accusative. Such are, appello, ascisco, decldro, designo, dico, duco, existimo, efficio, facto, in- scrtbo, habeo, instituo, judico, lego, nommo, numero, pr<£beo> prcesto, puto, reddo, renuncio, saluto, vocOj fyc. O ! Spartdce, quern enim te potius appellem? Cic. Phil. xiii. 10. Numam Pompilium regem sibi populus ascivit. Cic. de Rep. ii. 13. Victorem magna prceconis voce Cloanthum declarat Virg. JEn. v. 245. Quern alio loco ipse designarit deum. Cic. N D. i. 13. Latine dicimus elocutionem, quam Grceci (ppdaiv vocant. Quint, viii. 1. Id cegre pati, quod se Q. Fabius magistrum equitum duxerit. Liv. viii. 32. - Eum, qui hoc facit, avarum possumus existimare. Cic. Verr. ii. 3. 82. Quce res confirmatiorem efficiebat exercitum. Caes. B. C. iii. 84. Ea testamento fecit hceredem jiliam. Cic. Verr. ii. 1. 43. Eosque (libellos) Rhetoricos inscribunt. Cic. de Orat. iii. 31. Nee verb habeo quemquam antiquiorem. Cic. Brut. 16. Qui me quum tutorem, turn etiam secundum hceredem instituerit. Cic. Ep. ad Div. xiii. 61. Ipsum exsulem judicdrunt. Corn. Xep. Hann. vii. 7. Me augurem Cn. Pompeius et Q. Hortensius nominaverunt. Cic. Phil. ii. 2. Sulpicium accusatorem suum numerabat, non competitorem* Cic Mur. 24. Se in his malis hominem prcebuit. Cic. Ep. ad Div. xv. 17. Prcesta te eum. Cic. Ep. ad Div. i. 6. Omnes Cat? Unas, Acidinos, postea reddidit. Cic. Ep. ad Att. iv. 3. Quern quidem sui Ccesarem salutabant. Cic. Ep. ad Att. xiv. 12. Non possidentem multa vocaveris Recti beatum. Hor. Od. iv. 9. 45. Urbem ex Antiochi patris nomine Antiochiam vocavit. Just. xv. 4. Obs. This second accusative may not inaptly be termed the ac- cusative of further definition. § 108. Cogo is followed at times by an accusative of the per- son compelled, and another of that which he is compelled to do. Quid non mortalia pectora cogis ? Yirg. 2En. iii. 56. 258 LATIN GRAMMAR, [§ 109 — 112. § 109. Traduco, trajicio, transporto take an accusative which belongs to them as transitives, and also another accu- sative dependent on the preposition trans, Ubi Ccesar certior f actus est tres jam copiarum partes Helveiios fiumen traduxisse. Caes. B. G. i. 12. Eodem die equitum magnam partem flumen transjecit. Cses. B. C. i. 55. Milites his navibus flumen transportat. Caes. B. C. i. 54. N.B. For the Greek accusative after verbs of " putting on," &c. see below § 117. Obs. Ablative after the Verb. § 110. The ablative of the instrument usually stands alone without any preposition, yet the poets prefix at times a or ab. Naturam expellas furca, tamen usque recurret. Hor. Ep. i. 10. 24. Sidereo siccata sitim collegit ab cestu. Ov. Met. vi. 344. Obs. When any thing is to be represented as effected by a person, either opera is used with a dependent genitive or pos- sessive pronoun, or else per with the accusative. Sic populo erat persuasum res accedisse ejus opera. Corn. ISTep. Ale. vi. Opera med, Q. Fabi, Tarentum recepisti. Cic. Cat. Maj. 4. Quce domi gerenda sunt, ea per Cceciliam transiguntur. Cic. Rose. Am. 51. N. B. Per quos et a quibus ? Cic. Rose. Am. 29. "By whom (i. e. by whose instrumentality) ; and from whom " (i. e. at whose com- mand). § 111. When the ablative of the agent is a "thing," it usually stands alone; when a "person," it is for the most part preceded by a or ab Periit morbo. Corn. Nep. Reges, iii. 3. Ab his initio Syracusce erant conditce. Corn. Nep. Timol. iii. 1. § 112. The ablative of the cause is usually found after verbs intransitive, or passive, denoting some state of the mind. Invidus alterius macrescit rebus opimis. Hor. Ep. i. 2. 57. Animus remissione urgetur. Cic. Tusc. Quasi, ii. 23. § 113.] SYNTAX. 259 Obs. A preventing cause is expressed by prce. Solem prce jaculorum multitudine non videbitis. Cic. Tusc. Qucest i. 42. § 113. The ablative of the manner, or way, strictly re- quires to be formed of an adjective and a substantive. Jam veniet tacito curva senecta pede. Ovid. A. Am. ii. 670. Mird celeritate rem peregit. Obs. 1. When a substantive in itself denotes the manner a de- pendent genitive may follow it instead of its being accompanied by an adjective. Ego apis Matinee more modoque Carmina Jingo. Hor. Carm. iv. 2. 27. Obs. 2. When cum is prefixed to this construction, the adjective and substantive cease to be the ablative of the manner ; and something is pointed out as added to the action denoted by the verb, and not as indicating the way or manner in which such action operates. Compare Te memorid teneo summo studio didicisse. Cic. Ep. ad Div. iv. 3. with Quum tantam multitudinem cum tanto studio adesse videamus* Cic. Pro Leg. Man. 24. In the former case the mode of learning is pointed out ; in the other, that a great multitude was present, and further, were lis- tening, &c. with great earnestness, &c. N. B. Hence it will be seen that cum is used when it is intended to express what a person has with him. From this, however, is to be excepted the description of a person's dress. Obs. 2. Cum cannot be employed with words accompanied with an adjective, which, from their own inherent meaning, convey with them the idea of the way in which a thing is carried on or out ; thus we find a>quo animo not cum aequo animo ; hdc mente not cum Tide mente ; ed lege, not cum ed lege. The same observation holds good respecting any description of the parts of the body being in any particular state, &c. : thus, nudo capite not cum nudo capite. Obs. 3. But if an ablative of itself denotes manner, cum is prefixed to it, thus forming an adverbial expression ; thus, cum curd not curd ; cum benignitate not benignitate, &c. ; yet certain ablatives which occasionally supply the place of adverbs are not attended by cum; as jure, injuria, ird, fraude, &c. ET. B. Instead of cum, per is sometimes used with an accusative. Multa dolo, pier aque per vim audebantur. Liv. xxxix. 8. 260 LATIN GRAMMAR. [§ 114, 115. § 114. Verbs of buying, selling, valuing, and estimating, are followed by an ablative of the price if a fixed sum be named, or a substantive alone be employed. Teque sibi generam Tethys emat omnibus undis. Virg. Georg. i. 31. Talento inimicum mini emi, amicum vendidi. Plaut. Trin. iv. 3. 49. {Modium tritici) cestimant denariis tribus. Cic. Verr. ii. 3. 92. Virtutem cestimat annis. Hor. Ep. ii. 1. 48. a. But when the price, &c. is expressed only in general terms, the genitives of the adjectives specified in Rule 68. Part I. are employed. To these may be added magni, permagni, majoris, parvi, plurimi, minimi, maximi. Multi and majoris are seldom found. Magni existimans interesse ad decus. Cic. N. D. i. 4. MuUo majoris alapa mecum veneunt. Phsed. ii. 5. 25. Obs. 1. Pretii is sometimes found expressed with pluris. Neque pluris pretii coquum, quam villicum habeo. Sail. Jug. 85. Obs. 2. To this head must be referred the idiomatic expressions cequi bonique facio, Ter. Heaut. iv. 5. 40. " To take a thing calmly and kindly : " cequi bonique dicere, Ter. " To propose a thing justly and properly," boni consulere, Quint, i. 6. 32. (and frequently elsewhere). " To interpret favourably," or, " to be satisfied with." b. Yet the following ablatives are found, vili, paulo, magno, per- magno, plurimo, parvo, minimo, duplo, nimio, dimidio, nihilo, non- nihilo. Instructam vili vendis, Amcene, domum. Mart. xii. 67. 10. Decumas permagno vendidi. Cic. Verr. ii. 3. 39. § 115. Intransitive verbs denoting plenty or want; i.e. those which signify to have an abundance of, or the reverse, take an ablative pointing out wherein the abundance, &c. consists : and transitive verbs, denoting to fill, to load, to endow, to deprive, take an ablative pointing out that where- with their object is filled, &c. Amore abundas, Antipho. Ter. Phorm. i. 3. 11. Communi sensu plane caret. Hor. Sat. i. 3. 66. Sylla omnes suos divitiis explevit. Sail. Vino et epulis onerati. Sail. Jug. 86. Sanguine Trojano dotabere. Virg. 2En. vii. 318. Apollonium omni argento spolidsti. Cic. Verr. ii. 4. 17. Obs. Of those verbs of this kind which are mentioned at Eule 71. Part I., as being followed by a genitive case, the more common are compleo, impleo, egeo, indigeo. While in the poets others also are classed with them, such as obsaturor, satior, &c. § 116—118.] SYNTAX. 261 Completus mercatorum career. Cic. Verr. ii. 5. 37. Tuis oraculis Chrysippus totum volumen implevit. Cic. de Biv. ii. 56. Ne quis ex plebe auxilii egeret. Caes. B. G. vi. 11. Quum Lacedcemonii indigerent pecunid. Corn. Nep. Ages. vii. 2. Tfo 2s£ws obsaturabere. Ter. Heaut. iv. 7. 28. Qwzm satiata ferince Bextera ccedis erat. Ov. ilfe£. vii. 808. § 116. Some verbs which signify to provide or supply a person with a thing have the same force if they are repre- sented as providing a thing for a person. Hence they have a twofold construction : viz. either an accusative of the per- son and an ablative of the thing ; or an accusative of the thing and a dative of the person. Hinc Me est annulus, quo tu istum in condone dondsti. Cic. Verr. ii. 3. 80. Prcedam militibus donat. Cic. B. G. vii. 11. Animum (deus) circufndedit corpore. Cic. Univ. 6. Concioni satellites armatos circumdedit. Liv. xxxiv. 27. Obs. To this construction must be referred Virg. 2En. vi. 229. Ter socios purd circumtulit undd. Where circumtulit is used in a middle or reflexive force, as if se were to be supplied. § 117. Verbs denoting to clothe with, and to put on, have a peculiar construction. In the active voice they are followed either by an accusative of the person and an abla- tive of the thing ; or by a dative of the person with an ac- cusative of the thing : iii the passive they are followed by an accusative of the thing. Pomis se induit arbos. Virg. Georg. iv. 143. Cui quum Deianira tunicam induisset. Cic. Tusc. Qucest ii. 8. Induiturque atras vestes. Ov. Met. vi. 568. Obs. The accusative after the passive form is called the Greek accusative. Akin to this construction are the adverbial expres- sions magnam partem, maximam partem ; also, vicem with a de- pendent genitive or a possessive pronoun. We also find Cyclopa moveri, &c. § 118. Fungor, fruor, utor, potior., vescor, are found in early Latin followed by an accusative. Militare munus fungens. Corn. Nep. Bat. i. 4. Hoccine me miserum, non licere meo modo ingenivm frui ? Ter. Heaut ii. 4. 21. Ne Silius quidem quicquam utitur. Cic. Ep. ad Att. xii. 22. 262 LATIN GRAMMAR. [§ 119, 120. Semper habiti sunt fortissimi, qui summam imperii potirentur. , Corn. Nep. Eum. iii. 4. Ad extremum inopice venere, ut infirmissimos suorum vescerentur, Tac. Agr. 28. Obs. Utor, when it has another ablative, in apposition with its own, signifies, " to have." Hannibal Sosio usus est doctore. Corn. Nep. Hann. xvii. 3. § 119. An ablative absolute is added to a proposition when a new subject is introduced, so that it stands in the place of an inserted clause or an accessory proposition. This ablative, as its name implies, is independent of the previous construction, and is influenced by nothing external to itself. It con- sists of an ablative, either of a substantive or pronoun, together with another ablative ; either, 1. of a participle in concord with it ; or 2. as there is no present participle of sum in use, of an adjective predicated of it ; or 3. an ablative of a substantive, usually ex- pressing the action of some verb, in apposition with it. According to circumstances, which vary of course with the construction, it may be rendered by " being," " having been," " as," " when," " after," " since that," " although," and the finite verb of the participle. Exercitu in hibernis composite*. Sail. Jug. 103. Vindice nullo. Ov. Met. i. 89. Nil desperandum Teucro duce et auspice Teucro. Hor. Od. i. 7. 27. Obs. A single ablative, when denoting the state of the weather, is sometimes used absolutely ; as, sereno, " the sky being calm ; " austro, " the wind being south ; " tranquillo, " the water being calm." Tenses, Periphrastic Conjugation, and the Succession op Tenses in dependent Clauses. Tenses. § 120. The tenses are divided into three classes respec- tively denoting time, 1. Present; 2. Past; 3. Future. 1. Present — time present, and action now going on. Perfect — time present, and action now completed. 2. Imperfect — time past, and action then going on. Pluperfect — time past, and action then completed. 3. Future — time to come, and action that will then take place. Future -perfect — time to come, and action that will then have taken place. N.B. In the case of intransitive and passive verbs, " condi- tion" or "state" must be substituted for "action." § 121.] SYNTAX. 263 § 121. Peculiar use, &c, of some Tenses of the Indicative Mood. 1 . The Present is sometimes used in animated narrative for the purpose of bringing the past more vividly before the mind, repre- senting it hereby as if it were actually now taking place. Thus used, it is called the " Historic Present." Domi creant decern prcetores. Corn. ISTep. Milt. iv. 4. a. When it is wished to denote the instantaneous arrival of something yet future, the present is occasionally used. Stantes plaudebant in rejictd : quid arbitramur in vera fuisse fac- turos? Cic. Lcel. 7. 2. The Imperfect sometimes represents an action, &c. either as continued, or often repeated, or being begun. Vulpes appetebat uvam (Phsed. iv. 2. 2.) " Kept seeking, &c." Veniebat in theatrum (Corn. Nep. Timol. iv. 2.) " Used often, &c." Plebes novos extollebat (Sail. Jug. 65.) " Was beginning, &c." 3. The Perfect Indicative (but not subjunctive) is used as the narrative tense, in the force of the Greek aorist, pointing out merely what is past without reference to the time of its occurrence. Thus used, it is called the " Historic Perfect." Subito febris decessit, leviorque morbus esse cozpit. Corn. Nep Att. xxii. 3. a. The perfect is also used by the poets and those who imitate their style in another force of the Greek aorist, viz. : — to express a customary action. Illius immensce ruperunt Tiorrea messes. Virg. Georg. i. 49. Rege incolumi, mens omnibus una est; Amisso, rupere fidem, constructaque mella Diripuere ipsce, et crates solvere favorum. Yirg. Georg. iv. 212. Clarorum virorum facta moresque posteris trader e, antiquitus usi~ tatum, ne nostris quidem temporibus cetas omisit. Tac. Agr. 1. 4. The Future is used, and correctly, in Latin, where in English the present is employed. Naturam si sequemur ducem, nunquam aberrabimus. Cic. Off. i. 28. " If we shall follow ;" whereas the English idiom is " if we follow." Quum legent. Corn. Nep. Pr&f. 1. 5. The Future-Perfect points out something that will have taken place, when something else has taken place. De qua vereri non ante desinam,, quam illam excisam esse cogno- vero, Cic. Cat. Maj. 6. 264 LATIN GEAMMAR. [§ 122, 123. a. Occasionally the future-perfect is used in the place of the simple future, involving however the idea that the action, &c. will be very soon past and completed. Clamor et primus impetus castra ceperit. Liv. xxv. 38. Quid faciam nunc, si Tresviri me in carcerem compegerint? Piaut. Amph. i. 1. 3. Alio loco de aratorum animo et injuriis rider o. Cic. Terr. ii. 61. § 1 22. Employ ment of Tenses in Epistolary Correspondence. It is a peculiarity of the epistolary style in Latin that the writer carrying in his mind, as it were, the times when his letter will be read, uses those tenses which the reader would employ in reference to the things contained in it. When, therefore, the writer would represent something as taking place at the time of his writing he uses the imperfect ; something past with reference to such time, the pluperfect. For instance, he would say, Multa habebam, quce scri- berem. Namque audit ram, 8fc. : because the person who received the letter would thus express himself respecting the matters named by his correspondent : Turn, quum heme epistolam scribebat, multa habebat, quce scriberet. Namque audierat. frc. But when any thing is to be mentioned generally, without reference to the time at which the letter was being written, and merely as an action completed for the receiver of the letter, the perfect is used where in common con- versation the present would be employed. Hunc librum ad te de Senectute misimus, says Cicero (Cat. Maj. 1.) to Atticus ; because Atticus would say when he received it, Hunc librum ad me de Se- nectute misit Cicero. In all other cases the usual modes of expres- sion are followed. Periphrastic Conjugation. § 123. In order to denote the future with reference to a certain given time the future participle is used in combin- ation with a tense of sum ; 1. 1. TTith the present, sum, to denote the future action as now on the point of commencement. Sum moniturus, " I am about, or, now on the point of advising," or " I intend now," &c. 2. TTith the imperfect, eram, to denote that the future action was about commencing at a certain period in time past. Eram moniturus, " I was about to advise, then," or " I intended then," &c. (when or if, &c. as specified in some dependent clause). 3. With the perfect fui, to denote the future action as contem- plated at some indefinite past time. Fui moniturus, " I have been," or M was about to advise," or " I intended, &c." § 124, 125.J syntax. 265 4. With the pluperfect, fueram, to denote the future action as contemplated before a certain past time. Fueram moniturus, " I had been (i. e. before such a time) about to advise," or " I had intended, &c." Occasionally, especially in the poets, it is used with this tense in precisely the same force as with the imperfect. 5. With the future, ero, to denote that the future action will be contemplated at some future period. JEro moniturus, " I shall be about (at such a time) to advise." 6. With the future-perfect, fuero, in a somewhat stronger force than with the simple future. This combination is exceedingly rare. N.B. This formation corresponds to that of the Greek /xeaXw, with a dependent infinitive. Obs. In the passive, which has no corresponding future participle, the idea is differently expressed : viz. est in eo^ erat in eo, &c. ut with a dependent clause. II. In the same way the future passive participle in ndus is used to denote future necessity. This construction may be termed the Passive Periphrastic Conjugation. Use of the Tenses of the Subjunctive Mood. § 124. The subjunctive mood has only the tenses men- tioned in 1. and 2. § 120. These have the same force with the indicative, as there explained. Obs. 1. The historical tense of the subjunctive is the imperfect. Obs. 2. The periphrastic future is also formed by the future participle and the four tenses of the subjunctive of sum. See § 125. N.B. The way in which the future tenses are made good in the subjunctive is explained below, § 126. Tenses in dependent Clauses. § 125. As there must be a harmony of time between two actions, &c. having mutual reference to each other, those tenses only can follow each other in the way of dependence which belong to the same class ; hence by reference to the classification of the tenses § 120, it will be seen that where the subjunctive mood is required in a dependent clause, the N 266 LATIN GRAMMAK. [§ 126. present and perfect indicative must be followed by the pre- sent or perfect subjunctive; the imperfect and pluperfect in- dicative by the imperfect or pluperfect subjunctive. For instance, it may be said: Audio quid facias ; audio quid feceris : audivi quid facias; audivi quid feceris : audiebam quidfaceres; audiebam quid fecisses : audiveram quid facer es ; audiveram quid fecisses. a. The historic present and perfect being regarded as historic tenses are followed by the imperfect and pluperfect subjunctive. Omnem sermonem tribuimus M. Catoni, quo majorem auctoritatem haberet oratio. Cic. Cat Maj. 1. Persuadet Castico, ut regnum occuparet. Ca?s. B. G. i. 3. Omnem aciem suam rliedis et carris circumdederunt, ne qua spes infuga relinqueretur. Caes. B. G. i. 16. PMlippidem Lacedcemonem miserunt, ut nunciaret qudm celeri opus esset auxilio. Corn. Nep. Milt. iv. 3. b. The two futures of the indicative mood are followed by either a present or perfect subjunctive as the case may be. Thus for in- stance it may be said, audiam quid facias or feceris; audivero quid facias or feceris. § 126. From what is stated at § 124, it will be seen that the subjunctive mood has no future tenses of its own. This deficiency is supplied by the other tenses of the subjunctive ; the present and imperfect supplying the place of the simple future; the perfect and pluperfect that of the future perfect. Hence when future time is spoken of in the leading clause, one of the above tenses will be employed in the dependent clause ; but which of them, will be determined by the lead- ing verb of the proposition, and also by the consideration whether the future action is to be regarded as complete or not. For instance, it may be said, Audio (or audivi) te, si adveniat (or advenerii) Quintus, magnopere esse gavisurum ; but audiebam (or audiveram) le, si adveniret (or advenisset) Quintus, magnopere esse gavisurum. Nee metuam quid de me judicet hceres. Quod non plura datis invenerit. Hor. Ep< ii. 2. 191. Non ignarus, prout prima cessissent, terror em cceteris fore. Tac. Agr. 18. Qui nisi decedat atque exercitum deducat, sese ilium pro hoste habi- turum. Caes. B. G. i. 44. Obs. The four tenses of the conjugatio periphrastica, in the sub junctive mood, are also comprehended as futures under the abov< explanation. § 127—129.] syntax. 267 § 127. The employment, in a dependent clause, of the per- fect subjunctive in the force of the historic tense is very rare, and quite an exception to the general rule of the language, Indeed when thus employed it seems to partake so far of the character of the perfect indicative, as to convey the in- timation that the circumstance is spoken of as a fact which came under the writer's own cognizance. (Compare § 135.) Diligentissimd conquisitione fecit, ne cujus alterius sacrilegium res- publico, quam Neronis senserit. Tac. Agr. 6. MOODS. The Indicative Mood. § 128. The Indicative Mood is used to make an assertion, to state a fact, or to put a direct or independent question. It is the mood which a writer employs to give his own senti- ments, &c. (emtio recta). Imperative Mood. § 129. The Imperative Mood denotes a command. A wish, entreaty, or exhortation is expressed by the subjunctive. See below, § 136. The imperative mood has two tenses : I. the present ; and II. the future. I. The present tense implies that the command is to be executed at once, and has no reference to any antecedent condition. Redite in suffragia, et cogitate helium Punicum in Italia et ducem esse Hannibalem. Liv. xxxvi. 22. Dona prcesentis cape Icetus horce et Linque severa. Hor. Od. iii. 9.27. a. It also points out a command, obedience to which is to begin now, and to extend into future time. Vive memor quam sis cevi brevis. Hor. Sat. ii. 6. 97„ b. Dico, duco, facio, fero, make die, due, fac, fer. Scio has no present form, sci. Instead of it the future form scito is used. N2 268 LATIN GRAMMAR. [§ 129. II. The future tense is employed when reference is made to time following, whether more or less remote : and denotes what is to be executed, &c, when something else, some pre- vious condition or action, has taken place. Ubi ad Diance veneris, ito ad dextram. Ter. Ad. iv. 2. 43. Qui si videbitur eruditiils disputare, attribuito Gratis Uteris. Cic. Cat. Maj. 1. Obs. 1. It is not necessary that the previous condition or action should be expressed in words : it is sufficient that it is implied by the context. Frater venit ex Salerno : ego Mi obviam pergam ; vos hue decumd venitote. Cic. ad Herenn. iv. 51. — i.e. Go now ; and come again by and bye, at dinner time. Obs. 2. The respective forces and values of the two tenses of the imperative are clearly brought out in the following passage : — Quapropter, Quirites, expectate legatorum reditum, et paucorum dierum molestiam devorate. Qui quum redierint, si pacem afferent, cupidum me — si bellum, providum — judicatote. Cic. Phil. vi. 6. Here expectate, devorate apply to present time irrespective of any thing there is to take place ; but judicatote points to what must be done when the legati shall have returned. Note. This view of the imperative mood, which is that of the ancient grammarians, was rejected by Vossius, Perizonius, and others, who substituted for it the theory that the second, i. e. as here called, the future form, was only a stronger mode of expres- sion, implying necessity rather than a mere command. But that idea probably had its origin in their not bearing in mind the re- lative value of the indicative and imperative moods ; for as the former makes an assertion, &c, its future points out what will certainly take place (see page 23. Part I.) ; but, as the latter gives a command, its future denotes that the thing commanded is to take place hereafter. The poets, indeed, are not always bound strictly by the above rules : they assume in this respect, as in others, a latitude of expression not needed nor claimed by writers in prose. a. The imperative future is especially used in legal instru- ments, such as wills, contracts, laws, &c, because that in them future time is implied. Filius mihi heres esto : si heres non erit, sive erit et intra puber- totem decesserit, tunc Caius heres esto. Modestinus de Testamentis. Quarta esto partis Ulysses hares. Hor. Sat. ii. 5. 100. Amicitia regi Antiocho cum populo Romano his legibus et conditi- onibus esto. Liv. xxxviii. 8. § 130, 131.] SYNTAX. 269 Impius ne audeto placare donis iram deum. Cic. de Legg. ii. 9. N.B. All the laws of the Twelve Tables have the obligatory part expressed by the future imperative. § 130. A negative command is expressed by ne or neve, not non or neque. Semen nejacito. Plin. H. N. xviii. 77. Belli gerendi jus Antiocho ne esto. Liv. xxxviii. 8. Obs. 1. Yet non is sometimes used with an imperative by the poets. Vos quoque non caris aures onerate lapiUis. Ovid. A. Am. iii. 129. Obs. 2. Ne, with a present subjunctive, is used by the poets, unless something is to be strongly emphasized ; when it is, they employ ne with imperative. Ne post conferas culpam in me. Ter. Eun. ii. 3. 96. Ne parce arena particulam dare. Hor. Od. i. 28. 23. Ne queer e profecto Quern casum portenta ferunt. Virg. 2En. viii. 532. § 131. In the place of the imperative, the following modes of expression are sometimes adopted : 1. A positive command is paraphrased by cura ut, fac ut, facito ut, or fac alone, (or their plurals) followed by a present or perfect subjunctive. Cura ut valeas, Cic. Ep. ad Div. xiv. 5. Curate ut valeatis. Cic. Ep. ad Div. xiv. 6. Quidquid indagdris facito ut sciam. Cic. Ep. ad Att. ii. 4. Facite, judices, ut recordemini. Cic. pro Flacc. 24. Fac cogites in quanta calamitate sis. Sail. Cat. 44. Domi adsitis facite. Ter. Eun. iii. 2. 53. 2. A prohibition or negative command is paraphrased either by noli, or nolite, and a dependent infinitive : or by fac ne, cave ne, or cave alone, sometimes vide ne (or their plurals), followed by a pre- sent or perfect subjunctive. Noli putare, mi Cicero, me hoc tuis auribus dare. Cic. Ep. ad Div. xii. 16. Nolite, judices, existimare. Cic. pro Flacc. 42. Si insidias fieri libertati vestrce intelligetis, nolitote dubitare, Sfe. Cic. de Leg. Agr. ii. 6. Fac ne quid aliud cures. Cic. Ep. ad Div. xvi. 11. Cave ne minuas. Hor. Sat. ii. 3. 178. Cave existimes. Cic. Ep. ad Div. ix. 29. Vide ne tu pejus consulas. Corn. Nep. Epam. x. 2. N 3 270 LATIN GRAMMAR. [§ 132, 133. Subjective Mood. § 132. The Subjunctive Mood is used to express not a fact, but a conception of the mind. Hypothetical and Conditional Clauses, and those containing an Inference or Conclusion, § 133. 1. "When a supposition or condition is to be represented as something which does or may exist, &c, the present or perfect subjunctive, preceded by si, or one of its compounds, is employed in the limiting clause (protasis'). Si velit, " if he wishes," i. e. supposing he wishes, or if, under such circumstances, he wishes ; hence is supplied the inference that he does or may, at least, wish. Si voluerit, " if he wished," i. e. supposing he wished, or if, under such circumstances, he wished, — implies that he did, or, at any rate, might have wished. So, also, when an inference or conclusion is to be drawn, the subjunctive without si is employed in the leading or principal clause (apodosis). Faciat "he may do it," fecerit, "he may have done it," — intimate that he may do it, or actually does it ; he might have done it, or actually did it. JEquabilitatem vitce servare non possis, si aliorum virtutem imitans omittas tuam. Cic. de Off. i. 31. Obs. Hence, as in either instance the inference is in the affirma- ative, the indicative is sometimes used in the principal clause instead of the subjunctive. The distinction is, that more of actuality is" imparted to the expression by the use of the indi- cative ; inasmuch as any mental operation, although presumed to be about to be realised, cannot be stamped with the same positive value as what is given as a fact. Memoria minuitur, nisi earn exerceas, aut si sis naturd tardior. Cic. Cat. Maj. 7. 2. But when a supposition or condition, or when an inference or conclusion is to be represented as something that does not or cannot exist, the imperfect or pluperfect subjunctive alone is used under the same conditions as in the former case. Moreover, here, the imperfect is used of time present ; the pluperfect of time past. Si vellet, if he wished, but he does not : si voluisset, if he had wished, out he did not. Si omnia incolumia manerent, tamen, si quid ex improviso acci- disset, vos implorarem. Sail. Jug- 14. Si Roscius has inimicitias cavere potuisset, viveret Cic. Rose. Am. 6. Xecassem jam te verberibus, nisi iratns essem. Cic. de Rep. i. 38. § 134— 136. syntax. 271 Independent Clauses. § 134. The present subjunctive is used in independent clauses to modify an expression or assertion ; yet with a force very closely bordering upon that of the indicative. Perfectd quidem simus sapientid, si nihil habeat res vitii. Cic. Lcel. 11. Occldite inermem : Hoc cupiant patres Tarquiniusque pater. Ov. Fast. ii. 694. § 135. In like manner the perfect subjunctive may be used as a modified perfect indicative ; yet more generally as a modified future indicative. Hoc pertinere vere ad illos dixerim. Phsed. i. 13. 18. Ipsos Germanos indigenas crediderim. Tac. Germ. 2. De Menandro loquor, nee tamen excluserim alios. Quint, i. 8. Nee ar are terr am facile per suaseris. Tac. Germ. 14. N.B. When used as in §§ 134, 135., it is called subjunctivus potentialis, § 136. The subjunctive is used, like the Greek optative, to express a wish or desire. 1. The second and third persons of the present, and the third person of the perfect, are used in positive clauses in this force. Placide quiescas. Tac. Agr. 46. Aspera Rubigo, parcas cerealibus herbis. Ft tremat in summd Iceve caciimen humo. Ov. Fast. iv. 911. Hcbc prima lex in Amicitid sanciatur. Cic. LceL Fictis jocari nos meminerit fabulis. Phaed. i. Prol. 7. Sibi habeant arma. Cic. Cat. Maj. 16. Di vortant bene. Ter. Fun. ii. 3. 98. 2. In negative clauses the second person of the perfect is em- ployed when a definite person is addressed, but the second person of the present when an assumed or indefinite one : the third person of the present is also used in negative clauses, but rarely the third person of the perfect. Qui tamen dicat pro illo ne feceris, non feceris, in idem incidit vitium ; quia alter um negandi est, alter um vetandi. Quint, i. 5. Quid absit, ne requiras. Cic. Cat. Maj. 10. Ne terreat vanus aspectus. Tac. Agr. 32. Nemo contenderit. Tac. Ann. iv. 32. Obs. Though in the best classical prose writers ne is employed and not non, yet non is found in post-Augustan writers, and in the poets. n 4 272 LATIN GRAMMAR. [§ 137 — I4L Non dubitaveris. Sen. Q. N. i. 3. Non etiam sileas. Hor. Sat. ii. 5. 91. Non audita tuumjecur ulcer et ulla. Hor. JEJp. i. 18. 72. N.B. When used as in 1, 2. it is called subjunctivus optativus. 3. The first person plural of the present expresses a mutual ad- hortation, in which the speaker includes himself as well as the per- son addressed. Eamus gratulatum patri. Gell. xii. 1. N.B. This is called subjunctivus adhortativus. § 137. The subjunctive is also employed to signify an ad- mission or concession. Non (senectus) faciat ea, quce juvenes (faciunt). Cic. Cat Maj. 6. N.B. This is called subjunctivus concessivus. § 138. Moreover when it is assumed that something is or is not, does or does not exist, &c. but which nevertheless must be passed over and not made the ground of discussion or dispute, the subjunctive present is used. Sint sane (dii) ex atomis. Cic. Nat. Deor. i. 24. Ne sit sane summum malum dolor : malum certe est. Cic. Tusc. ii. 5. § 139. In independent questions to which a negative reply is expected (those introduced by an indefinite relative pro- noun or adverb), the subjunctive is used. Quid dicam ? " What can I say ?" (Nothing). Quid non dicam? " What can I not say ?" (Not nothing or every thing.) Quid commemorem ? " Why should I relate ?" (I will not). § 140. In questions relating to something not to be thought of, an elliptical mode of expression is employed in conjunc- tion with ut and the subjunctive mood. Egone ut, te inter pellem ? (Shall I interrupt you ? It must not be thought of! ) i. e. fierine potest ut ego, 8fc. § 141. In oratio obliqua (i. e. in the reporting another's words) the subjunctive is used. Neve pralii unius aut alterius eventu pavescerent Tac. Agr. 15. Si quid vellent, ante diem Idus Aprilis reverterentur. Cses. B. G. § 142.] SYNTAX. 273 Dependent Clauses* § 142. The subjunctive is used in dependent clauses which denote, 1. The object or design of what has preceded. Such are introduced by ut, uti, that ; ne, utne, ut non, that not; quin, but that ; quominus, that not, &c. Memmius populo persuadet, ut L, Cassius ad Jugurtham mittere- tur. Sail. Jug. 32. Rutilum pr&misit, uti locum antecaperet. Sail. Jug. 50. Moneo hortorque, ne tantum scelus impunitum omittatis. Sail. Jug. 31. Addendum est, ut ne criminibus inferendis delectetur. Cic. Lcel. Itafit, ut non item in oratione et versu numerus exstet. Cic. Or at. 60. Neque abest suspicio, quin ipse mortem consciverit. Caes. B. G. i. 31. Si te infirmitas valetudinis tenuit quominus ad ludos venires. Cic. Ep. ad Div. vii. 1. Obs. Sometimes ut is omitted. Huic Sp. Albinus persuadet, regnum Numidice ab Senatu petat. Sail. Jug. 35. Bomilcari imperat insidiatores Massivce paret. Sail. Jug. 35. 2. A purpose or intention. Such are those introduced by ut, in order that ; ne, ut ne, in order that not ; quo, in order that ; quo ne, quomodo ne, in order that not, &c. Exploratores per castra Scipio circumduci jussit dimittique, ut re- nunciarent Hannibali quce vidissent. Eutrop. iii. 22. Considera, ne in alienissimum tempus cadat adventus tuus. Cic. Ep. ad Div. xv. 14. Equidem soleo dare operam, ut ne quis alius adsit. Cic. de Orat. ii. 24. Fraus mea quid petiit, nisi quo tibi jungerer uni. O v. Her. xx. JLo. Moxque ad aram, quo ne Jiostis dolum persentisceret, aversusque a duce adsistit. Diet Cret. iv. 11. Qumritis maximis sumpiibus faciendis, quomodo ne tributa confe- ratis. Rutil. Lup. i. 9. ^ Obs. Metuo, timeo, vereor, are constructed as if they involved an 44 intention." Ne, after them, is rendered " that ;" ut, " that not." , In the former instance is conveyed the idea that something will happen, which it is wished should not happen ; in the latter that something will not happen, which it is wished should happen. Metuebat ne indicarent. Cic. pro Mil. 21. N 5 274 LATIN GRAMMAR. [§ 142. Ornamenta, qua loeavi, metuo ut possim recipere. Plaut. Cure, i\< 1. 3. Non times ne locum perdas. Quint, vi. 3. Timeo ut sustineas labores. Cic. Ep. ad Div. xiv. 2. Veritus ne siti exercitus conjiceretur. Sail. Jug. 50. Ut ferula ccedas mentum majora subire Non vereor. Hor. Sat. i. 3. 120. !N\B. The above verbs are sometimes followed by an infinitive. But this is only when they express a mere state of mind, irre- spective altogether of any intention, &c. or mental operation. 3. A consequence, effect, or condition. Such are preceded by ut, that, so that, on condition that ; ut non, so that not, &c. Tarquinius sic Servium diligebat, ut is ejus vulgb liaberetur filius. Cic. de Rep. ii. 21. Aristoteles quidem ait omnes ingeniosos melancholicos esse ; at ego me tardiorem esse nonmoleste feram. Cic. Tnsc. i. 33. Quis est qui velit, ut neque diligat quemquam, circumfluere omnibus rebus f Cic. Lcel. 14. Neque leves sunt, qui se duo soles vidisse dicunt; ut non tarn fides non habenda, qudm ratio queer enda sit. Cic. de Hep. i. 10. 4. An exception or limitation. Such are those preceded by ut, etsi, licet, quamquam, quamvis, although ; nedum, much less ; dum, dummodo, dam modo, modo, provided that, &c, Veriun, ut ita sit, tainen non potes. Cic. Verr. ii. 3. 64. TJbi, etsi aliquid adjectum numero sit, magna certe ccedes fuit. Liv. iii. 8. Vita brevis est, licet supra mille annos exeat. Sen. de Brev. Vit.6. Quamquam ne id quidem suspicionem coitionis habuerii. Cic. pro Plane. 22. Homines, quamvis in turbidis rebus sint, tamen interdum animis re* laxantur. Cic. Phil. ii. 16. Optimis temporibus nee P. Popillius nee Q. Metellus vim tribmi- ciam sustinere potuerunt ; nedum his temporibus sine vestrd sapientid salvi esse possimus. Cic. pro Cluent. 35. Licet lascivire, dum nihil metuas. Cic. de Rejy. i. 40. Qui omnia recta et honesta negligunt, dummodo potentiam conse- quantur. Cic. de Off. iii. 21. Med nil refert, dum patiar modo. Ter. Eun. ii. 3. 38. Manent ingenia senibus, modo permaneat studium et industria. Cic. Cat. Maj. 7. Obs. Quanquam strictly takes the indicative^ yet is put by late writers for quamvis, and so governs the subjunctive : while quamvis is put for quanquam and has the indicative. Quamquam id est minimi probandum. Cic. de Rep. i. 26. § 143. J SYNTAX. 275 JErat inter eos dignitate regid, quamvis carebat nomine. Corn. Nep. Milt ii. 3. 5. A wish. Such are introduced by si, utinam, " would that. ' O ! mihi prceteritos refer at si Jupiter annos. Virg. 2En. viii. 560. Utinam liberorum nostrorum mores non ipsos perderemus. Quint. i. 2. 6. A cause or reason. Such are preceded by quia, quod, quoniam, " because : " when the writer states any thing as a mere conception, or as something he has heard from another. Prcecepit ut voluptatem ipsam per se, quia voluptas sit, optandam putet Cic. Tusc, v. 33. . Mirari Cato se aiebat, quod non rideret aruspex, aruspicem quum vidisset. Cic. de Div. ii. 25. Quoniam. ipse pro se dicer e non posset. Corn. aSTep. Them. vii. 5. N.B. When the writer introduces a clause with the above, de- signing at the same time to assign the reason as his own, the in- dicative is used. Urbs, quce quia postrema cedificata est, Neapolis nominatur. Cic. Verr. ii. 4. 53. Fecisti mihi pergratum, quod Serapionis librum mihi misisti. Cic. Ep. ad Att. ii. 4. Quoniam res in id discrimen adducta est. Cic. Phil. iii. 11. § 143. The subjunctive is further used, 1. In clauses following those constructed with the infinitive and accusative, provided that the subjunctive clause gives the thoughts or (in indirect narrative) the words of the person spoken of, or if it essentially belongs to the preceding state- ment. Mirari solitum C. Fabricium, quod audisset a Thessdlo Cined. Cic. Cat. Maj. 13. Diem se ad deliberandum sumpturum ; si quid vellent, ante diem Idus Apriles reverierentur. Cses. B. G.i.7. 2, In clauses introduced into a proposition of which the verb is in the subjunctive, provided this subjunctive clause belongs essentially to the preceding one, defining some cir- cumstance, condition, &c, of the subject of it. Quoniam, qui primi Wxenum transgressi G alios expulerint, ut nunc Tungri tunc Germani vocati sint. Tac. Germ. 2. Xon dubitare, quin de obsidibus, qui apud eum sint, supplicium sumat. Quum id, quod antea deneg asset, ultrb polliceretur. Cses. B. G. i. 32. n 6 276 LATIN GRAMMAR. [§ 144, 145. 3. In clauses following the statement of a fact (which is of course in the indicative) provided that the subjunctive clause gives the idea not of the speaker, writer, &c, but of some one else from whom he heard it, &c. (indirect narrative.) Manno tres filios adsignant : e quorum nominibus proximi Oceano Ingcevones, medii Hermiones, ceteri Istcevones, vocentur. Tac. Germ. 2. Earum rerum exemplum ex similitudine capiebat ineuntis cetatis ; quod summi puerorum amores soepe una cum prcetextd ponerentur* Cic. Lcel. 10. Obs. If the speaker or writer would give the idea or statement as his own, the indicative is used. Quce quidem res Ccesari voluptatem attulit, quod hominem sibi restitutum videbat. Caes. B. G. i. 53. Indirect Questions. § 144. An indirect question has its verb in the subjunctive, because it reports the language of another. Qucerit ex proximo vicino, num ferice qucedom piscatorum essent, Cic. Off. iii, 58. Quum ex cceteris captivis queer eret (Ccesar), quam oh rem Ario- vistus prcelio non decertaret. Cges. B. G. i. 50. Relative Clauses. § 145. The subjunctive mood is used in the dependent clause in combination with the relative pronoun; I. When the principal clause contains one of the demon- strative pronouns, is, hie, &c. ; also talis, tantus, aliquis, ejus- modi, or an adjective preceded by tarn. In this construction the relative and the preceding word are equivalent to " such an one, &c. . . . as," " some one, &c. . . . who." Ea nolui scribere, quce nee indocti intelligere possent nee docti legere curarent. Cic. Acad. i. 12. Hcec habui, de amicitid quce dicer em. Cic. Lcel. 27. Talem te esse oportet, qui prbnum te ah impiorum civium societate sejungas. Cic. Ep. ad Div. x. 6. Nulla acies humani ingenii tanta est, quce penetrare in ccelum possit. Cic. Acad. ii. 39. Nunc dicis aliquid, quod ad rem pertineat Cic. Rose. Am. 18. _ Quce civitas tarn Jirma est^ quce non odiis possit everti f Cic. Lcel 7. § 145.] SYNTAX. 277 Obs. The same construction obtains when the demonstrative is not expressed, but is to be supplied. Dumnorigi custodes ponit, ut quce agat, quibuscum loquatur, scire possit. Caes. B. G. i. 20. 2. After all indefinite and general expressions, in order to point out the person or thing indefinitely referred to. Such expressions are, est, sunt, fyc. qui; reperiuntur, fyc, qui; nemo, nullus est, qui ; nihil est, quod : also those containing the interrogative indefinite adjectives, quis, quotus, fyc. est 9 qui ; together with est cur ; nihil, non, nullus est, cur, fyc. ; and also, est ubi, quatenus, fyc. Sunt qui non habeant, est qui non curat habere, Hor.Ep. ii. 2. 182. Fuere qui auro corrupti elephantos Jugurthce trader ent. Sail. Jug. 32. In omnibus seculis pauciores viri reperti sunt, qui suas cupiditates, quam qui hostium copias vincerent. Cic. Ep. ad Div. xv. 4. Nemo est qui non eo (equo), quo consuevit, libentius utatur. Cic. Lcel. 19. Nihil molestum est, quod non desideres. Cic. Cat Maj. 14. Quis est qui velit, ut neque diligat quemquam, circumfluere omnibus rebus? Cic. Lcel 14. Quotus enim quisque est, qui teneat artern numerorum et modorum t Cic. de Orat. iii. 50. Quid est, cur hoc loco sedeas 9 Cic. pro Cluent. 53. Duo causce sunt, cur tu in isto offico frequentior esse debeas. Cic. Ep. ad Div. xv. 20. Nonfuit causa, cur tantum labor em caper es. Cic. Rose. Com. 16* Nulla causa est, cur hunc miserum tantd calamitate affici velis. Cic. Rose. Am. 50. Est ubi id valeat. Cic. Tusc. v. 8. Est quatenus amicitice dari venia possit. Cic. Lcel. 17. Obs. After such of the above expressions as are affirmative, such as est, qui, &c. — but not after those that are negative, such as nemo est, qui, &c. — the relative is frequently used with the in- dicative in poetry. In prose, also, this is the case when the expression forms a periphrasis, characterising a particular class: for thus the expression ceases to be indefinite and general. Sunt quos curriculo pulverem Olympicum Collegisse juvat, Hon Od. i. 1. 3. Sunt quibus in Satird videor nimis acer. Hor. Sat. ii. 1. 1. Sunt qui, quod sentiunt, non audent dicere. Cic. Off. i. 24. Sunt qui spiritum non recipiuut, sed resorbent. Quint, xi. 3. S. A relative, with a subjunctive, is used to show the reason 278 LATIN GUAMMAE, [_§ 145. of what is before mentioned. The relative is here equivalent to u because/' " since," — with a personal pronoun. Maluimus iter facere pedibus, qui incommodissime navigdssemus. Cic. Up. ad Att. v. 9. Ingrata es, ore quce caput nostro Incolumi abstuleris et mercedem postules. Phsed. i. 7. 11. JBellum indictum est Tarentinis, qui legatis injuriam fecissent. Eut. ii. 11. Obs. Quippe, utpote, or ut, are sometimes prefixed to the re- lative word to increase its force. Quippe cui ingredienti provinciam labor et periculum placuissent. Tac. Agr. 18. Utpote qui peregre depugndrit. Cic. Phil. v. 11. lnusitatce luxuries, sumptuumque {Nero fuit), ut qui calidis et frigidis lavaret unguentis, Eut. vii. 14. N.B. In the construction with quippe, &c, Sallust and Livy commonly use the indicative. Quippe qui in animo hceserat. Sail. Jug. 28. Quippe quibus cegre occursum est. Liv. v. 37. 4. A relative and the subjunctive mood are also employed to point out the intention, design, or purpose of what pre- cedes. Here the relative is equivalent to " that," ** in order that," " to." Sordidi putandi, qui mercantur e mercatoribus, quod statim ven- dant. Cic. de Off. i. 42. Ccesar equitatum prcemisit, qui viderint. Cses. B. G. i. 15. Domi creant decern prcetores, qui exercitui prceessent. Corn. Nep. Milt iv. 4. Defixere aciem in his vestigiis, in quibus pulchram et spectabilem victoriam ederetis. Tac. Agr. 34. 5. The relative is used with the subjunctive in limiting propositions. This is called its restrictive force ; and is equivalent to " as far as." Aristides unus post hominum memoriam, quod quidem nos audi- verimus, Justus est appellatus. Corn. Nep. Arist, i. 2. Nunquam ilium ne minima quidem re offendi, quod quidem senserim. Cic. Lcel. 27. 6. The relative is also used with the subjunctive after dignuSy indignus, idoneus, aptus, to point out that whereof one is worthy, &c. § 146—148.] syntax. 279 Tu occurrebas dignus eo munere, quo uterque nostrum communiter uteretur. Cic. Cat. Maj. 1. line indigni erant, qui impetrarent ? Cic. Rose, Am. 41. Aptior, quce loqueretur. Cic. Led. 1. Fortasse idoneus nemofuit, quern imitarere. Cic. Verr. ii. 3. 16. § 146. Necesse est is followed by the subjunctive, either with or without ut : but more commonly without it. Amor exoriatur necesse est. Cic. Led. 14. Eos necesse est ut veneficio petat. Cic. adHerenn. iv. 16. Obs. An accusative with infinitive is also found after necesse est. See below, § 160. * § 147. After verbs expressive of resistance or refusal, resisto, recuso, &e., the subjunctive preceded by ne is used. Quamdiu adfuit, ne qua sihi statua poneretur, restitit Corn. Nep. Att iii. 2. Prusias illud recusavit, ne id a se fieri postularent, quod adversus jus hospitii esset. Corn. £fep. Hann. xii. 3. Obs. In this construction ne does not cancel the negative con- tained in the verb, but rather augments it. a. Quin also is used commonly with the subjunctive mood, after non dubito, non dubium est. Nemo didntabat, quin voluntatem spectaret ejus. Cic. Verr, ii. 2. 13 Dubitandum non existimavit, quin ad eum proficisceretur. Caes. B. G. ii. 2. Hocce non dubium est, quin Chremes tibi non det gnatum, Ter. And. ii. 3. 17. § 148. Lastly, the second person of the subjunctive mood is used of some indefinite or assumed person, in the force of the English " one," and the French " on." Gargdnum mugire putes nemus aid mare Tuscum, Tanto cum strepitu ludi spectantur. Hor. Ep. ii. 1. 122. Eos modb Icetos, modb pavidos, animadvorteres. Sail. Jug. 60. Secretum et silentium ejus non timeres. Tac. Agr. 22. Obs. If a pronoun be used after such a subjunctive, it must be of the same person with the subject of the verb ; i. e. the second person, though an indefinite third person is meant. Ubi secordice te tradideris, nequidquam deos implores. Sail. Cat. 52. Tuis ipse moribus possis. Tac. Agr. 46. 280 LATIN GRAMMAR. [§149, 150, Infinitive Mood. § 149. The Infinitive Mood, with the exception of the historical infinitive, marks out the action or condition of a verb in a general or indefinite way ; i- e. without designating either number or person. Its subject when expressed is in the accusative, because that too is, like itself, indefinite in meaning. (See § 103.) The infinitive mood, moreover, is often used as a verbal substantive either of the nominative or accusative case, according to circumstances, and of the neuter gender. It must be borne in mind, however, that it takes after it the same mode of construction as any other part of its own form does. Its use as subject, is explained in § 150. I. a. After transitive verbs it becomes their direct object, if used alone ; if it be pre- ceded by an accusative the whole construction connected with it becomes an objectival clause depending on them. Its substantival force is apparent, too, from its being, though rarely, found depen- dent on a preposition. Inter valere et cegrotare. Cic. Fin. ii. 13. Prater amdsse. Ov. Her. vii. 164. § 150. The use of the infinitive with verbs may be classed under two heads : — I. Without a subject expressed : II. With one expressed. I. The infinitive is used without a subject expressed; a. As the subject of a verb, whether finite or of the infinitive mood, when something is stated generally and indefinitely. In this construction something is usually predicated respecting it, and the verb employed is for the most part sum, though occa- sionally other verbs are employed. Peccare semper est turpe. Cic. de Off. iii. 15. Tutius (i. e. esse) rati volentibus, qudm coactis, imperitare. Sail. Jug. 10. Quos omnes eadem cupere, eadem odisse, eadem metuere in unum coegit. Sail. Jug. 31. b. When it is the object of a verb which has the same subject as itself, and is added to it in order to complete the idea, &c. Of this kind are those signifying to begin or proceed to do, to con- tinue, to cease, to neglect, to be wont or accustomed, to be able, to be unable, to resolve or determine, to intend or purpose, to § 150.] SYNTAX. 281 remember, to desire or wish, to be more desirous, to be unwilling, to endeavour, to seek, to dare, to fear, not to hesitate, to know how, to not know how, to learn, to be incumbent on, to hasten, to care, to not care, to desist from or avoid doing ; together with certain impersonal verbs, and the impersonal verbal expression fugit me, to escape my memory. Principes Gallia hortari ccepit Cass. B. G. v. 6. Coesarem pellere aggressi sunt. Tac. Or at. 17. Quum maturescere inciperent frumenta. Caes. B. G. vi. 29. Perge, igitur, ordine quatuor mihi istas partes explicare. Cic. Part. Or at. 8. Sin bello persequi perseveraret. Cass. B. G. i. 13. Illudjam mirari desino. Cic. de Orat. ii. 14. Mirabar quid esset, quod tu mihi literas mittere intermisisses. Cic. Ep. ad Div. vii. 12. Supersedissem loqui apud vos. Liv. xxi. 40. Omittamus lug ere. Cic. Brut. 76. Diem edicti obire neglexit. Cic. Phil. iii. 8. Qui mentiri solet, pejerare consuevit Cic. Rose. Com. 6. TJt fremitum assuesceret voce vincere. Cic. de Fin, v. 2. Potest fieri utfallar. Cic. Ep. ad Div. xvi. 73. Valet ima summis mutare deus. Hor. Od. i. 34. 12. Non queo cetera scribere. Cic. Ep. ad Div. xiv. 1. Quod prcelio adesse nequibat. Sail. Cat 62. Pompeius quoque statuer at prcelio decertare. Cass. B. C. iii. 86. Desciscere a rege constituit. Corn. Nep. Dot. v. 5. Ccesar Rhenum transire decreverat. Cass. B. G. iv. 17. Hunc tu in mdes cogitas recipere posihac ? Ter. Eun. v. 2. 58. Omni Numidice imperare par at. Sail. Jug. 13. Quum animo meditaretur proficisci in Persas. Corn. Nep. Ag. iv. 1. Institui Topica conscribere. Cic. Ep. ad Div. vii. 19. Virginem forma bond memini videre. Ter. And. ii. 5. 17. Ego recordor longe omnibus anteferre Demosthenem. Cic. Orat 7. Quum pro se quisque operam navare cuperet. Caes. B. G. ii. 25. De quo studeo ex te audire quid sentias. Cic. Rep. i. 11. Idem Stoicus esse voluit Cic. Brut 56. Catojam servire, quam pugnare mavult. Cic. Ep. ad Att. vii. 15. Quis tarn crudeles optavit sumere pcenas ? Virg. 2En. vi. 501. Nolui deesse. Cic. Top. i. Helvetii id, quod constituerant, conantur facere. Cses. B. G. i. 5. Cirtam irrumpere nititur. Sail. Jug. 27. Hunc locum duabus ex partibus oppugnare contendit Caes. B.G.v. 21. Tentabo etiam de hoc dicer e. Quint, vi. 2. Aurumper medios ire satellites amat Hor. Od. iii. 16. 9. Tristitice causam si quis cognoscere queer it Ov. Trist v. 4. 7. 282 LATIN GRAMMAR. [§ 150. Pulsi loco cedere ausi erant. Sail. Cat. 9. Non impositos supremis ignibus artus Sustinuit spectare parens. Ov. Met. xiii. 584. Quos in conspectu Gallia interficere vereretur. Caes. B. G. v. 6. Nil metuunt jurare. Catull. Epithal. Thet. 146. Cur timet flavum Tiberim tangere ? Hor. Od. i. 8. 8. Non dubitaverim me gravissimis tempestatibus obviumferre. Cic. Rep. i. 4. Si sci?*et re gibus uti. Hor. Ep. i. 17. 14. Stoici omnino irari nesciunt. Cic. de Or at. iii. 18. Latine apud Numantiam loqui didicerat. Sail. Jug. 101. Num ferre contra patriam arma illi cum Coriolano debuerunt? Cic. Led. 11. Exercitum transducere maturavit. Cass. B. G. ii. 5. Quod cures proprium fecisse. Hor. Ep. i. 17. 5. i£s£ am wow cz^raj 1 habere. Hor. Isj9. ii. 2. 182. Proinde parce, sis, fidem ac jura societatis jactare. Liv. xxxiv. 32. Quid sit futurum cras,fuge qu&rere. Hor. Od. i. 9. 13. Nunc decet caput impedire myrto. Hor. Od. i. 4. 9. Exemplis grandioribus decuii uti. Cic. de Div. i. 20, iVb7i libet mihi deplorare vitam. Cic. Cat. Maj. 23. Zzce£ 077Z ipsa cernere iratorum. Cic efe Off. i. 29. t7?2cfe habeas qucerit nemo, sed oportet habere. Juv. xiv. 207. Pudeat magis an pigeat disserere. Sail. Jug. 95. Cmi placet impares Formas atque animos sub juga mittere. Hor. Od. i. 33. 10. Tcedetjam audire eadem millies. Ter. Phor. iii. 2. 2. De (Dionysio) fugit me ad te antea scribere. Cic. Ep. ad Att. vii. 18. Obs. The infinitives after volo, nolo, malo, cupio, opto, studeo, have often before them an accusative case of a pronoun of the same person as that which volo, &c. take. Judicem esse me, non doctorem, volo. Cic. de Orat. 33. Quum se non nolle dixisset. Cic. de Orat. ii. 18. Principem se esse mavult, qucim videri. Cic. de Off. i. 19. Cupio me esse clementem. Cic. in Cat. i. 2. Quce sese inhoneste optamt parare hie divitias. Ter. Eun. iv. 5. 2. Si quisquam est, qui placer e se studeat bonis. Ter. Eun. Prol. 1. c. After arguo, doceo, insimulo, jubeo, sino, veto, when those verbs have also a personal accusative of the object. In this case the in- finitive mood represents that of which one accuses, that which one teaches, &c. Quce me arguit Hanc domo ab se surripuisse. Plant. Men. v. 2. 62. Invideo magistro tuo, qui te nihil sapere doceat. Cic. Phil. h.4. Insimulant hominem fraudandi causa discessisse. Cic. Verr. ii. 24. Herus me jussit Pamphilum observare. Ter. § 150.] SYNTAX. 283 Nbs Transalpinas genies oleam et vitem severe non sinimus. Cic. Rep. iii. 9. Ab opere legatos Ccesar discedere vetuerat Caes. B. G. ii. 20. d. After cogo, hortor, dehortor, impedio, moneo, prohibeo, when they have also a personal accusative of the object/ Plerasque (insulas) ad officium redire coegit. Corn. Nep. Milt xii. 1. Chariclem medicum remanere ac recumbere hortatus est Suet. Tib. 72. Plura de Jugurthd scribere dehortatur me fortuna mea. Sail. Jug. 24. Quid est igitur, quod me impediat ea, quce probabilia mihi vide" antur, sequi ; quce contra, improbare ? Cic. Off. ii. 2. Inter ea soror alma monet succurrere Lauso Turnum. Virg. 2En. x. 439. Qui Bibulum exire domo prohibuissent. Cic. Ep. ad Div. i. 9. Obs. The above verbs are sometimes constructed with the sub- junctive and ut in positive, and ne in negative, sentences. Ccepi cog ere ut rediret Ter. Hec. ii. 2. 26. Ego vos hortari tantitm possum, ut amicitiam omnibus rebus hu- manis anteponatis. Cic. Lcel. 5. Plura de Jugurthd scribere dehortatur me fortuna mea. Sail. Jug. 24. Casus quidam ne facer em impedivit. Cic. de Fat. 1. Monet, ut suspiciones vitet. Cges. B. G. i. 20. Quod potuisti prohib ere nefieret. Cic. Div. in Ccec. 10. II. The infinitive is used with a subject of its own ex- pressed, a. After verbs denoting any exertion or action of the mental faculties, &c, and which are commonly known by the term verba declarandi et sentiendi. Quidam plures Deo ortos (esse) affirmant. Tac. Germ. 2. Dico te venisse inter falcarios M. Lecca domum. Cic. in Cat i. 4. Mihi Fabius demonstravit te id cogitdsse facere. Cic. Ep. ad Div. iii. 3. Fateor earn esse importunam. Plaut. Asin. i. 1. 47. Mihi Philargyrus narravit te inter dum solicitum esse vehementius. Cic. Ep. ad Div. vi. 1 . Nego idlam picturam fuisse, quin abstulerit. Cic. Verr. ii. 4. 1. Ostendit se cum rege colloqui velle. Corn. Nep. Con. 3. Ab hdc minatus sese abire. Plaut. Asin. iii. 3. 14. Cur ergo minitaris tibi te vitam esse amissurum ? Plaut. Asin. iii. 3. 21. Pollicita est ea se concessuram ex cedibus. Ter. Hec. iv. 4. 57. 284 LATIN GRAMMAR. [§ 150. Promitto tibi, si valebit, tegidam ilium in Italia nullam relicturum. Cic. Ep. ad Att. ix. 7. Provocationem a regibus fuisse significant nostri augurales. Cic. Rep. ii. 31. Grceceius ad me scripsit C. Cassium sibi scripsisse homines com' parari, qui, fyc. Cic. Ep. ad Att. xv. 8. Ipsum regem tr admit se addidisse. Liv. i. 38. Ille se Tarentum projicisci quum simuldsset. Cic. pro Cluent. 9. Dissimulabam me harum sermoni operam dare. Plant. Epid. ii. 2.54. Quum Numidas in omnes partes fugere vidissent. Caes. B. G. ii. 24. Scepe audivi a majoribus natu mirari solitum {esse) C. Fabricium. Cic. Cat. Maj. 13. Seutiet in hdc urbe esse consules vigilantes. Cic. in Cat. ii. 12. Qui non animadvertit innocentes illos natos (esse). Corn. Nep. Epam. vi. 3. Quas (leges) scitis exstare. Cic. Pep. v. 2. Nesciebam id dicer e illam. Ter. Eun. iv. 5,10. Intellexi ex tuis Uteris te audisse. Cic. Ep. ad Att. vi. 9. Ab Us Casar hcec dicta (esse) cognovit. Cass. B. G. iii. 18. Quid te futuimm (esse) censes? Ter. Beaut, iii. 1. 53. TJt omnia tua in te posita esse ducas. Cic. Lcel. 2. Judico neminem omnium tot et tanta habuisse dicendi ornamenta. Cic. de Orat. ii. 28. Placiturum tibi esse meum librum suspicabar. Cic. Ep. ad Q. F. ii. 9. Deos didici securum agere cevum. Hor. Sat. i. 5. 101. Docui (I informed) id nee opus esse nee fieri posse. Cic. Ep. ad Att. xvi. 8. Volunt persuadere (to convince) non interire animas. Cass. B. G. vi. 13. Memini Catonem mecum disserere. Cic. Lcel. 3. Suscipiam partes, quas alienas esse arbitrabar. Cic. Verr. ii. 4. 37. Quum reliquum exercitum subsequi crederet. Cass. B. G. vi. 31. Bene colligit (infers) hcec pueris et mulierculis esse grata. Cic. de Off. ii. 16. Deinde concludebas summum malum esse dolor em. Cic. de Fin. ii. 19. Amicitice nostrce memoriam spero sempiternam fore. Cic. Lai. 4. Ego non despero fore aliquem aliquando. Cic. de Orat. l. 21. N.B. The accusative of the personal pronoun is not emphatic in the construction of verba declarandi et sentiendi with the in- finitive mood. Obs. The infinitive with accusative is also put after some im- personal verbs, and impersonal verbal expressions, which are allied in meaning to the verba sentiendi et declarandi* § 150,] SYNTAX. 285 Appdret servum hiinc esse domini pauperis. Ter. Eun. iii. 2. 23. Constat nihil eo fuisse excellentius. Corn. Nep. Alcib. i. 1. Haud convenit una ire cum arnica imperatorem in via. Ter. Eun. iii. 2. 41. Ilium ea quoque diligentissime percepisse credibile est Quint, ii. 3. Perspicuum est eas (utilitates) nos nullo modo sine hominum manu atque opera capere potuisse. Cic. Off. ii. 4. b. After verbs denoting a wish for something to take place, or the submitting to, or permitting, it. Also those signifying to com- mand, hinder, forbid that a thing be done. Such are termed verba voluntatis ; the principal of them are given below. Te tuafrui virtute cupimus. Cic. Brut. 97. Evanuisse mavultis id. Cic. de Div. ii. 57. Nolite, judices, hunc exstingui vulnere vestro. Cic. Cad. 32. Si vis meflere. Hor. A. P. 102. Ilia phalanx non par ere se ducibus, sed imperare, postulabat Corn. ISTep. Eum. viii. 2. Pern ad arma deduci studebat. Caes. B. C. i. 4. Nullum patiebatur esse diem, quin inforo dicer et. Cic. Brut 88. Vinum ad se importari non sinunt. Caes. B. G. iv. 2. Liviam ad se deduci imperavit. Suet. Cat. 25. lllos duci in career em jubent. Cic. Verr. ii. 5. 30. Nihil prohibet pecuniam solvi. Cic. Ep. ad Div. i. 9. N.B. Compare § 150. b. Obs. c. After verbs denoting pleasure, displeasure, grief, amazement, and others denoting some mental feeling. Such are called verba affectuum. Te accepisse meas litteras gaudeo. Cip. Ep. adAtt. vi. 9. Lcetor sine dolor e corporis te fuisse et animo valuisse. Cic. Ep. ad Div. vii. 1. Indignari ccepit regem ad dicendam causam evocari. Caes. B. C. i. 108. Siquis cegreferat se pauperem esse. Cic. Tusc. iv. 27. Quomodo ferant veterani exercitum Brutum habere. Cic. Phil. x. 7. Dolebant Romanos culmina Alpium occupare conari. Caes. B. G. iii. 2. Ne querantur se relictas esse. Cic. Tusc. v. 5. Si quis forte miratur me ad accusandum descender e. Cic. Div. in Ccec. 1. Maxime admiratus sum mentionem te h&reditatum ausum esse facer e. Cic. Phil. ii. 16. Seque alte? v um fore Sullam inter suos gloriatur. Caes. B. C. i. 4. Gratulor ingenium non latuisse tuum. Ov. Trist i. 9. 54. 286 LATIN GRAMMAR. [§ 151, 152. Obs. Yet, after many of such verbs, quod 'is used with either the indicative or subjunctive mood, according as oratio recta or obliqua is employed. Gaude, quod spectant oculi te mille loquentem. Hor. Ep. i. 6. 19. Doluisse se, quod Populi JRomani beneficium sibi extorqueretur. Cjbs. B. C. i. 9. § 151. If a substantive or adjective be added to an infi- nitive mood as a predicate or farther definition, its case is regulated by that of the subject. Hence, 1. If an infinitive mood has the same subject as the finite verb, the substantive or adjective will be in the nominative. Antenor potuit ITlyricos penetrare sinus, atque intima tutus Regno, Liburnorum etfontem superare Timavi. Virg. 2En. i. 242. 2. If an infinitive has its own subject in the accusative it will have the substantive or adjective also in the accusative. Turpilius quern, prcefectum oppidi, unum ex omnibus profugisse supra ostendimus, Sfc. Sail. Jug. 69. 3. The poets sometimes use the Greek construction. Uxor invicti Jovis esse nescis 9 Hor. Od. iii. 27. 73. Retulit Ajax Esse Jovis pronepos. Ov. Met. xiii. 141. 4. If an infinitive has a dative depending on licet, &c. before it, it will have the substantive or adjective in the dative. lUis timidis ei ignavis licet esse. Liv. xxi. 44. Sibi triumplianti urbem invehi liceret. Liv. xxxviii. 44. Obs. After licet, &c. with the dative, a following infinitive is sometimes found with the substantive or adjective in the accusa- tive ; in which case an accusative must be supplied as its subject. Si civi Romano licet esse Gaditanum. Cic. Balb. 12. (i. e. eum esse.) § 152. When a person s language is indirectly reported, i.e. when the writer uses his own words to express what another said, then the leading verb, which would be in the indicative if the speaker's own words were used, is put in the infinitive. Nihil profici patientia : eripi domos, abstrahi liberos, injungi de- lectus. Tac. Agr. 15. Esse nonnullos, quorum auctoritas apud plebem plurimum valeat. Cses. B.G.I. 17. Jus esse belli, ut qui vicissent, lis, quos vicissent, quemadmodum wllent, imperarent. Cses. B. G. ii. 36. Obs. 1. From the last two of the foregoing examples it will be § 153, 154.] syntax. 287 seen that the verb of the dependent clause is in the subjunctive in this construction. The reason of which is that the subjunctive is the right mood wherewith to express what the writer gives as the statement of another, and not his own direct opinion, &c. 0~bs. 2. This construction is akin to that after verbs declarandi et sentiendi, § 150. II. a. ; the verb dico, in its right tense &c, being either expressed or understood. Obs. 3. Moreover when the accusative of the personal pronouns is used in this mode of expression it is not emphatic. Compare above § 150. II. a. KB. § 153. The historical infinitive is used in narrative to de- note the continuance of a state or action. Its force is almost identical with that of the imperfect indicative. This mode of expression is chiefly employed by historians ; yet others are not strangers to it, not even the poets. See Ex. Rule 78. Part I. Obs. 1. The similar forces of the historical infinitive and the im- perfect indicative may be gathered from their being mixed to- gether. Alii perfugas vendere, pars ex pacatis prcedas agebant. Sail. Jug. 32. Compare also Sail. Cat. 6. At Romania fyc. Obs. 2. The subject of the historical infinitive, when expressed, is in the nominative. Interim Jugurtha cum magna curd parare omnia. Sail. Jug. 66. Eoque initio erecta provincia parare bellum. Tac. Agr. 18. Obs. 3. Hence a predicative substantive or adjective will also be in the nominative. See § 151. Civitas, trepida anted et sollicita de belli eventu, loeta agere. Sail. Jug. 55. § 154. Questions which in direct speech (oratio recta) were expressed by the indicative, are expressed in indirect speech (oratio obliqua) by the infinitive and accusative, if they be- long to the first or third person ; but by the subjunctive, if to the second person. In the latter case what was in the present or perfect in oratio recta is usually put in the imper- fect and pluperfect in oratio obliqua. Num etiam recentium injuriarum memoriam deponere posse. Cass. B. G. i. I4i.=7iiim possum, fyc. Quid de prcedd faciendum censerent. Liv. v. 20. — i. e. censetis ? An quicquam superbius esse quam ludificare sic omne nomen La- tinum ? Liv. i. 50.=an quicquam superbius est, Sfc. Obs. 1. Sometimes in questions belonging to the first person, se 288 LATIN GRAMMAR. [§ 155. is prefixed to the infinitive in oratio obliqua. Yet more commonly it can only be known by the context whether the first or third person is meant. Quid se vivere. Liv. vii. 18. In oratio recta — Quid vivimus ? Obs. 2. Those inquiries to which a negative reply is expected (see § 139.) and which have the subjunctive in oratio recta, retain the subjunctive in oratio obliqua, yet have a change of tense. Quis tibi hoc persuaderet. Caes. B. G. v. 29.= quis tibi hoc per- suadeat. § 155. Verbs constructed sometimes with an infinitive mood, sometimes with a dependent clause. Such are, 1. Verbs implying to resolve, to endeavour to do, to hinder from being done. These are followed by the infinitive when both have a subject in common ; but when the subject is changed, the sub- junctive with ut is used in affirmative clauses, with ne in negative clauses. Statu it ab initio jus non dicer e. Cic. Prov. Cons. 5. Statuunt ut decern millia hominum in oppidum submittantur. Caes. B. G. vii. 21. Fixa est tabula, qua statuitur ne sit Creta provincia. Cic. Phil. ii. 38. Bellum cum Germanis gerere constituit. Caes. B. G. iv. 6. Constitueram ut manerem. Cic. Ep. ad Att. xvi. 10. Tentabo etiam de hoc dicer e. Quint, vi. 2. Quum senatus tentaret ut ipse gereret rempublicam. Cic. Rep. ii. 12. Omni Numidice imperare par at. Sail. Jug. 13. Animo virili ut sis para. Ter. Phorm. v. 7. 64. . JEquumfuit deos paravisse uno exemplo, ne omnes vitam viverent. Plaut, Mil iii. 1. 132. Quum animo meditaretur proficisci in Persas. Corn. Nep. Ages. iv. 1. Summa vi Cirtam irrumpere nititur. Sail. Jug. 27. Nitebatur ne graviils in eum consideretur. Sail. Cat. 13. Unus Miltiades maxime nitebatur ut castra fierent. Corn. Nep. Milt. iv. 5. Hunc locum duabus ex partibus expugnare contendit. Caes. B. G. v. 21. Voce contendam ut hoc populus Romanus audiat. Cic. Ligar. 3. Ut pater magnopere semper contenderit ne qua ei provincia vivo se committer etur. Suet. Vitell. 3. Obs. The same construction obtains with some verbal expres- sions. Consilium est itafacere, Plaut. Mil. Glor. ii. 3. 73.. § 155.] SYNTAX. 289 Consilium ccepi, ut antequam luceret exirem. Cic. Ep. ad Att. vii. 1©. Ccesar in animum induxerat labor are. Sail. Cat. 54. Inducer e animum possum, ne agre potior. Plaut. Asin. v. 1. 5. Parens potuerit animum inducere, ut naturam ipsam vinceret. Cic. Rose. Am. 19. 2. Verbs signifying to ask, to beg, to exhort, to advise, to per- suade, to urge, to command. These are commonly used with ut, either expressed or to be supplied, before an affirmative clause ; and with ne before a negative clause ; whether the subject be changed or not. The infinitive is employed after them only by way of ex- ception. Ut facias te etiam atque etiam rogo. Cic. Ep. ad Div. xiii. 44. Rogat finem orandi faciat. Cses. B. G. i. 20. Rogat f rater ne abeas longius Ter. Ad. v. 5. 1. Rogat oratque ut liceat vitam degere. Cic. Rose. Am. 49. Reddas judicium peto. Phced. iii. Prol. 63. Quod ne facias a te peto. Cic. Ep. ad Att. x. 8. Arma animosa petebat ferre. Stat. Ach. i. 3. 52. Ego vos hortari possum, ut amicitiam anteponatis. Cic. Lad. 5. Hortatur ad earn diem revertantur. Cass. B. G. vi. 33. Ambiorix hortatur, ne occasionem dimittant. Caas. B. G. v. 38. Dedit oscula nato hortaturque sequi. Ov. Met. viii. 2. 15. Monet, ut suspiciones vitet. Cass. B. G. i. 20. Moneo deserant furere. Cic. Cat. ii. 9. Macedonas monebat ne multitudine hostium morerentur. Just. xi. 1 3. Natura monet festinare. Plin. xviii. 25. Persuadent, uti ad hostes transeat. Caes. B. G. iii. 18. Persuadet regnum petat. Sail. Jug. 39. Plato tantum valuit eloquentid, ut ei persuaserit tyrannidis facere finem. Corn. Nep. Dion, iii. 3. Vetus nostra simultas stimulabat me, ut caver em. Cic. Ep. ad Div. iii. 12. Stimulabantur, ne clientulorum loco numerarentur. Tac. Or. 37. Stimulante metu fati pramoscere cursus. Luc. vi. 423. Apollo mihi imperat, ut ego illi ocidos exuram. Plaut. Men.v. 2.87. Letoque det imperat Argum. Ov. Met. i. 670. C&sar suos imperavit, ne telum in hostes rejicerent. Cses. B. G. i. 46. Jungere eqtios Titan velocibus imperat Horis. Ov. Met. ii. 118. Obs. 1. In like manner are constructed oro, joraw, admoneo, com- moneo, adhortor, cohortor, exhortor, suadeo, impello, perpello, excito, incito, exstimulo, &c. . (Compare § 150. 1. d.) Obs. 2. Moneo and admoneo followed by accusative and infinitive O 290 LATIN GRAMMAR. [§ 156 — 157. mean to remind one that so and so is, &c. ; persuadeo to con- vince, &c. Res ipsa monebat tempus esse. Cic. Ep. ad Att. x. 8. Admonebant supplicium non victoriam peti. Liv. xxviii. 19. Mud tibi per suadeas velim, me omnia suscepturum (esse). Cic. Ep. ad Div. xi. 6 . Nemo mihi persuadebit multos prcestantes vivos tanta esse conatos. Cic. Cat Maj. 23. 3. Patior and sino generally take an infinitive, seldom ut, &c. and a subjunctive. Periniquo patiebar animo te a me digredi. Cic. Ep. ad Div. xii. 18. Si in turpi reo patiendum non esset, ut quidquam isti minis profe- cisse arbitrarentur. Cic. Font. 12. Non possum pati, quin tibi caput demulceam. Ter. Heaut. iv. 5. 13. Obsequium prcecipitem amicumferri sinit Cic. Lcel. 23. Siviy animum ut expleret suum. Ter. And. i. 2. 17. 4. Concedo, opto, permitto, are followed indifferently by an infi- nitive, or ut &c. with a subjunctive. Mediocribus esse poetis Non homines, non Di, non concessere co- lumnar. Hor. A. P. 372. Non concedo, ut sola sint. Quint, vi. 2. Hunc videre s@pe optabamus diem. Ter. Hec. iv. 4. 29. Optavit, ut in currum patris toller etur. Cic. Off. iii. 25. Tibi permitto respondere. Cic. N. D. ii. 1. Quis Antonio permisit, ut partes facer et. Cic. de Or at. ii. 9. 5. Cogo, fiagito, posco, postulo seldom comparatively have an in- finitive : generally ut with a subjunctive. Vi cozpi cogere, ut rediret. Ter. Hec. ii. 2. 26. Neque cogi pugnare poterat. Liv. xlv. 41. Semper flagitavi ut convocaremur. Cic. Phil. v. 11. (Stomachus) perna Jlagitat refici. Hor. Sat. ii. 4. 61. Militibus, ut imperator pugna? adesset, poscentibus. Tac. Hist. ii. 39. Esse sacerdotes delubraque vestra tueri Poscimus. Ov. Met. viii. 710. Nemo inventus est tarn impudens, qui postularet ut vendereL Cic. Terr. ii. 4. 20. Me ducere istis dictis postulas. Ter. And. iv. 1. 20. § 156. An accusative with infinitive is sometimes used in- dependently to denote amazement. In some instances the interrogative ne is added ; and when this is the case there is an intimation of hesitation or inquiry. Te in tantas arumnas propter me incidisse ! Cic. Ep. ad Div. xv. 1. Mene Iliads occumbere campis Non potuisse ! Virg. JEn. I. 97. § 157—161.] SYNTAX. 291 § 157. The infinitive is found dependent on certain verbal expressions : i. e. those which contain in them the power of a verb. Iniit consilia reges Lacedcemoniorum toller e. Corn. !N^ep. Lys. iii. 1. Qua neque confirmare argumentis neque refellere in animo est. Tac. Germ. 3. Silvano fama est veteres sacrdsse Pelasgos (i. e. lucum). Virg. Mn. viii. 600. § 158. Ccepi, with dependent infinitive, is at times used for the finite verb of such dependent infinitive, yet still with the concomitant idea of some duration ; so that it may be regarded as very near in meaning to the imperfect in- dicative. Graculus redire ccepit ad proprium genus, Phaed. i. 3, 9. § 159. Memini is used with the present infinitive in a narrative of events at which the speaker was himself present ; but when the statement of a result is intended, the infinitive perfect is employed after it. Memini te mihi Phamea coenam narrare. Cic. Ep. ad Div. ix. 16. Peto ut memineris te omnia mihi cumulate recepisse. Cic. JEp. ad Div. xiii. 72. § 160. Necesse est and oportet, if used indefinitely, have an infinitive mood, otherwise a subjunctive alone. Yet ut is found after necesse est Homini necesse est mori. Cic. Fat. 9. Quce (Leuctrica pugnd) immortalis sit necesse est. Corn. Xep. Epam. x. TJnde habeas qucerit nemo, sed oportet habere. Juv. xiv. 207. Oportet vaces a negotiis. Phaed. iii. Prol. 2. Neque necesse est ut vos auferam. Gell. ii. 29. § 161. Opus est is usually followed by infinitive; yet sometimes by ut with subjunctive. Quid opus est de Dionysio tarn valde affirmare ? Cic. JEp. ad Att. vii. 8. Opus nutrici autem, utrem ut habeat veteris vini. Plaut. Time. v. 11. Obs. In the place of the infinitive mood the perfect passive participle, alone, in the neuter gender, is sometimes used after opus est. Maturato opus est. Liv. viii. 13. Erat nihil cur properato opus esset. Cic. Mil. 19. o 2 292 LATIN GRAMMAR. [§ 162. § 162. Fore (or futurum esse) ut, with a dependent subjunctive, is sometimes employed in the place of a future infinitive active to denote both a simple or incomplete, and also a complete future. In the case of those verbs which have no future participle active, this periphrasis is necessary when the construction requires that a future infinitive be used. In the passive voice^ however, it is employed only in the case of a simple future, not in the case of a complete future. The laws regulating this mode of expression are identical with those for the succession of tenses, and of the employment of the tenses of the subjunctive mood as futures. (See §§ 120, 124.) Thus, — Credo fore ut scribas epistolam, denotes iny belief present in present time that at some future time you will write a letter : — an incomplete future action : but, Credo fore ut scripseris epistolam, that at some future time you will have written a letter ; — a complete future action. Credebam fore ut scriberes epistolam, denotes my belief present in past time that at some future time you would write a letter ; — an incomplete future action : but, Credebam fore ut scripsisses epistolam, that at some future time you would have written a letter ; — a complete future action. So again in the Passive Voice, — Credo fore ut epistola scribatur, denotes my belief present in present time that at some future time a letter will be written ; — an incomplete future state : and, Credebam fore ut epistola scriberetur, denotes my belief present in past time that at some future time a letter would be written ; — an incomplete future state. Obs. A completed future of this kind is expressed by the perfect participle with fore. Credo (and credebam) epistolam scriptam fore, denotes my belief present in present (and also in past) time that a letter will have (and also would have) been written. The participle of the future active (in rus) is used in con- junction with esse and fnisse to denote a present or past in- tention, in an infinitival form. Credo te scripturum esse epistolam, denotes my belief that you now intend writing a letter : but, Credo te scripturum fuisse epistolam, that you have in past time intended writing a letter. § 163— 165.J syntax. 293 The mode of expressing this intention in the Passive Voice is by futurum fuisse ut, followed by an imperfect subjunctive : Credo futurum fuisse ut epistola scriberetur, si, fyc, denotes my belief that, under such and such circumstances, a letter would have been written. § 163. The following construction must be noticed: — When, in a proposition, the subject of a relative clause is compared with the subject of the preceding demonstrative clause — both of them having logically the same verb in common — and when the first of these subjects is in the accusative before an infinitive mood, then the second also, by attraction, is likewise put in the accusative, though grammatical strictness requires that it should be in the no- minative, and its verb supplied in a finite mood. JSt tamen te suspicor iisdem rebus, quibus meipsum, interdum gravius commoveri. Cic. Cat. Maj. 1. Thus, here, instead of meipsum, the strict application of the rules of grammar requires ipse commoveor. Obs. The same construction obtains with quam after a compara- tive word. Num putatis dixisse Antonium minaciiis quam facturum esse ? Cic. Phil. v. 8. — i. e. quam facturus sitf § 164. The infinitive is sometimes used by the poets in the place of the supine in um. Omne quum Proteus pecus egii altos Visere montes. Hor. Od. i. 2. 7. N. B. For use of infinitive in place of gerund, see Rule 82. Part I. To which it may be added, that the infinitive is also used in the place of the gerundive and its substantive. Audax omnia perpeti gens humana = audax ad omnia perpetienda. Hor. Od. i. 3. 25. JDurus componere versus = in versibus componendis. Hor. Sat. i. 4. 8. Gerunds and Gerundives. § 165. Gerunds in di formed from transitive verbs have sometimes a genitive plural joined with them, instead of their being followed by an accusative of the object. Permissa, immb exacta, jocandi licentia, diripiendique pomorum. Suet. Aug. 98. o3 294 LATIN GRAMMAR. [§ 166. Agitur utrum M. Antonio facultas detur agrorum suis latronibus condonandi. Cic. Phil. xii. 13. Obs. 1. It is supposed that the above construction must be attributed to the two modes of expression, attaching respectively to the gerund and gerundive, having become blended together : for, under ordinary circumstances, we should expect either diri- piendi poma, or diripiendorum pomorum ; so condonandi agros, or condonandorum agrorum. a. The gerund in di is not found after verbs : neither is sine ever used before the gerund in do. b. Sometimes the gerund has a passive force. Spes restituendi nulla erat. Corn. Nep. Att. ix. 2. Jugurtha ad imperandum Tisidium vocabatur. Sail. Jug. 62. Comitiorum, ludorum, censendique causa. Cic. Verr. i. 18. § 166. Strictly speaking, the gerundive is the future pas- sive participle used with a noun or pronoun in the same case, instead of such noun or pronoun following a gerund as its object. Spes capiendi urbem and spes capiendce urbis give the same idea, though in a different form. Obs. 1. Hence the gerundive can only be formed, in strictness, from transitive verbs and from fungor, fruor, potior, utor. In the case of intransitive verbs the gerundive is however used in the neuter in connection with some third person singular of sum, or its in- finitive mood, in the force of an impersonal verb. (See Eule 87. P. I.) Spes facta militice fungendce. Liv. xxiv. 21. Justitice fruendcB causa. Cic. de Off. ii. 12. Qui in spem potienaorum castrorum venerant. Caes. B. G. iii. 6. Ego hinc artoptam utendam pelo. Plaut. Aul. ii. 9. 4. Obs. 2. In the case of transitive verbs the gerundive is more commonly used than the gerund. Ne criminibus infer endis delectetur. Cic. Lcel. 18. In spem adducius aut conficiundi belli, aut pecunice capiundce. Sail. Jug. 37. Ne moras agitando aliud mallet. Sail. Jug. 81. Obs. 3. Tux, the feminine genitive singular of the personal pro- noun tu ; and also vestri and sui, the masculine genitives plural of the personal pronouns tu and sui ; are found with the genitive mas- culine singular of the gerundive ; and ejus, the genitive singular of is, even when relating to a feminine substantive. Quoniam tui videndi est copia. Plaut. True. ii. 4. 19. Vestri adhortandi causa. Liv. xxi. 42. § 167—169.] syntax. 295 Purgandi sui causa ad eum legatos mittunt. Caes. B. G. vi. 8. Ego ejus videndi cupidus. Ter. Hec. iii. 3. 12. Obs. 4. Sometimes the genitive of the gerundive — and also of the gerund — is apparently used absolutely, or else maybe con- sidered as dependent on causa or gratia to be supplied. Germanicus in JEgyptum prqficiscitur cognoscendce antiquitatis. Tac. Ann. ii. 59. Ne id assentandi magis existimes. Ter. Ad. ii. 4. 6. Obs. 5. After vix the gerundive and gerund take a modified meaning — " what may be done," &c. Ulud vix saltern prcecipiendum videtur. Quint, vi. 4. § 167. By a comparison of § 149 with Rules 81, 83, 84, Part L, it will be seen, that the Infinitive and Gerunds con- jointly form a verbal substantive of the singular number. Thus, N. the inf., G. ger. in di, D. ger. in do, A. the inf. or ger. in dum, V. , Ab. ger. in do. Supines. § 168. In the expression dare nuptum, do is attended with the concomitant idea of motion, arising from the bride's going to the bridegroom's house, and hence is followed by the supine in urn. Uxor, invita qua ad virum nuptum datur. Plaut. Stick, i. 2. 85. § 169. The supine in u follows not only adjectives, but also fas, nefas, and opus. Very few supines in u are found in use ; they are for the most part confined to auditu, cognitu, dictu, factu, inventu, memoratu, scitu. Nil dictu foedum visuve hcec limina tangat, Intra quce puer est. Juv. xiv. 44. Si quid dignum cognitu. Suet. Aug. 43. Si hoc fas est dictu. Cic. Tusc. v. 13. Nefas dictu. Virg JEn. iii. 365. Opus est scitu. Cic. Inv. i. 20. Obs. 1 . A peculiar construction must here be noticed. Some- times the foregoing words are found followed by a supine in u, taking after it a dependent proposition ; whereas a substantival infinitive, followed by a dependent proposition, would have been expected to have formed the subject of the verb substantive, and one of the before-named substantives or adjectives to have been predicated of such substantival infinitive. Videtis nefas esse dictu, miseram fuisse talem senectutem. Cic. Cat Maj. 5., for Videtis (rb) dicer e miseram, 8fc. esse nefas. O 4 296 LATIN GRAMMAR. [§ 170. Obs. 2. After facilis, difficilis, jucundus, the gerund with ad, " with regard to" is sometimes used instead of the supine inu ; and in the poets and late writers even an infinitive passive is thus employed. Facilis ad subigendum. Cic. Rep. ii. 41. Id positum est in tribus rebus difficilibus ad eloquendum. Cic. Off i. 35. Verba ad audiendum jucunda. Cic. de Or at. i. 49. C or rumpi facilis. Tac. Hist. iv. 39. Participles. § 170. Participles express the action, &c. of a verb in an adjectival force, as the infinitive and gerund do in a substan- tival force. (See §167.) 1. The Participles of the Present and Perfect are those also of the imperfect and pluperfect as well ; to which of these tenses they must be considered as belonging is decided by the leading verb, on the principle of the succession of tenses. (See § 120.) Hence if the leading verb be the historical perfect, the participle present assumes the force of the imperfect ; the participle perfect that of the pluperfect, &c. 2. The Future Participle in rus (active voice), especially after verbs denoting " motion," represents at times a "design" or " pur- pose," like the future participle in Greek ; at times merely a simple future action. Perseus rediit, belli casum de integro tentaturus. Liv. xlii. 62. Sacra Jovi facturus. Ov. Met. iii. 26. O, mutis quoque piscibus Donatura eyeni, si libeat, sonum. Hor. OflL iv. 3. 19. 3. The Future Participle in ndus (passive voice) does not denote a mere future state, &c. but has the meaning of " necessity" attach- ing to it ; when followed by a case it takes the dative. Habenda ratio valetudinis. Cic. Cat. Maj. 11. Quod ferendum est molliter sapienti. Cic. Cat. Maj. 2. Obs. Occasionally, the ablative dependent on a or ab is found instead of the dative after this participle. This, however, for the most part occurs when it is necessary to prevent any confusion of ideas arising from the construction, and to point out clearly which is the agent. Crassus a consulibus meam causam suscipiendam esse dicebat. Cic. Sext 18. Eos a se observandos putabat. Cic. Ep. ad Div. xiii. 16. § 171—173.] syntax. 297 N.B. In the former of the preceding examples a is prefixed to consulibus ; inasmuch as otherwise consulibus alone might be taken for the dative dependent on dicebat 4. The Perfect Passive Participle in combination with a tense of habeo is often found in concord or apposition with the object of habeo, or is used absolutely, by itself, as its object, in the force of the perfect active of such participle ; yet at the same time with the superadded notion of some continuance in the time pointed out by that tense of habeo which is employed. Clodii animum perspectum habeo, cognitum, judicatum. Cic. Ep. ad Brut 1 . Vix me habet despicatam. Plaut. Cas. ii. 2. 15. Habeo absolutum suave epos ad Ccesarem. Cic. Ep. ad Q. F. iii. 9. Inclusum in Curia Senatum hahuerunt. Cic. Ep. ad Att. vi. 2. Quce quum ita sint, de Ccesare satis hoc tempore dictum habebo. Cic. Phil. v. 18. 5. Instead of an infinitive mood preceded by an accusative case, the poets occasionally take a participle in concord with the subject of the preceding finite verb, provided that both of them refer to the same subject. Sensit delapsus in hostes, Virg. JEn. ii. 377 ; for se delapsum esse. So Dignis ait esse paratus, Hor. Ep. i. 7. 22 ; for se paratum esse. N.B. For participle in explanations, &c. see § 27. 2. Obs. § 171. Participles are sometimes used alone in a force cor- responding to that of the Greek participle preceded by the definite article ; i. e. in the place of a demonstrative pronoun followed by a relative proposition. This, however, is done only when no ambiguity can result. Pars territos con fir- mare, Sail. Jug. 38. territos, " those who were terrified;" quite in the same force as the Greek rove (jw^rjdirrag. § 172. Participles are at times subjoined to the object of certain verbs denoting " to hear," " to see," " to perceive/' &c. in order to represent such object as being in a particular state. Audivi te loquentem, " I heard you when speaking ;" t. e. I myself heard you speak : but audivi te loqui, " I heard that you spoke : " L e. I heard so from another. § 173. Natus, prognatus, satus, cretus, creatus, genitus, ortus, editus, &c. are usually followed by an ablative without a preposition, when the father or family is spoken of ; but when the mother is to be pointed out, then de or ex is for the most part prefixed to tKe ablative. Occasionally ab, de, o 5 298 LATIN GRAMMAR. [_§' !? 4 — ^6, or ex stands before a father's name ; and ab is also used at times to point out lineage or ancestors. Apolline natus. Ov. Met. xv. 639. Amplissimd familid nati adolescentes. Caes. JB. G. vii. 37. De tigride natus. Cic. N. D. iii. 9. Ex nepte Julia editum infantem agnosci vetuit. Suet. Aug. 65. Galii ab Dite patre prognati. Caes. B. G.'i. 18. Edita de magno flumine nymphafui. Ov. Her. v. 10. Ex Pelope satus Atreus. Quint, ix. 3. Nasci a principibus. Tac. Hist. i. 16. § 174. Lastly, sine is not admissible before a participle. " Without" is expressed by the use of some negative word prefixed to the participle, especially in the case of the abla- tive absolute. (Herbas) Quas tellus nulla sollicitante dabat. Ov. Fast. iv. 396. Impersonal Verbs. § 175. Impersonal verbs are those which do not take any personal subject, but are used generally and indefinitely. They are found only in the third person singular, and in the infinitive mood. Yet they partake of the nature of ordinary verbs, in so far that such as are transitive in their meaning are followed by an accusative ; those that denote a relation to any thing by a dative. Juvit me tibi tuas liter as prof uisse. Cic. Ep. ad Div. v. 21. Omnibus bonis expedit rempublicam esse salvam. Cic. Phil. xiii. 8. § 176. Interest "it is of importance'' is followed by a ge- nitive of the person to whom some particular thing is of im- portance, except in the case of the possessive pronouns, where the feminine ablative singular is used ; viz. med, tud, sua, nostra, vestrd. Refert "it is of importance" is usually accompanied by one of the foregoing ablatives ; yet a geni- tive is at times found after it. Interest omnium recte facer e. Cic. Fin. ii. 22. Tud et med maxime interest. Cic. Ep. ad Div, xvi. 4, Vestrd interest. Tac. Hist. i. 30. Tud refert nihil. Ter, Hec. v. 3. 12. Hlo?mm magis qudm sua retulisse. Sail. Jug. 111. Refert compositions. Quint, ix. 4. §177,178.] syntax. 299 Obs. 1. These verbs are sometimes used personally ; that which is of importance being prefixed to them as their subject by means of either a neuter pronoun, or a substantival infinitive. Illud med interest Cic. Ep. ad Att. xi. 22. Cujus intersit istam legem manere. Cic. Phil. i. 9. Id med refert. Ter. Ad. v. 4. 27. Neque enim numero comprendere refert. Virg. Georg, ii. 104. Obs. 2, More frequently, however, that which is of importance is expressed by a dependent clause introduced by ut, &c. expressed or understood ; or by some interrogative word followed by the subjunctive. Illud med interest te ut videam. Cic. Ep. ad Att. xi. 22. Quid med refert, hce Athenis natce an Thebis stent? Plant. Mud. iii. 4. 41. Quid refert med cui serviam ? Phasdr. i. 14. 9. a. That to which something is of importance is usually- expressed by ad. Ad honor em nostrum interest. Cic. Ep. ad Div. xvi. 1. b. The amount of importance is expressed by such adverbs as magis, multum, valde, plurimum, tantum, quantum, nihil, magnopere, vehementer ; or else by the genitive of the value, magni, parvi, &c. Multum interest rei familiaris tuce. Cic. Ep. ad Div. iv. 10. Vehementer interfuit reipublicce. Cic. Ep. ad Q. F. ii. 4. Parvi refert abs te ipso jus did cequabiliter . Cic. Ep. ad Q. F. i. 1. § 177. Attinet and pertinet are followed by ad and an ac- cusative of that to whom or which something belongs. They are not strictly impersonals, though generally called so from being found only in the third person. Quod ad te attinet. Cic. Ep. ad Q. F. ii. 1. JSihil ad Sulpiciorum familiam Quirinus pertinuit. Tac. Ann. iii. 48 . Obs. Attinet and pertinet, and also decet, are sometimes used in the third person plural. Nee qua nihil attinent. Hor. Od. i. 19. 12. Quid ista ad vidulum pertinent. Plaut. Hud. iv. 4. 62. Nee velle experiri, qudrn se aliena deceant, Cic. Off. i. 31. § 178. Tonat, "it thunders;" pluit, "it rains," &c. are called impersonals : yet in reality aer, ccelum or Jupiter is to be supplied as their subject. Si tonuerit. Cic. de Divin. ii. 72. (Fully : Tonat cesium omne fragore. Virg. Mn. ix. 51.) O 6 300 LATIN GRAMMAR. |_§ 179— 181, § 179. Opus est is usually an impersonal verbal expression, and is followed by an ablative of the thing needed. Yet at times it is employed personally ; in which case the thing needed is in the nominative. The substantive verb may under all circumstances be of any tense. Of course when the ex- pression is impersonal such verb must be restricted to the third person of the singular number ; but where it is personal the third person plural is also admissible. Magistratibus opus est. Cic. Legg. iii. 2. Priusqudm incipias consulto, et ubi consulueris mature facto opus est. Sail. Cat. 1. Dux nobis et auctor opus est Cic. JEp. ad Div. ii. 6. Matenem, et quce opus sunt, dominus prcebebit Cato, R. JR. 14. Maritimi milites opus sunt tibi. Plaut. Copt i. 2. 61. Obs. Sometimes, though very rarely, a genitive is dependent on opus est, and in old Latin even an accusative follows it. In the former instance it partakes of the nature of a verb of " wanting ; ,r in the latter of a transitive verb. Ad consilium pensandum temporis opus esse ait Liv. xxii. 5 1 . Quanti argenti opus fait. Liv. xxiii. 31. Puero opus est cibum. Plaut. True. v. 10. Opus est modium unum. Cato, R. R. 15. TIME. § 180. Ante and post are used with the ablative to point out the time before and after a thing has occurred, &c. In this construction they are used sometimes as prepositions, sometimes as adverbs. When an adjective is employed it may here be either cardinal or ordinal. Fecit idem, quod viginti annis ante apud nos fecerat Coriolanus. Cic. Loel. 12. Quinto anno post miles profectus sum ad Tarentum. Cic. Cat. Maj. 4 Biennio post Cic. Brut. 91. Anno ante me censorem mortuus est. Cic. Cat Maj. 6. N.B. The number of years, months, &c, pointed out by the adjective, is not to be necessarily considered as time complete : it may be time current ; i. e. time, in the course of that division of it pointed out by the numeral word. § 181. In is often prefixed to an ablative, either with or without an adjective, to point out the time in the course of § 182—185.] SYNTAX. 301 which an event occurs. Sometimes a numeral adverb is also found in this construction, denoting how often the event takes place. In paucis diebus. Ter. And. i. 1. 77. In hoc tempore. Tac. Ann. xiii. 47. In qua cetate. Cic. Brut. 43. Bis in die. Cic. Tusc. v. 35. Obs. 1. Yet in is sometimes omitted: Bis die. Hor, Od. iv. 1. 25. Bis anno. Plin. ii. 73. Obs. 2. When a relative clause follows, the relative is also in the ablative. Diebus circiter quindecim, quibus in hiberna ventum est, initium tumultus ortum est ab Ambwrige. Caes. B. G. v. 26. § 182. In is also used to express a particular time of life : Feci ego istcec itidem in adolescentia. Plaut. Bac. iii. 3. 6. Obs. If any one point of that period is to be expressed, an ad- jective is used, but without in. Ex his igitur, hora octavd quae mortua est, provecta cetate mortua est. Cic. Tusc. i. 39. § 183. A specified time before the present is usually ex- pressed by abhinc, or by ante with the demonstrative hie : previous time without reference to the present by ante alone. Qucestor fuisti abhinc annos quatuordecim. Cic. Verr. ii. 1. 12. Comitiis jam abhinc triginta diebus habitis. Cic. Verr. ii. 2. 52. Ante hos sex menses. Phaedr. i. 1. 10. Perpaucis ante diebus dederam Q. Mucio literas ad te. Cic. Ep. ad Div. iv. 9. Ante quadriennium amissus est. Tac. Agr. 45. § 184. A person's age is expressed by natus with annos and its required numeral adjective. Cato annos quinque et octoginta natus excessit e vita. Cic. Brut. 20. SPACE OF PLACE. § 185. Distance of place, when motion through space is meant, is correctly put in the accusative : when the ablative is employed it must be regarded as an exception to the rule. (See Rule 101. Parti.) 302 LATIN GRAMMAR. [§ 186 — 190. Obs. Hence when such expressions as abest bidui are found, spatium, or iter, should be supplied, rather than spatio, or itinere. § 186. When the distance of one place from another is to be pointed out without the idea of motion through space, the ablative is commonly used, though sometimes the accu- sative. (See Rule 101. Part I.) Quumfilius TeanL quod abest a Larino octodecim millia passuum, educaretur. Cic. Cluent. 9. § 1 87. When distance is mentioned, but the place from which it is calculated is not definitively named, a or ab com- monly precedes the ablative, just as if that case were de- pendent upon it. A millibus passuum minus duobus castra posuerunt. Cass. B. G. ii. 7. NAMES OF PLACES. § 188. The names of smaller islands follow the construc- tion of the names of towns. Idem hoc Lentulo Rhodi acciderat. Cass. B. C. iii. 102. Rhodum veni. Cic. Brut. 91. Ccesar Rhodo classem accersit Hirt. Bell Alex. 1. § 189. The names of countries and of larger islands are usually preceded by a preposition. In Lemno (uxor em duxit). Ter. Phorm. v. 8. 15. Si quando in Eplrum venerit. Cic. Ep. ad Att. xiii. 25. Ex Asia transis in Europam. Curt. vii. 8. 13. Obs. 1 . The exceptions to this rule are very rare. Where they are found they must be attributed to an irregularity of construction which should not be imitated. Obs. 2. Cyprus is found both with and without a preposition. This probably results from the different estimate formed of its size by different writers. Pausaniam Cuprum miserunt. Corn. Nep. Paus. ii. 1. Itaque statim dedi literas, ut ex Cypro equites ante certam diem decederent. Cic. Ep. ad Att. vi. 2. § 190. The names of Greek islands, and also the Greek § 191—193.] SYNTAX. 303 names of countries, are sometimes used in the genitive to specify "where." Conon Cypri vixit. Corn. ISTep. Chab. iii. 4. Se autem domum Chersonesi habere. Corn. Nep. Milt. ii. 4. § 191. The poets and late writers, even in the case of appellative nouns, use an accusative without a preposition to denote motion towards a place. Speluncam Dido dux et Trojanus eandem Deveniunt. Virg. JEn. i. 365. Verba refers aures non pervenientia nostras. Ov. Met. iii. 462. Begionem, quce castra Cyri appellator, pervenerat Curt. iii. 4. 1. § 192. When the preposition ad is prefixed to the names of towns, their neighbourhood is intended, not the towns themselves. Adolescentulus miles profectus sum ad Capuam. Cic. Cat Maj. 4. ADVERBS. § 193. Numeral adverbs are sometimes added to a sub- stantive to express the repetition of the state of the substan- tive so many times as the adverb points out : — Quartum Consul : * Consul for the fourth time." Cic. Cat Maj. 4. Obs. In other cases of apparent combination of an adverb with substantive, the construction is but a concise mode of expressing what would otherwise be rendered by a relative clause. Multarum circa civitatum irritatis animis. Liv. i. 17. Circa civitatum = civitatum, quce circa erant N.B. The meaning of the adverbs generally must be sought in the Dictionary. Some few matters, however, requiring especial notice are here pointed out. a. Amplius, plus, and minus, are sometimes used as adjuncts (See § 70.), which do not influence the construction. b. Causa and gratia used adverbially, and also ergo, take a genitive case which usually precedes them. Fidei causa. Sail. Jug. 29. Exempli gratia. Corn. Nep. Lys. ii. 1. Illius ergo Venimus. Virg. JEn. vi. 670. 304 LATIN GRAMMAR. [§ 193, c. Minus is often used in the place and meaning of an emphatic non. Nonnunquam ea, qace prcedicta sunt, ?ninus eveniunt. Cic. de Div. i. 14. d. Nescio an, has by long nsage become the representative of fortasse, "perhaps;" and nescio quis (in all cases), of aliquis. Nescio an melius patientiam possim dicere. Cic. de Leg. 9. Nisi me forte Paconii nescio cuius querelis admoverL Cic. Ep. ad Q. F. i. 1. e. Nihil is sometimes used in an adverbial force. Nihil vi, nihil secessions opus [est.~\ Sail. Jug. 31. f. Non when prefixed to words in order to qualify them often gives them a simple meaning, exactly the reverse to that which they before had. Non dubito, " I am assured ; " non perdo, " I spare ; " non aptissimus, " most unfit ; " non diu, " a little while ; " non ignarus, " well aware." g. If non is to qualify a single word of a proposition, it is placed immediately before that word. But if its force is to be thrown on the whole proposition, it generally stands immediately before the verb, especially before the finite verb when it is followed by the infinitive mood. Mihi videbantur non id accusare. Cic. Cat. Maj. 3. TJt nihil ad te dem literarum, facere non possum. Cic. Ep. ad Att. viii. 14. h. Non prefixed to a negative, cancels the negation, and pro- duces a slight affirmation : — non nemo, " some one ; " non nihil, " something ; " non nullus, " some ; " but affixed to such a word it makes a very strong affirmative : nemo non, " every one ; " nihil non, " every thing ; " nullus non, " every " or " all." i. Partim is usually constructed with a genitive, or with an ablative preceded by de or ex. Sometimes it has the force of quosdam, as if it were partem. Partim .... partim = alii .... alii. Partim illorum scepe ad eundem morem erat. Gell. x. 13. Ex quibus partim tecum fuerunt. Cic. Vatin. 7. Partim Samnitium defecisse ad Pcenos. Liv. xxiii. 11. Partim ambitione, partim inscientid. Quint, xii. 11. Obs. The corresponding clause is often introduced by alius, quidam, &c. Bestiarum terrena sunt alia>, partim aquatiles, alia* ancipites. Cic. N. D. i. 37. § 194.] SYNTAX. 305 Multa inusitata partim e ccelo, alia ex terra oriebantur. Cic. de Div. i. 42. Semisomnos partim, alios arrna sumentes invadunt Sail. Jug. 21. k. Turn . . . turn, " both . . . and," denote an equality between two things. Disserens in utramque partem turn Greece turn Latine. Cic Ep. ad Att. ix. 9. I. Quum . . . turn ; " both . . . and, especially ; " or, " not only . . . but more particularly ; " denote a transition from the general to the particular, and point out the second clause as the more im- portant. To turn is sometimes added, for emphasis, certe, etiam, maxime, pracipue, quoque, verb, &c. Quum naturd loci, turn dolo, obscurati. Sail. Jug. 49. Quum propter bonas artes, turn maxime quod adversum divitias animum invictum gerebat. Sail. Jug. 43. m. Unde is often equivalent to a relative and a preposition. Ut eo restituereniur Galli, unde dejecti essent. Cic. Ccecin. 30. Fore unde dicerem neminem. Cic. Cat. Maj. 4. Latobriges in fines suos, unde erant profecti, reverti jussit. Cass. B. G. i. 28. n. Among the peculiar adverbs followed by a genitive case should be named postridie, pridie, turn, tunc. Postridie ejus diei eddem perfidid usi Germani. Cass. B. G. iv. 13. Bridie insidiarum testamentum absignavit. Tac. Ann. xv. 54. Civitas Hannibalem turn temporis consulem in foro expectabat Just. xxxi. 2. De gente obscurd tunc temporis. Just. i. 4. Obs. Postridie and pridie are also followed by an accusative, which in good writers is that either of the name of the Eoman divisions of the month, or of festivals. Postridie Idas . . . postridie Kalendas ac Nonas. Liv. vi. 6. Postridie ludos Apollinares. Cic. Ep. ad Att. xvi. 4. Nam ego Romam pridie Idus. Cic. Ep. ad Att. xiii. 25. Tu pridie Compitalia memento. Cic. Ep. ad Att. ii. 3. PARTICLES OF TIME. § 194. a. Donee, dum, quoad, " as long as," " while," " during the time that," " until," are joined to the indicative, if a thing is men- tioned as a fact : but the subjunctive, if a conception is expressed, or if an intention is to be pointed out. Donee virenti canities abest Morosa. Hor. Od. i. 9. 17. 306 LATIN GRAMMAR. [§ 194. Dum de his singulis dispute judiciis. Cic. pro Cluent. 32. Quoad renunciatum est vicisse Boeotios. Corn. Nep. Epam. ix. 3. Donee Altervtrum velox victoria fronde coronet Hor. Ep. i. 18. 63. Dixisti, dum Planci in me meritum verbis extollerem, &c. Cic. Plane. 40 Hactenus existimo consolationem recte adhibitam esse, donee certior fieres lis de rebus, quibus levari possent molestia tua. Cic. Ep. ad Div. iv. 3. Obs. Yet this distinction is not always observed ; the subjunc- tive being sometimes used where a fact is evidently stated. Me scito, dum tu absis, scribere audacius. Cic. Ep. ad Div. xii. 17. Donee Oceano misceatur. Tac. Ann. ii. 6. Ilia quidem, dum te fugeret per flumina prceceps, &c. Virg. Georg. iv. 457. b. Dum is used with the present indicative even when past events are recorded. Dum hcec geruntur, Casari nunciatum est. Cass. B. G. i. 46. Dum Intemelium hostiliter populatur, matrem Agricola? interfeeit. Tac. Agr. 7. c. Jam marks time relatively present ; nunc time actually pre- sent. Jam per fines Sequanorum copias transducer ant. Caes. B. G. i. 11. Erat tunc excusatio oppressis, nunc nulla est. Cic. Phil. vii. 5. Obs. Nunc, as in the last example, is the word used in antithesis to tunc. d. In historical narrative ubi, postquam, simul ac, and others, signifying "when," "as soon as," are joined to the perfect indicative where the pluperfect would have been expected. Yet this perfect must be rendered as if it were a pluperfect. Ubijustitid atque labore respublica crevit. Sail. Cat. 10. Postqudm divitics honori coepere esse. tSall. Cat. 12. Simul ac mihi collibitum est. Cic. N. D. i. 38. e. Quum may be followed, as a general rule, under all circum- stances by the imperfect and pluperfect subjunctive. With other tenses quum, temporal (adverb) takes the indicative ; quum, causal (conjunction), the subjunctive. Quum de senectute aliquid scribere vellem. Cic. Cat. Ma]. 1. Zenonem, quum Athenis essem, audiebam frequenter. Cic. N. D, i.21. § 195.] SYNTAX. 307 Qui non defendit injuriam a suis quum potest, injustefacit Cic. Off. iii. 18. Quum iidem homines sic ament inertiam et oderint quietem. Tac. Germ. 15. Dixerat hoc ille, quum puer nuntiavit, &c. Cic. Rep. i. 12. /. Yet quum, signifying " at the time when," may be used with the imperfect and pluperfect indicative ; and again with the im- perfect indicative, to point out some action as simultaneous with another, in which use it may be rendered "while." Res, quum hcec scribebam, erat in extremum deducta discrimen. Cic. Ep. ad Div. xii. 6. Quum illi pugnabant maxime, ego tumfugiebam maxime. Plant. Amph. i. 1. 44. Ceteri senes, quum rempublicam defendebant, nihil agebant ? Cic. Cat. Maj. 6. g. Moreover, when the frequent repetition of an action is to be pointed out, quum may be employed with the pluperfect indicative, and in this construction the clause denoting the result takes its verb in the imperfect indicative. Quum ver esse cceperat, Verves dabat se labori. Cic. Verr. v. 10. Obs. Yet here the pluperfect subjunctive is also sometimes used. Quum in jus duci debitor em vidissent, undique convolabant Liv. ii. 27. INTERROGATIVE PARTICLES. § 195. a. An, with the writers of the golden age, is only used in a second or opposite question. When, therefore, it occurs without a previous question, one must be mentally supplied. After a pre- ceding question a negative force attaches to it, and the inference is, that the answer cannot be a matter of doubt. In such a case it is best rendered " is it not," " was it not," &c, according to the tense of the verb. Demjen. Credam istuc, si esse te hilarum video. Argyr. An tu esse me tristem putasf Plaut. Asin. v. 1. 10. (Here before the question An tu, &c. the question Nonne me hilarum esse vides ? must be supplied.) A rebus gerendis abstrahit senectus. Quibus ? An Us, fyc. Cic. Cat. Maj. 6. b. Ne strictly points out merely a question. Yet however, when it is affixed to the principal verb (unless of past time) in a direct question, an affirmative answer is generally expected, though not 308 LATIN GRAMMAR. [§ 195. always ; but when attached to another word, or when occurring in a question relating to past time, a negative answer is expected, coupled in the last case with the idea of amazement or doubt : when used in an indirect question, it simply means " whether." Videtisne ut apud Homerum, Src. Cic. Cat. Maj. 10. (Yes.) Novistine locum potior em rure beato f Hor. Ep. i. 10, 14. (No ; you do not.) Jamne vides, belua, jamne sentis, quae sit hominum querela? Cic. Pis. 1. (No.) Tune milxi dominus, rerum imperils hominumque Tot tantisque minor f Hor. Sat ii. 7. 7o. (No.) Apollinemne tu Delium spoliare ausus es f Cic. Verr. ii. 1. 18. (No, surely!) Qucesivit utereturne rebus, Sfc. Cic. Cat, Maj. 14. (Whether or not.) c. Nonne introduces a question to which an affirmative answer is expected. Nonne animadvertis ? Cic. N. D. iii. 37. Quum esset ex eo qucesitum, Archelaum nonne beatum putaret Cic. Tusc. v. 12. d. Num, in direct questions, implies that a negative answer is expected : but, in dependent propositions, including indirect questions, it means merely " whether," the matter being left open and undecided. Num igitur hunc coegit obmutescere senectus f Cic. Cat. Maj. 7. Senex dicitur qu&sisse, num Mud carmen desipientis videretur. Cic. Cat. Maj. 7. e. Utrum, as its derivation implies, can only be used in a double question, and in the former clause of it. Utrum igitur has corporis, an Pythagoras, malis vires ingenii dart. Cic. Cat. Maj. 10. Obs. 1. Ne is sometimes added to it, especially in the poets; and sometimes this ne, instead of being added to utrum, is joined to some word which is to be strongly marked. Utrumne Divitiis homines, an sint virtute beati. Hor. Sat. ii. 6. 73. Utrum ego istoc jocon assimulem, an serib. Plaut. Bac. i. 1. 42. Obs. 2. Utrum is often omitted in the first clause. Postremb fugere an manere tutius foret in incerto erat. Sail. Jug. 38. — fugere, i.e. utrum fugere. § 196.] SYNTAX. 309 CONJUNCTIONS. § 196. a. Et couples words, &c, denoting things of a different kind, putting them on an equality. Que (which, when used with- out a previous conjunction, always follows the second of the words connected) adds something as supplementary. Atque (for which ac is also used but not before a vowel) assigns a peculiar pro- minence to that which it introduces ; as may be seen from its derivation, ad, in addition ; que " and." Socius et administer sociorum assumitur Scaurus. Sail. Jug. 29. Domi militiceque respublica venalis fuit. Sail. Jug 31. Nox atque prceda castrorum hostes remorata sunt Sail. Jug. 38. Obs. After comparative words and those denoting a similarity or difference atque and ac are often used in the place of quam. Amicior mihi nullus vivit atque is est. Plaut. Merc. v. 2. 56. Non tuus hoc capiet venter plus ac meus. Hor. Sat. i. 1. 46. Miltiades cum totidem navibus atque profectus erat Aihenas rediit Corn. Nep. Milt. vii. 4. Haud secus atque in mari. Sail. Jug. 79. b. Affirmative clauses are connected by et . . . et; et . . . que ; and in the poets by que . . . que. Sallust, too, sometimes uses que . . . que ; but with him the first que is, for the most part, affixed to a personal pronoun. Que . . . et unite only single words. Penes eosdem et summam gloriam et maximas divitias esse. Sail. Jug. 31. Id et singulis universisque semper honori fuisse. Liv. iv. 2. Palantesque vident socios hostemque receptum. Virg. JEn. ix. 780. TJti seque regnumque defendant. Sail. Jug. 49. Uti seque et oppidum tradat. Sail. Jug. 26. c. Negative clauses are connected by neque . . . neque ; nee . . . 1 nee : sometimes by neque . . . nee ; rarely by nee . . . neque. Quod neque capi neque obsideri poterat. Sail. Jug. 37. Nee meliores nee beatiores. Cic. Rep. i. 19. Id neque feci adhuc, nee mihi tamen inter dictum puto. Cic. Fin, i.3. Nee nihil, neque omnia hac sunt, quae dicit. Ter. Ad. i. 2. 61 d. Affirmative and negative clauses are connected by et . . . neque; et . . . nee. Et exspectabo, neque exigam. Cic. Brut 4. Et in senatu dicebat, nee amicis deliberantibus deerat Cic. Tusc, v. 38. 310 LATIN GRAMMAR. [§ 196. e. Negative and affirmative clauses are connected by neque . . . et; nee . . . et Nee . . . que ; neque . . . que, seldom occur. Quod neque natum unquam sit, et semper sitfuturum. Cic. N. D. iii. 13. Nee miror, et gaudeo. Cic. Ep. ad Div. x. 1. Nee ilia exstincta sunt, alunturque, 8fc. Cic. Lcel. 27. Perficiam, ut neque bonus quisquam intereat, paucorumque poena vos omnesjam salvi esse possitis. Cic. Cat. ii. 13. f. Aut and ve are sometimes used in a second clause after a negative in a preceding clause, to continue the negation; i. e. "nor," not "or." Nee conjugis unquam Pr&tendi tcedas, aut Jicec in fozdera veni. Virg. J2n. iv. 339. Non Hydra firmior crevit in Herculem, Monstrumve submisere Colchi Majus, Echioniceve Thebce. Hor. Od. iv. 4. 61. g. Et and vel are sometimes used in an adverbial force ; et sig- nifying " too," " also," " even ; " vel " even." Salvus sis. Et tu salve. Plaut. Stick, ii. 1. 44. Calamitosus Deiotarus, qui et ab eo . . . accusetur. Cic. Diot. 10. Vel Priamo miseranda manus. Virg. 2En. xi. 259. h. Ne, " that not," is often used after verbs expressive of " re- sistance " or " refusal," without cancelling their force ; indeed, rather increasing it. In Tide disputatione casus quidam, ne facerem, impedivit Cic. Fat. 1. Sententiam ne diceret, recusavit. Cic. Off. ii. 37. N.B. For ne with imperative, see § 130. : as final conjunction with subjunctive, see § 142. 1, 2. i. Nee, at the beginning of a sentence, has frequently the force of non. Nee enim labore contendunt. Tac. Germ. 26. k. Nisi has the force of prceterquam, " except," after negative statements, and in questions. Nisi in bonis amicitiam (sentio) esse non posse. Cic L&1. 5. Quid reliquum, nisi ut illis, qui ea fecere, obedientes vivamus ? Sail. Jug. 31. I. Nisi and nisi forte, limiting a preceding statement, are fol- lowed by the indicative. Qui dolor profectb cadit in mentem sapientis, nisi ex ejus animo exstirpatam humanitatem arbitramur. Cic. L - v - Diiambus or Double Iambus; meridies 9 propinquitds. 18. - w - ^ Ditrochaeus, Dichoreiis, or Double Trochee; gloriatiis, longiore. 19. ^ — ^ Antispastus ; repHgndmus, sopor atd. 20. - w ^ - Choriambus ; Melpomene, curriculo. 21. - vy w w Paeon primus ; auxilid, pilrpureus. 22. w - vy ^ „ secundus ; dmdvimus, pecunid. 23. o v - «-» „ tertius ; mdnuere, meliord. 24. ^ ^ v - „ quartus ; recipiunt, misericors. 25. v^ Epitritus primus ; puellarum, motor es. 26. - v „ secundus ; audiendos, perferendi. 27. v - „ tertius ; circumvdlant, spectaculis. 28. v^ „ quartus ; acceplstis, tentavisse. 1. Trvppixo ; "a pyrrhic dance; " i. e. a martial dance in which a very rapid step was used. 2. 0-7iw5e?o9 ; " relating to a truce : " because at the sacrifices used at the time of making a truce, slow, solemn strains were used in which a foot of two long syllables predominated. 3. Idwroi) ; " to attack : " because the early satirical poets especially used this foot in their lampoons. Yet others refer it to other sources. See Iambein Class. Diet. 4. rpoxcuos ; " relating to running ; " because this foot runs on quickly and smoothly — Or Xopslos ; '« belonging to the chorus : " because adapted to the move- ments of the chorus in dancing. 5. Tpeis, Ppaxvs; "three short : " as it consists of three short syllables. P 6 324 LATIN GRAMMAR. [§ 20L 6. fioXocraos ; "a Molossian : " because the Molossi, a people of Thes- saly, were accustomed to make great use of this foot in their war- songs which they chanted as they went to battle. 7. ScZktvAos ; "a finger : " which has three joints — one long, two short. 8. dvdTTai(TTQs ; " struck back : " the preceding foot struck back or re- versed. 9. dfx(p\ (Spaxvs ; " on both sides short : " a long syllable between two short ones. 10. a/xcpl, fxaKpos; "on both sides long: " a short syllable between two long ones — Called alsc KpT]Tix6s ; " Cretic, i. e. Cretan : " because used especially in the metres employed by the inhabitants of Crete. 1 1 . fiaKXtios ; " relating to Bacchus : " because used frequently in hymns to Bacc us. * ' I " opposite to a bacchius : " "a bacchius back ,^ r I again : " i. e. a bacchius reversed. Tta\LU, paKx^ios; J ° 13. TrpoKeXevafiarLKos ; "adapted to exhortation:" because the rapid utterance attending this foot is suitable for animated exhorta- tion. 14. 5iS, o-7iw5e?os ; "twice, a spondee : " i. e. a double spondee. 1 5. \wvik6s ; " Ionic : " as having its origin in Ionia. The further de- scription, a minori, points out the foot beginning with two short syllables ; a mqjori with two long syllables. 17. 5ts, la/nfios ; "twice, an iambus : " i. e. an iambus repeated. 18. dls 9 rpox^os', " twice, a trochee : " i. e. a trochee repeated — Or diXooeios; " twice a choreiis ; " i. e. a choreiis repeated. 19. duTiairaaros ; "drawn in a contrary direction:" hence the name applied to the syzygy or union of an iambus and a trochee ; the iambus preceding. 20. x°p' ia ^ os > tne junction of a choreiis or trochee with an iambus. 21. iraioop or irai&v. By some considered to have its name from Paeon the inventor of these feet ; b) others, from Paean, a hymn in honour of Apollo, in which they are said to have been much used. According to the position of the long syllable they are called, first, second, &c. 25. iirirptros; " a third in addition: " i.e. !+} = $; hence in the ratio of 4 to 3. Epitrit is the name given to a combination of a spon- dee with an iambus or a trochee ; for a spondee has 2 riorce; the others, respectively, 1 ± ; (2 to li = 4 to 3). According to the posi- tion of the short syllable the foot is named as above. A combination of syllables of like quantity does not form a proper metrical foot; i. e^a foot from a given number of which a § 202, 203.] prosody. 325 verse may be formed. Hence the spondee, tribrach, and niolossus are called spurious feet. Under certain rules they may be em- ployed in the place of feet of equal time : a spondee for a dactyl or anapaest ; a tribrach for an iambus or trochee ; and a molossus for a choriambus, &c. A pyrrhic, also, is a spurious foot, and may in like manner be used as the representative of a long syllable. ARSIS AND THESIS. § 202. To all genuine feet belong, 1. arsis (&p. JEn. viii. 92. Obs. 1 . When the caesura semiseptenaria is used, there is generally also found a quasi ccesura at the commencement of the second foot. Toller e hu\mo, — vic\torque vi\rum — voli\tare per \ ord.\ Virg. Georg. iii. 9. Inde do\mum, — si \ forte pe\dem, — si \ forte, tii\lisset. Virg. JEn. iii. 756. Obs. 2. The ccesura is, to a certain extent, influenced by the sense. Hence in the following line the ccesura must be regarded as semiseptenaria, not semiquinaria. Ocyus | adver\tunt prb~\ras — ur\bique propinqudnt. Virg. JEn. viii. 101. Obs. 3. There is also a spurious kind of Ccesura, called Ccesura Bucolica, found at times at the close of the fourth foot, after one of the before-mentioned Ccesurce. As, however, the word ends there, the term Incision, as explained § 208., is more applicable to it. It tends to give a sudden check to the current of the verse, and is considered to impart the appearance of natural or rustic simplicity to the poet's words. The Greek Bucolic poets used it greatly, and, following them, Virgil makes frequent employment of it in his Eclogues and Georgics. Nymphce\, nosier a\mor, — Li\bethrides, \\ aut mihi \ carmen, Quale me\o Cod\ro, — con\cedite |j proximo, \ Phcebi Verstbiis | ille fa\cit, — aut \ si non || possumus \ omnes Hie ar\guta sa\crd — pen\debit \ | fistula \ pinu. Virg. Eel. vii. 21. Nee sum ani\mi dubi\us — ver\bis ed || vincere \ magnum \ Quam sit, et \ angus\tis — hunc j adder e \\ rebus ho\norem. \ Sed me \ Pamas\si — de\serta per \\ ardud \ dulcis \ Haptdt d\mor. Jilvdt \ ire — ju\gis, qua \\ nulla pri\orum \ Cdstdli\am mol\li — di\vertitur || orbitd j clivo. Virg. Georg. iii. 289. § 211. A monosyllabic word is, for the most part, preceded by another monosyllabic word. Occasionally, there is a deviation from this rule, but it is only when the poet intends to produce some ab- ruptness in the verse, and to point out something vast, terrible, or uncouth. Pallddis | auxUi\o — sem ] \per stetit. \ Impius | ex quo. \ Virg. ZEn. ii. 163. Ddtldtus: \ insequi\tur cumu\lo — pr&\ruptus d\quce mons. Virg. JEn. i. 105. Spes Ddnd\um; frac\t | W u _-, are called an Ana- creontic foot. If from this the first two short syllables be removed, there remain an Ionic a majore, and a spondee ; u w | ; and for these may be substituted their equivalents in time ; i e. a double iambus and a spondee ; for which last a trochee may be used ; _ V, - \j | - *. Prefixing to the feet just named the two short syllables ori- ginally taken away, or their representative, the following is ob- tained. N.B. This forms the base of the Galliambus mentioned below, § 23 . CHORIAMBIC VEESE. § 224. When the lyric poets use the Choriambic feet, they preserve them pure, yet always subjoin them to a base. In the comic writers parts occur which, according to the view taken by some editors, are to be regarded as Choriambic lines combined with lines of a different metre. Yet other editors take a different view of the matter by placing all in one line, forming thus what are called asynartete verses (aowa pT^ros, " not united ") ; from their being formed of heterogeneous feet. Such is the pas- sage in Ter. Ad. iv. 4. 4. Membra metu | debilia Sunt animus timore Obstipuit | pectore nil Sistere consili quit. These are sometimes placed thus : Membra metu debilia sunt : animus timore obstipuit. Pectore consistere nihil consili quit. Vah ! COMPOUND VERSES. § 225. These are verses subjoined to others of a different kind, which latter form what is called their " base." N. B. In the following examples the base is indicated by + affixed to it. § 226.] prosody. 339 § 226. Verses with a Dactylic Base. 1 . Versus Aristophamcus ; " Aristophanic verse : " a trochaic monometer with a dactyl as its base. Lydid | + die per \ omnes. \ Cur neque | + mili\tdris.\ Hor. Od. i. 8. 1, 5. Obs. Some consider this to be either ah iambic monometer catalectic or a bacchiac affixed to a choriambic base. Cur neque mi | + Maris. Lydid die | + per omnes. N.B. Verses formed from trochees after a dactylic base are called Logacedic (Koyos prose, doibrj a song) ; because they are supposed to com- bine poetry and prose. 2. Alcaicus decasyllabus ; "Alcaic decasyllable : " so called from its use in the Alcaic metre, and the number of syllables (10) which it contains : a trochaic monometer, with a dactylic dimeter as its base. — \j \j \ — ^j v-/ I -j- — \j 1 — CJ Si gemilndnt Cory \ + bdntes \ cera.\ Jupiter | ipse ru \ -j- ens tu\multu.\ Hor. Od. i. 16. 8, 12. 3. Elegiambus ; "Elegiambus : " an iambic dimeter with a base consisting of a dactylic trimeter catalecticus in dissyllabum. The last syllable of the base is sometimes long in arsis. Incision coin- cides with the termination of the base. Scribere \ versicu\lds\\ + amo\re per\cussum \ grdvi. Inachi\d fure\re \\ + silvis \ hono\rem de\cutit. Hor. JEpod. xi. 2. 6. Obs. The first and third feet of the iambic dimeter may be spondees. 4. Versus Archilochius major ; " greater Archilochian verse : " a trochaic dimeter brachycatalecticus, added to a dactylic tetrameter as its base. — W — WW — w \ — \j \j -\- — \J \ — \J \ — V Solvitur | dcris M\ems gra\ta vice + veris \ et Fd\voni. Obs. The first three feet of the base admit spondees. Alter \no ter\rdm quati unt pede \ -\- dum grd\vis Cy\cldpiim. Ac neque \ jam stabufis gdu\det pecus \ -j- aut d\rator \ igni. Hor. Od. i. 4. 7, 3. Q 2 340 LATIN GRAMMAR. [§ 227. § 227. Verses with a Spondaic Base. 1. Versus Pherecrateils, " Pherecratean Verse:" formed from a Logacedic verse (see § 226. 1. JST.B.), consisting of a dactyl and a trochee, added to a spondee as the base. Portum | -j- nonne vildes ut. Vixdu | + rare carina. Hor. Od. i. 14. 3, 7. 2. Versus Phalcecius ; " Phaloecian verse : " a Logaoedic verse (see § 226. 1. N~.B.), consisting of a dactyl and a trochaic dimeter brachycatalectic, with a spondee as the base. — — j -J- — \j \j j — v-* ] — «w» J — y j Passer | + delict d? me\(e pu\ elM \ Quicum] + ludere | quemln si\nu te\nere.\ Catull. ii. 1, 2. 06s. In the place of the spondee, a trochee or an iambus or a tribrach is sometimes found. Ari\ + da modo j pumi\ce expd\litum. Meas + esse alt quid piitdre \ nugas.\ Obs. At Catullus, xlv. 21. the line begins either with a pyrrbic or a dactyl : which of the two it is must be decided by the position of est. If est is considered as belonging to line 20 , line 21. begins with a pyrrhic; if to line 21., then the first foot is a dactyl. Ne po-\-nas Neme\sis re jponat \ Ate \ (est) or (Est) ve?ie-\-mens Dea; | l v. Idus. > V. Idus. V. " Idus. 10 VI. < Ante IV. IV. IV. 11 V. Idus. III. J III. J hi. j 12 IV. Pridie Idus. Pridie Idus. Pridie Idus. 13 in. . Idus. Idus. Idus. 14 Pridie Idus. XIX." xvin. XVI." 15 Idas. xvin. XVII. XV. 16 XVII. " xvn. XVI. XIV. o 17 XVI. XVI. XV. xin. "3 «| 18 XV. XV. o XIV. o XII. 19 20 XIV. xui. ~+3 « XIV. XIII. +3 J XIII. XII. +3 J^ XI. X. jl 21 22 XII. XI. X1T. XI. u MS* XI. X. -it IX. vin. 23 X. C § ir - X. IX. II vn. ^ -^ 24 IX. IS z IX. o.'| VIII. VI. +a Sa 25 VIII. " J J VIII. ~ — VII. f 2 v. <~ 26 VII. •+2 2 VII. <~ VI. «J IV. 27 VI. < VI. V. nt- 28 V. V. IV. Pridie Cal. 29 IV. IV. in. of fol. Month. 30 III. III. j Pridie Cal. 31 Pridie Cal. offoL Month. Pridie Cal. of fol. Month. of fol. Month. § 233.] MODE OF RECKONING. 347 Mode or Reckoning the Days of the Month. The Roman month had in it three principal days, — the Calends, the Nones, the Ides. From each of these the days were reckoned on to the following principal division : for instance, the day after the Calends was reckoned so many days before the Nones ; the day after the Nones was so many days before the Ides ; the day after the Ides was so many days before the Calends of the month next in succession. It should also be noticed, that each of these principal days was included in the calculation : so that the second day before them was styled die tertio ante Calen- das, or Nonas, or Idus, as the case might be. Further, as the names of the months are strictly adjectives, having mensis' to be supplied with them, they are used in concord with Calendar, Nonas, Idus, according to the case. Hence it will be seen that the Roman mode of computing the days of the month differed entirely from that in use amongst us. Thus, 23rd December would be die decimo ante Calendas Janu- arias ; 8th August, die sexto ante Idus Augustas ; 20th July, die decimo tertio ante Calendas Augustas; 15th May, Idibus Maiis; 14th December, die undevigesimo ante Calendas Januarias ; 3rd December, die tertio ante Nonas Decembres. In expressing the days as above given, die and ante are some- times omitted ; so that we find such expressions as decimo Ca- lendas Januarias; sexto Idus Augustas ; decimo tertio Calendas Au- gustas ; undevigesimo Calendas Januarias; tertio Nonas Decembres. Further, we sometimes find yet another mode of reckoning, — ante diem decimum Calendas Januarias. This is only to be ex- plained on the supposition, that originally ante was thrown back from its right place, and prefixed to die ; and that subsequently the ablative case became changed into the accusative, thus ap- pearing as if it depended on the preposition. In leap year both the 24th and 25th of February were termed sexto ante Calendas Martias : the 25th was sometimes called bi- sextus, also bisextum. Hence the year was denominated bissextilis. Computation of Monet. § 233. The most usual way of computing money among the Romans was by the Sestertius, sometimes called Sestertius Nummus and sometimes Nummus alone ; which was worth, of English money, rather more than twopence, viz., 2d. '5 farth. It was often ex- pressed by the abbreviation L.L.S., as representing either Libellce et Semis, or IIS. (i. e. duo et semis). In the course of time these 348 LATIN GRAMMAR. [§ 233, 234. marks were placed together, and from them was formed H., — so that the abbreviated description of a sestertius in ordinary use is H.S. The word sestertium (which is a mere term for a sum, not the name of a coin) was used to express 1000 sestertii. Strictly speak- ing, it is the contracted form of sestertiorum, the genitive plural of sestertius, and is dependent on millia, to be supplied. In course of time, however, it came to be regarded and treated as a neuter noun of the second declension. When, then, a numeral adjective is joined with this word, so many thousand sesterces are signified : octo sestertia, 8000 sesterces ; but octo seste?*tii, 8 sesterces. Capit ille ex suis prcediis sexcenta sestertia, ego centena ex meis. Cic. Parad. 6. i. e. 600,000, 100,000. Moreover, sestertium joined to a numeral adverb is considered and constructed as a noun of the singular number only ; and the two together denote so many hundred thousand sesterces, as if centena millia were to be supplied. Quum ei testamento sestertium millies relinquatur. Cic. Off. iii. 24. Ad summam sestertii decies in cerarium retulit. Liv. xlv. 4. Sexagies sestertio margaritam mercatus est. Suet. Cass. 50. i,e. 100,000,000; 1,000,000; 6,000,000, sesterces, respectively. § 234. Abbreviations in more Common Use. A. Aulus. 2E. ASdilis. Ap. Appius. C. Caius* Cal. Calendce, according to its case. Cn. Cnceus. Cos. Consul, according to its case. Coss. Consules, in its proper case. D. Decimus. F. Filius. G. Gains. Gn. Gnceus. Id. Idus, according to its case. Imp. Imperator, according to its case. K. Kceso. L. Lucius. M. Marcus. M\ Manius. Mam. Mamercus. 1ST. Nepos. N". Numerius. Non. Nonce, according to its case. O. M. or Opt. Max. Optimus Maximus. P. Publius. P. C. Patres Conscripti. PL Plebis. Pont. Max. Pontifex Maximus. Pop. Populus. P. R. Populus Romanus. Pr. Prator. § 234.] TABLE OF ABBREVIATIONS. 349 Prsef. Prcefectus. Proc. Proconsul. Q. or Qu. Quintus. Q. B. F. F. Q. S. Quod bonum, felix, faustum que sit. Q. D. B. V. Quod Deus bene vertat Q. F. F. Q. S. Quod felix faustumque sit. Quir. Quirites. B>esp. Respublica. S. Senatus. S. Sextus. S. (in letters). Salutem. S. C. Senatus Consultum. S. D. P. Salutem dicit plurimam. Ser. Servius. S. P. Q. R. Senatus Populus que Homanus. Sp. Spurius. S. V. B. E. E. V. St oaZe* fcne es£, ego vafeo. T. Tzte. Ti. or Tib. Tiberius. Tr. Tribunus. Tr. PL Tribunus Plebis* THE END. London : Spottiswoodes and Shaw, New-street- Square. i ?$